gnucash-docs master: Multiple changes pushed
John Ralls
jralls at code.gnucash.org
Sat Sep 29 19:49:07 EDT 2018
Updated via https://github.com/Gnucash/gnucash-docs/commit/5c66e628 (commit)
via https://github.com/Gnucash/gnucash-docs/commit/2e967708 (commit)
via https://github.com/Gnucash/gnucash-docs/commit/a1977130 (commit)
via https://github.com/Gnucash/gnucash-docs/commit/effc483b (commit)
via https://github.com/Gnucash/gnucash-docs/commit/6d50f4aa (commit)
via https://github.com/Gnucash/gnucash-docs/commit/c70abf4a (commit)
via https://github.com/Gnucash/gnucash-docs/commit/9623f0ce (commit)
via https://github.com/Gnucash/gnucash-docs/commit/67f69daf (commit)
via https://github.com/Gnucash/gnucash-docs/commit/3f873a98 (commit)
via https://github.com/Gnucash/gnucash-docs/commit/a2c5006a (commit)
via https://github.com/Gnucash/gnucash-docs/commit/7a7a0da4 (commit)
via https://github.com/Gnucash/gnucash-docs/commit/3144c4e6 (commit)
via https://github.com/Gnucash/gnucash-docs/commit/297f3f45 (commit)
via https://github.com/Gnucash/gnucash-docs/commit/c8171320 (commit)
via https://github.com/Gnucash/gnucash-docs/commit/ecd868ba (commit)
via https://github.com/Gnucash/gnucash-docs/commit/507bdc1a (commit)
via https://github.com/Gnucash/gnucash-docs/commit/f5acedca (commit)
via https://github.com/Gnucash/gnucash-docs/commit/6929e9f1 (commit)
via https://github.com/Gnucash/gnucash-docs/commit/98040e59 (commit)
via https://github.com/Gnucash/gnucash-docs/commit/1840b871 (commit)
via https://github.com/Gnucash/gnucash-docs/commit/9dfd19c8 (commit)
via https://github.com/Gnucash/gnucash-docs/commit/c111e08b (commit)
via https://github.com/Gnucash/gnucash-docs/commit/76f4d573 (commit)
via https://github.com/Gnucash/gnucash-docs/commit/05227420 (commit)
via https://github.com/Gnucash/gnucash-docs/commit/a201379d (commit)
via https://github.com/Gnucash/gnucash-docs/commit/3d3b9c87 (commit)
via https://github.com/Gnucash/gnucash-docs/commit/94f1bc12 (commit)
via https://github.com/Gnucash/gnucash-docs/commit/9b6b811d (commit)
via https://github.com/Gnucash/gnucash-docs/commit/3f2a8c29 (commit)
via https://github.com/Gnucash/gnucash-docs/commit/8ffc1515 (commit)
via https://github.com/Gnucash/gnucash-docs/commit/94744d93 (commit)
via https://github.com/Gnucash/gnucash-docs/commit/93dbe52c (commit)
via https://github.com/Gnucash/gnucash-docs/commit/f4a58baa (commit)
via https://github.com/Gnucash/gnucash-docs/commit/ccbb2cab (commit)
from https://github.com/Gnucash/gnucash-docs/commit/9d75de82 (commit)
commit 5c66e6283af6818398169d9327e3d26f8204a0e8
Merge: 9d75de8 2e96770
Author: John Ralls <jralls at ceridwen.us>
Date: Sat Sep 29 16:48:53 2018 -0700
Merge branch 'maint'
commit 2e967708caf8d2e9fba2b406f742a1d1b20afd5b
Author: John Ralls <jralls at ceridwen.us>
Date: Sat Sep 29 16:35:38 2018 -0700
Release Documentation 3.3.
diff --git a/AUTHORS b/AUTHORS
index d94470f..6bcc3f4 100644
--- a/AUTHORS
+++ b/AUTHORS
@@ -6,6 +6,7 @@ Frank H. Ellenberger
Mike Evans
Chris Good
Geert Janssens
+Chris Lam
John Ralls
David T.
diff --git a/NEWS b/NEWS
index 52e5156..9020a71 100644
--- a/NEWS
+++ b/NEWS
@@ -1,5 +1,15 @@
Version History
---------------
+ 3.3 - 20 September 2018
+ o Bug 791169 - Add Reconciliation definition to glossary.
+ o Bug 796800 - None of the "GnuCash Tutorial and Concepts Guide"
+ graphics (.png files) display.
+ o Bug 796820 - References to "Gnome Bugzilla" should be changed
+ to "GnuCash Bugzilla".
+ o Bug 777893 - Add information to Guide about file formats, esp. SQL.
+ o Add travis continuous integration to docs.
+ o Add tax tables to documentation.
+ o Document Filter/Closing transactions feature.
3.2 - 24 June 2018
o Bug 796098 - V 3.1 Missing images in Tutorial and Concepts Guide in
PDF and Online Help pages.
diff --git a/configure.ac b/configure.ac
index 8044611..ee061e2 100644
--- a/configure.ac
+++ b/configure.ac
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
# copyright (c) 2003-2016 GnuCash Development Team
dnl Process this file with autoconf to produce a configure script.
-AC_INIT([gnucash-docs], [3.2], [https://bugzilla.gnome.org/page.cgi?id=browse.html&product=GnuCash], , [http://www.gnucash.org/])
+AC_INIT([gnucash-docs], [3.3], [https://bugzilla.gnome.org/page.cgi?id=browse.html&product=GnuCash], , [http://www.gnucash.org/])
AC_CANONICAL_HOST
dnl ==========================================================================
diff --git a/guide/C/gnucash-guide-C.omf b/guide/C/gnucash-guide-C.omf
index 7b0a9ad..5df3bea 100644
--- a/guide/C/gnucash-guide-C.omf
+++ b/guide/C/gnucash-guide-C.omf
@@ -90,10 +90,10 @@
GnuCash Tutorial and Concepts Guide
</title>
<date>
- 2018-06-24
+ 2018-09-30
</date>
- <version identifier="3.2" date="2018-06-24" description="Created for
- GnuCash 3.2 Release"/>
+ <version identifier="3.3" date="2018-09-30" description="Created for
+ GnuCash 3.3 Release"/>
<subject category="Applications|Office|Financial"/>
<description>
This document provides a tutorial and concepts guide for the GnuCash
@@ -107,5 +107,5 @@
<language code="C"/>
<relation seriesid="ef1352c0-0831-11d7-91de-f42a0df0ca1a"/>
<rights type="GNU FDL" license.version="1.1" holder="GnuCash Development Team"/>
- </resource>
+ </resource>
</omf>
diff --git a/guide/C/gnucash-guide.xml b/guide/C/gnucash-guide.xml
index f83d35e..d7e422a 100644
--- a/guide/C/gnucash-guide.xml
+++ b/guide/C/gnucash-guide.xml
@@ -39,10 +39,10 @@
Some global declarations which are used in the files. For easier
maintenance they should be collected here.
-->
-<!ENTITY manrevision "3.2">
-<!ENTITY date "24 June 2018">
+<!ENTITY manrevision "3.3">
+<!ENTITY date "30 September 2018">
<!ENTITY vers-unstable "master">
-<!ENTITY vers-stable "3.2">
+<!ENTITY vers-stable "3.3">
<!ENTITY series-unstable "master">
<!ENTITY series-stable "3">
<!--
@@ -74,7 +74,7 @@
<!--
(Do not remove this comment block.)
Version: 3.2
- Last modified: 24 June 2018
+ Last modified: 29 September 2018
Maintainers:
Gnucash Development Team <gnucash-devel at gnucash.org>
Translators:
@@ -152,6 +152,14 @@
<revhistory>
<revision>
+ <revnumber>&app; Tutorial and Concepts Guide v3.3</revnumber>
+ <date>30 September 2018</date>
+ <revdescription>
+ <para role="author">Multiple authors</para>
+ <para role="publisher">&app; Documentation Team</para>
+ </revdescription>
+ </revision>
+ <revision>
<revnumber>&app; Tutorial and Concepts Guide v3.2</revnumber>
<date>24 June 2018</date>
<revdescription>
diff --git a/help/C/gnucash-help-C.omf b/help/C/gnucash-help-C.omf
index 2cd02b1..13b4eab 100644
--- a/help/C/gnucash-help-C.omf
+++ b/help/C/gnucash-help-C.omf
@@ -52,8 +52,8 @@
<date>
2018-06-24
</date>
- <version identifier="3.2" date="2018-06-24" description="Created for
- GnuCash 3.2 Release"/>
+ <version identifier="3.3" date="2018-09-30" description="Created for
+ GnuCash 3.3 Release"/>
<subject category="Applications|Office|Financial"/>
<description>
This document provides basic help on how to use the GnuCash Financial
diff --git a/help/C/gnucash-help.xml b/help/C/gnucash-help.xml
index 5acb279..ef22c43 100644
--- a/help/C/gnucash-help.xml
+++ b/help/C/gnucash-help.xml
@@ -31,10 +31,10 @@
Some global declarations which are used in the files. For easier
maintenance they should be collected here.
-->
-<!ENTITY manrevision "3.2">
-<!ENTITY date "24 June 2018">
+<!ENTITY manrevision "3.3">
+<!ENTITY date "30 September2018">
<!ENTITY vers-unstable "master">
-<!ENTITY vers-stable "3.2">
+<!ENTITY vers-stable "3.3">
<!ENTITY series-unstable "master">
<!ENTITY series-stable "3">
<!--
@@ -58,8 +58,8 @@
]>
<!--
(Do not remove this comment block.)
- Version: 3.2
- Last modified: 24 June 2018
+ Version: 3.3
+ Last modified: 29 September 2018
Maintainers:
Gnucash Development Team <gnucash-devel at gnucash.org>
Translators:
@@ -103,6 +103,14 @@
<revhistory>
<revision>
+ <revnumber>&app; Help Manual v3.3</revnumber>
+ <date>30 September 2018</date>
+ <revdescription>
+ <para role="author">Multiple authors</para>
+ <para role="publisher">&app; Documentation Team</para>
+ </revdescription>
+ </revision>
+ <revision>
<revnumber>&app; Help Manual v3.2</revnumber>
<date>24 June 2018</date>
<revdescription>
commit a1977130a65c39228f908b45ca456690eed6ec4c
Author: Geert Janssens <geert at kobaltwit.be>
Date: Fri Sep 28 17:23:54 2018 +0200
Bug 796820 - References to "Gnome Bugzilla" should be changed to "GnuCash Bugzilla"
diff --git a/guide/C/appendixb.xml b/guide/C/appendixb.xml
index d13f60d..421b3cd 100644
--- a/guide/C/appendixb.xml
+++ b/guide/C/appendixb.xml
@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@
<sect2 id="appendixb_general_newFeatures">
<title>Q: I really want feature XYZ but <application>&app;</application> doesn’t have it. How do I get it added?</title>
- <para>A: Ask nicely. :-) You can file an enhancement request at <ulink url="http://bugzilla.gnome.org/enter_bug.cgi?product=&app;"></ulink>. Please bear in mind to describe your proposed enhancement as verbosely as possible. The trick here is to learn how to give the best information to the programmers about what your proposed new feature should do. If you want to speed up development significantly, consider donating some money as described on <application>&app;</application>Development.</para>
+ <para>A: Ask nicely. :-) You can file an enhancement request at <ulink url="http://bugs.gnucash.org/enter_bug.cgi?product=&app;"></ulink>. Please bear in mind to describe your proposed enhancement as verbosely as possible. The trick here is to learn how to give the best information to the programmers about what your proposed new feature should do. If you want to speed up development significantly, consider donating some money as described on <application>&app;</application>Development.</para>
</sect2>
<sect2 id="appendixb_software_web">
@@ -95,8 +95,8 @@
<sect2 id="appendixb_software_bugs">
<title>Q: I think I found a bug. How do I report it?</title>
- <para>A: First of all, try to verify that it is indeed a bug and that it has not been reported before. Search the mail list archives (see FAQ above). Then search the <ulink url="http://bugzilla.gnome.org">Gnome Bugzilla</ulink> database.</para>
- <para>If you feel you have indeed found a bug, you can then report it at <ulink url="http://bugzilla.gnome.org/enter_bug.cgi?product=&app;"></ulink>. Please bear in mind to report your bug as verbosely as possible. The trick here is to learn how to give the best information to the programmers about how to reproduce bugs. A Programmer will usually only be able to fix a bug they can see, if you can’t make the programmer see your bug, it won’t get fixed!</para>
+ <para>A: First of all, try to verify that it is indeed a bug and that it has not been reported before. Search the mail list archives (see FAQ above). Then search the <ulink url="http://bugs.gnucash.org">&app; Bugzilla</ulink> database.</para>
+ <para>If you feel you have indeed found a bug, you can then report it at <ulink url="http://bugs.gnucash.org/enter_bug.cgi?product=&app;"></ulink>. Please bear in mind to report your bug as verbosely as possible. The trick here is to learn how to give the best information to the programmers about how to reproduce bugs. A Programmer will usually only be able to fix a bug they can see, if you can’t make the programmer see your bug, it won’t get fixed!</para>
</sect2>
</sect1>
diff --git a/guide/C/gnucash-guide.xml b/guide/C/gnucash-guide.xml
index 1eb3d46..f83d35e 100644
--- a/guide/C/gnucash-guide.xml
+++ b/guide/C/gnucash-guide.xml
@@ -395,8 +395,8 @@
this manual, follow the instructions at the
<ulink url="https://wiki.gnucash.org/wiki/Bugzilla"
>Bugzilla page of the GnuCash wiki</ulink> and use the
- <ulink url="https://bugzilla.gnome.org/browse.cgi?product=GnuCash"
- >GNOME Bug Tracking System</ulink>. There select the component
+ <ulink url="https://bugs.gnucash.org/browse.cgi?product=GnuCash"
+ >&app; Bug Tracking System</ulink>. There select the component
<emphasis>Documentation</emphasis><!-- Translators uncomment the next line: -->
<!-- or <emphasis>Translations</emphasis> -->.
</para>
diff --git a/guide/de/appendixb.xml b/guide/de/appendixb.xml
index ba039f8..c322a36 100644
--- a/guide/de/appendixb.xml
+++ b/guide/de/appendixb.xml
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@
<sect2 id="appendixb_general_newFeatures">
<title>Q: I really want feature XYZ but <application>&app;</application> doesn’t have it. How do I get it added?</title>
- <para>A: Ask nicely. :-) You can file an enhancement request at <ulink url="http://bugzilla.gnome.org/enter_bug.cgi?product=&app;"></ulink>. Please bear in mind to describe your proposed enhancement as verbosely as possible. The trick here is to learn how to give the best information to the programmers about what your proposed new feature should do. If you want to speed up development significantly, consider donating some money as described on <application>&app;</application>Development.</para>
+ <para>A: Ask nicely. :-) You can file an enhancement request at <ulink url="http://bugs.gnucash.org/enter_bug.cgi?product=&app;"></ulink>. Please bear in mind to describe your proposed enhancement as verbosely as possible. The trick here is to learn how to give the best information to the programmers about what your proposed new feature should do. If you want to speed up development significantly, consider donating some money as described on <application>&app;</application>Development.</para>
</sect2>
<sect2 id="appendixb_software_web">
@@ -97,8 +97,8 @@
<sect2 id="appendixb_software_bugs">
<title>Q: I think I found a bug. How do I report it?</title>
- <para>A: First of all, try to verify that it is indeed a bug and that it has not been reported before. Search the mail list archives (see FAQ above). Then search the <ulink url="http://bugzilla.gnome.org">Gnome Bugzilla</ulink> database.</para>
- <para>If you feel you have indeed found a bug, you can then report it at <ulink url="http://bugzilla.gnome.org/enter_bug.cgi?product=&app;"></ulink>. Please bear in mind to report your bug as verbosely as possible. The trick here is to learn how to give the best information to the programmers about how to reproduce bugs. A Programmer will usually only be able to fix a bug they can see, if you can’t make the programmer see your bug, it won’t get fixed!</para>
+ <para>A: First of all, try to verify that it is indeed a bug and that it has not been reported before. Search the mail list archives (see FAQ above). Then search the <ulink url="http://bugs.gnucash.org">&app; Bugzilla</ulink> database.</para>
+ <para>If you feel you have indeed found a bug, you can then report it at <ulink url="http://bugs.gnucash.org/enter_bug.cgi?product=&app;"></ulink>. Please bear in mind to report your bug as verbosely as possible. The trick here is to learn how to give the best information to the programmers about how to reproduce bugs. A Programmer will usually only be able to fix a bug they can see, if you can’t make the programmer see your bug, it won’t get fixed!</para>
</sect2>
</sect1>
diff --git a/guide/de/gnucash-guide.xml b/guide/de/gnucash-guide.xml
index f33bf4f..e8eb62f 100644
--- a/guide/de/gnucash-guide.xml
+++ b/guide/de/gnucash-guide.xml
@@ -405,8 +405,8 @@
Verbesserungsvorschlag einzureichen, folgen Sie den Anweisungen auf der
<ulink url="https://wiki.gnucash.org/wiki/De/Feedback"
>Feedbackseite des GnuCash-Wikis</ulink> und verwenden das
- <ulink url="https://bugzilla.gnome.org/browse.cgi?product=GnuCash"
- >GNOME Bug Tracking System</ulink>. Dort wählen Sie, je nach Ursache, die Komponente <emphasis>Documentation</emphasis> oder <emphasis>Translations</emphasis>.
+ <ulink url="https://bugs.gnucash.org/browse.cgi?product=GnuCash"
+ >&app; Bug Tracking System</ulink>. Dort wählen Sie, je nach Ursache, die Komponente <emphasis>Documentation</emphasis> oder <emphasis>Translations</emphasis>.
</para>
<!-- Translators may also add here a feedback address for translations -->
</legalnotice>
diff --git a/guide/it/gnucash-guide.xml b/guide/it/gnucash-guide.xml
index f1fbb11..e97d6a4 100644
--- a/guide/it/gnucash-guide.xml
+++ b/guide/it/gnucash-guide.xml
@@ -344,7 +344,7 @@
<releaseinfo>Questa guida contiene un esempio pratico di utilizzo di &app; e descrive i concetti su cui &app; si basa.</releaseinfo>
<legalnotice>
<title>Feedback</title>
- <para>Per segnalare dei bug o proporre dei suggerimenti riguardanti questo programma o questo manuale, seguire le indicazioni fornite in <ulink url="http://bugzilla.gnome.org">GNOME Bug Tracking System</ulink>.</para>
+ <para>Per segnalare dei bug o proporre dei suggerimenti riguardanti questo programma o questo manuale, seguire le indicazioni fornite in <ulink url="http://bugs.gnucash.org">&app; Bug Tracking System</ulink>.</para>
<!-- Translators may also add here a feedback address for translations -->
</legalnotice>
@@ -12860,7 +12860,7 @@ work on earlier versions, too.</para>
<sect2 id="appendixb_general_newFeatures">
<title>D: Vorrei usare la funzione XYZ ma <application>&app;</application> non ce l’ha. Come posso fare?</title>
- <para>R: Chiedi gentilmente. :-) Puoi presentare una richiesta qui <ulink url="http://bugzilla.gnome.org/enter_bug.cgi?product=gnucash"/>. Ricorda di descrivere il più dettagliatamente possibile la caratteristica che vorresti vedere implementata. Il trucco sta tutto nel riuscire a fornire più informazioni possibili ai programmatori sulle caratteristiche della funzionalità da implementare. Se vuoi accelerare lo sviluppo, considera la possibilità di effettuare una donazione come descritto nella <application>&app;</application>Development.</para>
+ <para>R: Chiedi gentilmente. :-) Puoi presentare una richiesta qui <ulink url="http://bugs.gnucash.org/enter_bug.cgi?product=gnucash"/>. Ricorda di descrivere il più dettagliatamente possibile la caratteristica che vorresti vedere implementata. Il trucco sta tutto nel riuscire a fornire più informazioni possibili ai programmatori sulle caratteristiche della funzionalità da implementare. Se vuoi accelerare lo sviluppo, considera la possibilità di effettuare una donazione come descritto nella <application>&app;</application>Development.</para>
</sect2>
<sect2 id="appendixb_software_web">
@@ -12880,8 +12880,8 @@ work on earlier versions, too.</para>
<sect2 id="appendixb_software_bugs">
<title>D: Credo di aver trovato un bug. Come posso comunicarlo?</title>
- <para>R: Prima di tutto, cerca di verificare che si tratti realmente di un bug e che non sia già stato messo in evidenza in passato. Cerca nell’archivio delle liste di discussione (vedi domanda più sopra). Poi passa a cercare in <ulink url="http://bugzilla.gnome.org">Gnome Bugzilla</ulink> database.</para>
- <para>Se sei convinto di aver trovato realmente un nuovo bug, puoi comunicarlo all’indirizzo <ulink url="http://bugzilla.gnome.org/enter_bug.cgi?product=gnucash"/>. Per favore ricorda di descrivere il bug con il massimo dettaglio possibile. Il trucco sta nel riuscire a fornire più informazioni possibili ai programmatori per riuscire a riprodurre il bug. Un programmatore è in genere in grado di risolvere un bug solo quando lo vede, se non riesci a mostrarlo al programmatore, non verrà tolto!</para>
+ <para>R: Prima di tutto, cerca di verificare che si tratti realmente di un bug e che non sia già stato messo in evidenza in passato. Cerca nell’archivio delle liste di discussione (vedi domanda più sopra). Poi passa a cercare in <ulink url="http://bugs.gnucash.org">&app; Bugzilla</ulink> database.</para>
+ <para>Se sei convinto di aver trovato realmente un nuovo bug, puoi comunicarlo all’indirizzo <ulink url="http://bugs.gnucash.org/enter_bug.cgi?product=gnucash"/>. Per favore ricorda di descrivere il bug con il massimo dettaglio possibile. Il trucco sta nel riuscire a fornire più informazioni possibili ai programmatori per riuscire a riprodurre il bug. Un programmatore è in genere in grado di risolvere un bug solo quando lo vede, se non riesci a mostrarlo al programmatore, non verrà tolto!</para>
</sect2>
</sect1>
diff --git a/guide/ja/appendixb.xml b/guide/ja/appendixb.xml
index 313c8a0..f13d8b9 100644
--- a/guide/ja/appendixb.xml
+++ b/guide/ja/appendixb.xml
@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@
<sect2 id="appendixb_general_newFeatures">
<title>Q: XYZ機能ãŒæœ¬å½“ã«æ¬²ã—ã„ã§ã™ã€‚ã—ã‹ã—&app;ã¯æŒã£ã¦ã„ã¾ã›ã‚“。</title>
- <para>A: ã†ã¾ããŠé¡˜ã„ã—ã¦ãã ã•ã„ :-) エンãƒãƒ³ã‚¹è¦æœ›æ›¸ã‚’ <ulink url="http://bugzilla.gnome.org/enter_bug.cgi?product=&app;"></ulink>ã«ç™ºè¡Œã§ãã¾ã™ã€‚エンãƒãƒ³ã‚¹è¦æœ›ã‚’å¯èƒ½ãªé™ã‚Šå†—é•·ã«è¨˜è¿°ã™ã‚‹ã“ã¨ã‚’念é ã«ãŠã„ã¦ãã ã•ã„。ã“ã“ã®æ‰‹æ®µã¯ã€ã‚ãªãŸãŒæ案ã—ãŸæ–°æ©Ÿèƒ½ãŒè¡Œã‚ãªã‘ã‚Œã°ãªã‚‰ãªã„ã“ã¨ã«é–¢ã—ã¦æœ€è‰¯æƒ…å ±ã‚’ãƒ—ãƒã‚°ãƒ©ãƒžã«æä¾›ã™ã‚‹æ–¹æ³•ã‚’å¦ã¶ã“ã¨ã§ã™ã€‚開発ãŒã‹ãªã‚ŠåŠ 速ã™ã‚‹ã‚ˆã†ã«æœ›ã‚“ã§ã„ã‚‹ãªã‚‰ã€&app;Developmentã§èª¬æ˜Žã—ã¦ã‚るよã†ã«ã„ãらã‹ã®é‡‘éŠã®å¯„付を行ã†ã“ã¨ã‚’考ãˆã¦ãã ã•ã„。</para>
+ <para>A: ã†ã¾ããŠé¡˜ã„ã—ã¦ãã ã•ã„ :-) エンãƒãƒ³ã‚¹è¦æœ›æ›¸ã‚’ <ulink url="http://bugs.gnucash.org/enter_bug.cgi?product=&app;"></ulink>ã«ç™ºè¡Œã§ãã¾ã™ã€‚エンãƒãƒ³ã‚¹è¦æœ›ã‚’å¯èƒ½ãªé™ã‚Šå†—é•·ã«è¨˜è¿°ã™ã‚‹ã“ã¨ã‚’念é ã«ãŠã„ã¦ãã ã•ã„。ã“ã“ã®æ‰‹æ®µã¯ã€ã‚ãªãŸãŒæ案ã—ãŸæ–°æ©Ÿèƒ½ãŒè¡Œã‚ãªã‘ã‚Œã°ãªã‚‰ãªã„ã“ã¨ã«é–¢ã—ã¦æœ€è‰¯æƒ…å ±ã‚’ãƒ—ãƒã‚°ãƒ©ãƒžã«æä¾›ã™ã‚‹æ–¹æ³•ã‚’å¦ã¶ã“ã¨ã§ã™ã€‚開発ãŒã‹ãªã‚ŠåŠ 速ã™ã‚‹ã‚ˆã†ã«æœ›ã‚“ã§ã„ã‚‹ãªã‚‰ã€&app;Developmentã§èª¬æ˜Žã—ã¦ã‚るよã†ã«ã„ãらã‹ã®é‡‘éŠã®å¯„付を行ã†ã“ã¨ã‚’考ãˆã¦ãã ã•ã„。</para>
</sect2>
<sect2 id="appendixb_software_web">
@@ -95,8 +95,8 @@
<sect2 id="appendixb_software_bugs">
<title>Q: ãƒã‚°ã‚’見ã¤ã‘ãŸã‚ˆã†ã§ã™ã€‚ã©ã†ã‚„ã£ã¦ãƒã‚°ã‚’å ±å‘Šã—ã¾ã™ã‹?</title>
- <para>A: ã¾ãšã€æœ¬å½“ã«ã€ãã‚ŒãŒãƒã‚°ã§ã‚ã‚Šã€ä»¥å‰å ±å‘Šã•ã‚ŒãŸã“ã¨ãŒãªã„ã“ã¨ã‚’確ã‹ã‚るよã†ã«ã—ã¾ã™ã€‚メーリングリストアーカイブを検索ã—ã¦ãã ã•ã„ (FAQã®ä¸Šéƒ¨ã‚’å‚ç…§)。後ã¯ã€<ulink url="http://bugzilla.gnome.org">Gnome Bugzilla</ulink>データベースを検索ã—ã¾ã™ã€‚</para>
- <para>ã‚ãªãŸãŒæœ¬å½“ã«ãƒã‚°ã‚’発見ã—ãŸã¨æ„Ÿã˜ãŸã‚‰ã€å¾Œã¯ <ulink url="http://bugzilla.gnome.org/enter_bug.cgi?product=&app;"></ulink> ã§ãã‚Œã‚’å ±å‘Šã§ãã¾ã™ã€‚å¯èƒ½ãªé™ã‚Šå†—é•·ã«å ±å‘Šã™ã‚‹ã“ã¨ã‚’念é ã«ãŠã„ã¦ãã ã•ã„。ã“ã“ã®æ‰‹æ®µã¯ã€ãƒã‚°ã‚’ã©ã†å†ç”Ÿã•ã›ã‚‹ã‹ã«é–¢ã—ã¦æœ€è‰¯æƒ…å ±ã‚’ãƒ—ãƒã‚°ãƒ©ãƒžã«æä¾›ã™ã‚‹æ–¹æ³•ã‚’å¦ã¶ã“ã¨ã§ã™ã€‚通常ã€ãƒ—ãƒã‚°ãƒ©ãƒžã¯å½¼ã‚‰ãŒç†è§£ã§ãã‚‹ãƒã‚°ã‚’ä¿®æ£ã§ãã‚‹ã ã‘ã§ã™ã€‚ã‚ãªãŸãŒãƒ—ãƒã‚°ãƒ©ãƒžã«ãƒã‚°ã‚’ç†è§£ã•ã›ã‚‹ã“ã¨ãŒã§ããªã„ãªã‚‰ã€ãã‚Œã¯ä¿®æ£ã•ã‚Œã¾ã›ã‚“!</para>
+ <para>A: ã¾ãšã€æœ¬å½“ã«ã€ãã‚ŒãŒãƒã‚°ã§ã‚ã‚Šã€ä»¥å‰å ±å‘Šã•ã‚ŒãŸã“ã¨ãŒãªã„ã“ã¨ã‚’確ã‹ã‚るよã†ã«ã—ã¾ã™ã€‚メーリングリストアーカイブを検索ã—ã¦ãã ã•ã„ (FAQã®ä¸Šéƒ¨ã‚’å‚ç…§)。後ã¯ã€<ulink url="http://bugs.gnucash.org">&app; Bugzilla</ulink>データベースを検索ã—ã¾ã™ã€‚</para>
+ <para>ã‚ãªãŸãŒæœ¬å½“ã«ãƒã‚°ã‚’発見ã—ãŸã¨æ„Ÿã˜ãŸã‚‰ã€å¾Œã¯ <ulink url="http://bugs.gnucash.org/enter_bug.cgi?product=&app;"></ulink> ã§ãã‚Œã‚’å ±å‘Šã§ãã¾ã™ã€‚å¯èƒ½ãªé™ã‚Šå†—é•·ã«å ±å‘Šã™ã‚‹ã“ã¨ã‚’念é ã«ãŠã„ã¦ãã ã•ã„。ã“ã“ã®æ‰‹æ®µã¯ã€ãƒã‚°ã‚’ã©ã†å†ç”Ÿã•ã›ã‚‹ã‹ã«é–¢ã—ã¦æœ€è‰¯æƒ…å ±ã‚’ãƒ—ãƒã‚°ãƒ©ãƒžã«æä¾›ã™ã‚‹æ–¹æ³•ã‚’å¦ã¶ã“ã¨ã§ã™ã€‚通常ã€ãƒ—ãƒã‚°ãƒ©ãƒžã¯å½¼ã‚‰ãŒç†è§£ã§ãã‚‹ãƒã‚°ã‚’ä¿®æ£ã§ãã‚‹ã ã‘ã§ã™ã€‚ã‚ãªãŸãŒãƒ—ãƒã‚°ãƒ©ãƒžã«ãƒã‚°ã‚’ç†è§£ã•ã›ã‚‹ã“ã¨ãŒã§ããªã„ãªã‚‰ã€ãã‚Œã¯ä¿®æ£ã•ã‚Œã¾ã›ã‚“!</para>
</sect2>
</sect1>
diff --git a/guide/ja/gnucash-guide.xml b/guide/ja/gnucash-guide.xml
index d0a2644..577b413 100644
--- a/guide/ja/gnucash-guide.xml
+++ b/guide/ja/gnucash-guide.xml
@@ -228,7 +228,7 @@ Lyttle</holder> </copyright>
</releaseinfo>
<legalnotice>
<title>フィードãƒãƒƒã‚¯</title>
- <para>本パッケージãŠã‚ˆã³æœ¬æ›¸ã«é–¢ã—ã¦ãƒã‚°ã‚’å ±å‘Šã™ã‚‹ã€ã¾ãŸã¯æ案を行ã†éš›ã«ã¯ <ulink url=" http://bugzilla.gnome.org
+ <para>本パッケージãŠã‚ˆã³æœ¬æ›¸ã«é–¢ã—ã¦ãƒã‚°ã‚’å ±å‘Šã™ã‚‹ã€ã¾ãŸã¯æ案を行ã†éš›ã«ã¯ <ulink url=" http://bugs.gnucash.org
">GNOME ãƒã‚°è¿½è·¡ã‚·ã‚¹ãƒ†ãƒ </ulink>を使用ã—ã¦ãã ã•ã„。
</para>
diff --git a/guide/pt/appendixb.xml b/guide/pt/appendixb.xml
index e068149..81899de 100644
--- a/guide/pt/appendixb.xml
+++ b/guide/pt/appendixb.xml
@@ -123,7 +123,7 @@
<title>P: Gostava realmente de ter a funcionalidade XYZ mas o <application>&app;</application> não
a tem. Como é que a posso adicionar?</title>
<para>R: Peça com educação. :-) Pode fazer um pedido de melhoria em
- <ulink url="http://bugzilla.gnome.org/enter_bug.cgi?product=&app;"></ulink>. Por favor, lembre-se
+ <ulink url="http://bugs.gnucash.org/enter_bug.cgi?product=&app;"></ulink>. Por favor, lembre-se
de descrever a sua melhoria proposta de forma bastante completa. O truque aqui é aprender a dar a
melhor informação aos programadores sobre o que a sua melhoria proposta vai fazer. Se quer acelerar
o processo de desenvolvimento, considere doar algum dinheiro, conforme descrito em
@@ -159,9 +159,9 @@
<title>P: Penso que encontrei um erro. Como é que o reporto?</title>
<para>R: Primeiro, tente verificar se é realmente um erro e se ainda não foi reportado. Procure
nos arquivos de correio (veja a FAQ acima). Depois procure na base de dados do
- <ulink url="http://bugzilla.gnome.org">Bugzilla do Gnome</ulink>.</para>
+ <ulink url="http://bugs.gnucash.org">Bugzilla do Gnome</ulink>.</para>
<para>Se achar que realmente encontrou um novo erro, pode reportá-lo em
- <ulink url="http://bugzilla.gnome.org/enter_bug.cgi?product=&app;"></ulink>. Lembre-se de ser eloquente
+ <ulink url="http://bugs.gnucash.org/enter_bug.cgi?product=&app;"></ulink>. Lembre-se de ser eloquente
e claro. Tente aprender como deve informar os programadores a reproduzir o erro. Um programador só
consegue reparar um erro que consiga ver, se não o conseguir ver, o erro não será reparado.!</para>
</sect2>
diff --git a/guide/pt/gnucash-guide.xml b/guide/pt/gnucash-guide.xml
index 06f13b2..9f4731d 100644
--- a/guide/pt/gnucash-guide.xml
+++ b/guide/pt/gnucash-guide.xml
@@ -339,7 +339,7 @@
<legalnotice>
<title>Comentários</title>
<para>Para reportar um erro ou fazer uma sugestão a respeito deste pacote ou deste guia, siga as instruções no
- <ulink url="http://bugzilla.gnome.org">Sistema de rastreio de erros do GNOME</ulink>.
+ <ulink url="http://bugs.gnucash.org">Sistema de rastreio de erros do GNOME</ulink>.
</para>
<!-- Translators may also add here a feedback address for translations -->
</legalnotice>
diff --git a/guide/ru/appendixb.xml b/guide/ru/appendixb.xml
index d13f60d..421b3cd 100644
--- a/guide/ru/appendixb.xml
+++ b/guide/ru/appendixb.xml
@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@
<sect2 id="appendixb_general_newFeatures">
<title>Q: I really want feature XYZ but <application>&app;</application> doesn’t have it. How do I get it added?</title>
- <para>A: Ask nicely. :-) You can file an enhancement request at <ulink url="http://bugzilla.gnome.org/enter_bug.cgi?product=&app;"></ulink>. Please bear in mind to describe your proposed enhancement as verbosely as possible. The trick here is to learn how to give the best information to the programmers about what your proposed new feature should do. If you want to speed up development significantly, consider donating some money as described on <application>&app;</application>Development.</para>
+ <para>A: Ask nicely. :-) You can file an enhancement request at <ulink url="http://bugs.gnucash.org/enter_bug.cgi?product=&app;"></ulink>. Please bear in mind to describe your proposed enhancement as verbosely as possible. The trick here is to learn how to give the best information to the programmers about what your proposed new feature should do. If you want to speed up development significantly, consider donating some money as described on <application>&app;</application>Development.</para>
</sect2>
<sect2 id="appendixb_software_web">
@@ -95,8 +95,8 @@
<sect2 id="appendixb_software_bugs">
<title>Q: I think I found a bug. How do I report it?</title>
- <para>A: First of all, try to verify that it is indeed a bug and that it has not been reported before. Search the mail list archives (see FAQ above). Then search the <ulink url="http://bugzilla.gnome.org">Gnome Bugzilla</ulink> database.</para>
- <para>If you feel you have indeed found a bug, you can then report it at <ulink url="http://bugzilla.gnome.org/enter_bug.cgi?product=&app;"></ulink>. Please bear in mind to report your bug as verbosely as possible. The trick here is to learn how to give the best information to the programmers about how to reproduce bugs. A Programmer will usually only be able to fix a bug they can see, if you can’t make the programmer see your bug, it won’t get fixed!</para>
+ <para>A: First of all, try to verify that it is indeed a bug and that it has not been reported before. Search the mail list archives (see FAQ above). Then search the <ulink url="http://bugs.gnucash.org">&app; Bugzilla</ulink> database.</para>
+ <para>If you feel you have indeed found a bug, you can then report it at <ulink url="http://bugs.gnucash.org/enter_bug.cgi?product=&app;"></ulink>. Please bear in mind to report your bug as verbosely as possible. The trick here is to learn how to give the best information to the programmers about how to reproduce bugs. A Programmer will usually only be able to fix a bug they can see, if you can’t make the programmer see your bug, it won’t get fixed!</para>
</sect2>
</sect1>
diff --git a/guide/ru/gnucash-guide.xml b/guide/ru/gnucash-guide.xml
index 7fefcdd..185d485 100644
--- a/guide/ru/gnucash-guide.xml
+++ b/guide/ru/gnucash-guide.xml
@@ -364,8 +364,8 @@
<title>Feedback</title>
<para>To report a bug or make a suggestion regarding this package or
this manual, follow the directions at the
- <ulink url="http://bugzilla.gnome.org"
- >GNOME Bug Tracking System</ulink>.
+ <ulink url="http://bugs.gnucash.org"
+ >&app; Bug Tracking System</ulink>.
</para>
<!-- Translators may also add here a feedback address for translations -->
</legalnotice>
diff --git a/help/C/Help_tips-appendix.xml b/help/C/Help_tips-appendix.xml
index 9da00f2..b319af5 100644
--- a/help/C/Help_tips-appendix.xml
+++ b/help/C/Help_tips-appendix.xml
@@ -200,7 +200,7 @@
<!-- <note><title>Known Issues</title>...</note> uses too much space-->
<para>Requires F::Q 1.41, but unfortunately the ASX website is only working sometimes.
And then only with a small no of stocks in 1 go. From final comment on:
- <ulink url="https://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=770132#c12">
+ <ulink url="https://bugs.gnucash.org/show_bug.cgi?id=770132#c12">
Price editor does not find ASX:XRO</ulink>
</para>
</entry>
@@ -860,7 +860,7 @@
src/engine/gnc-commodity.c:gnc_quote_source (commit c0fd3b3, which was
adjusted for Finance::Quote 1.47),
<ulink url="https://wiki.gnucash.org">&app;-Wiki</ulink>,
- <ulink url="https://bugzilla.gnome.org/page.cgi?id=browse.html&product=GnuCash">bugzilla</ulink>,
+ <ulink url="https://bugs.gnucash.org/page.cgi?id=browse.html&product=GnuCash">bugzilla</ulink>,
<ulink url="https://wiki.gnucash.org/wiki/Mailing_Lists#Mailing_List_Archives">mailing list archive</ulink>.
</para>
</sect2>
diff --git a/help/C/gnucash-help.xml b/help/C/gnucash-help.xml
index 8c03ef6..5acb279 100644
--- a/help/C/gnucash-help.xml
+++ b/help/C/gnucash-help.xml
@@ -314,8 +314,8 @@
<title>Feedback</title>
<para>To report a bug or make a suggestion regarding this package or
this manual, follow the directions at the
- <ulink url="http://bugzilla.gnome.org"
- >GNOME Bug Tracking System</ulink>.
+ <ulink url="http://bugs.gnucash.org"
+ >&app; Bug Tracking System</ulink>.
</para>
<!-- Translators may also add here feedback address for translations -->
</legalnotice>
diff --git a/help/de/Help_tips-appendix.xml b/help/de/Help_tips-appendix.xml
index 041a68e..0c14bc3 100644
--- a/help/de/Help_tips-appendix.xml
+++ b/help/de/Help_tips-appendix.xml
@@ -200,7 +200,7 @@
<!-- <note><title>Known Issues</title>...</note> uses too much space-->
<para>Requires F::Q 1.41, but unfortunately the ASX website is only working sometimes.
And then only with a small no of stocks in 1 go. From final comment on:
- <ulink url="https://bugzilla.gnome.org/show_bug.cgi?id=770132#c12">
+ <ulink url="https://bugs.gnucash.org/show_bug.cgi?id=770132#c12">
Price editor does not find ASX:XRO</ulink>
</para>
</entry>
@@ -860,7 +860,7 @@
src/engine/gnc-commodity.c:gnc_quote_source (commit c0fd3b3, welche an
Finance::Quote 1.47 angepaßt wurde),
<ulink url="https://wiki.gnucash.org">&app;-Wiki</ulink>,
- <ulink url="https://bugzilla.gnome.org/page.cgi?id=browse.html&product=GnuCash">bugzilla</ulink>,
+ <ulink url="https://bugs.gnucash.org/page.cgi?id=browse.html&product=GnuCash">bugzilla</ulink>,
<ulink url="https://wiki.gnucash.org/wiki/Mailing_Lists#Mailing_List_Archives">Mailinglistenarchive</ulink>.
</para>
</sect2>
diff --git a/help/de/gnucash-help.xml b/help/de/gnucash-help.xml
index 5cf1608..855a00e 100644
--- a/help/de/gnucash-help.xml
+++ b/help/de/gnucash-help.xml
@@ -281,8 +281,8 @@
<legalnotice>
<title>Feedback</title>
<para>Um Fehler zu berichten oder anderes Feedback zu geben, benutzen Sie
- bitte das Gnome Bug-Tracking System
- <ulink url="http://bugzilla.gnome.org/enter_bug.cgi?product=GnuCash"
+ bitte das &app; Bug-Tracking System
+ <ulink url="http://bugs.gnucash.org/enter_bug.cgi?product=GnuCash"
>Bugzilla</ulink>.
</para>
<!-- Translators may also add here feedback address for translations -->
@@ -4646,7 +4646,7 @@
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
<para />
- <para>Die aktuell geöffnete Web-Seite wird im rechten Bereich des Hilfefensters angezeigt. Der linke Bereich enthält die Karteiseiten "Themen" und "Suchen". Wenn Sie auf der Karteiseite "Themen" ein Hilfethema auswählen, wird die entsprechende Web-Seite im rechten Bereich geladen. Die Liste der Hilfethemen enthält außerdem einen Link auf die GnuCash-Fehlerberichtsseite (http://bugzilla.gnome.org).</para>
+ <para>Die aktuell geöffnete Web-Seite wird im rechten Bereich des Hilfefensters angezeigt. Der linke Bereich enthält die Karteiseiten "Themen" und "Suchen". Wenn Sie auf der Karteiseite "Themen" ein Hilfethema auswählen, wird die entsprechende Web-Seite im rechten Bereich geladen. Die Liste der Hilfethemen enthält außerdem einen Link auf die GnuCash-Fehlerberichtsseite (http://bugs.gnucash.org).</para>
<para />
<para>Die Karteiseite "Suchen" ermöglicht es, die Hilfe nach Dokumenten zu durchsuchen, welche die von Ihnen angegebenen Begriffe enthalten. Geben Sie den zu suchenden Begriff im Feld "Suchausdruck" ein und betätigen Sie den Knopf "Suchen". Sie erhalten eine Liste der Seiten, welche diesen Begriff enthalten. Wenn Sie einen der gefundenen Verweise in der Liste "Suchergebnisse" anklicken, wird die entsprechende Web-Seite geladen.</para>
</sect3>
diff --git a/help/it/gnucash-help.xml b/help/it/gnucash-help.xml
index 4ea28ca..a76ece1 100644
--- a/help/it/gnucash-help.xml
+++ b/help/it/gnucash-help.xml
@@ -386,7 +386,7 @@
<releaseinfo>Questo manuale descrive l’utilizzo del programma finanziario &app;.</releaseinfo>
<legalnotice>
<title>Commenti</title>
- <para>Per avvertire della presenza di un bug o per proporre dei suggerimenti a riguardo di questo programma o del manuale, seguire le istruzioni fornite nel <ulink url="http://bugzilla.gnome.org">sistema di tracciamento dei bug di GNOME</ulink>. Per contribuire alla traduzione del manuale segnalando eventuali errori, inviare un messaggio alla lista Italiana di <application>&app;</application> contattabile inviando una mail all’indirizzo <email>gnucash-it at gnucash.org</email></para>
+ <para>Per avvertire della presenza di un bug o per proporre dei suggerimenti a riguardo di questo programma o del manuale, seguire le istruzioni fornite nel <ulink url="http://bugs.gnucash.org">sistema di tracciamento dei bug di GNOME</ulink>. Per contribuire alla traduzione del manuale segnalando eventuali errori, inviare un messaggio alla lista Italiana di <application>&app;</application> contattabile inviando una mail all’indirizzo <email>gnucash-it at gnucash.org</email></para>
<!-- Translators may also add here feedback address for translations -->
</legalnotice>
diff --git a/help/pt/gnucash-help.xml b/help/pt/gnucash-help.xml
index c0458ad..b1df640 100644
--- a/help/pt/gnucash-help.xml
+++ b/help/pt/gnucash-help.xml
@@ -280,7 +280,7 @@
<title>Comentários</title>
<para>Para reportar um erro ou fazer sugestões sobre este pacote ou este
manual, siga as instruções no
- <ulink url="http://bugzilla.gnome.org">Sistema de rastreio de erros do GNOME</ulink>.
+ <ulink url="http://bugs.gnucash.org">Sistema de rastreio de erros do GNOME</ulink>.
</para>
<!-- Translators may also add here feedback address for translations -->
</legalnotice>
commit effc483b80904a6f63ca14a4cdfabb2a27422fbe
Author: Geert Janssens <geert at kobaltwit.be>
Date: Thu Sep 27 20:32:09 2018 +0200
Revert "Bug 796856 Bringing Chapter 3 of Help into Chapter 2 of Guide." and following commits of PR #115
Further discussion is needed wrt how to manage documentation
updates and translations. The work in itself is good, but we'll
delay the merge until we have a better view on this issue.
diff --git a/guide/C/Makefile.am b/guide/C/Makefile.am
index 3b9c528..2770cfd 100644
--- a/guide/C/Makefile.am
+++ b/guide/C/Makefile.am
@@ -15,8 +15,6 @@ entities = \
ch_basics.xml \
ch_accts.xml \
ch_txns.xml \
- ch_importing.xml \
- ch_configuring.xml \
ch_cbook.xml \
ch_cc.xml \
ch_expenses.xml \
diff --git a/guide/C/ch_accts.xml b/guide/C/ch_accts.xml
index be2796c..5cd4691 100644
--- a/guide/C/ch_accts.xml
+++ b/guide/C/ch_accts.xml
@@ -13,17 +13,17 @@ Originally written by
Translators:
(translators put your name and email here)
-->
-<sect1 id="chapter_accts">
+<chapter id="chapter_accts">
<title>Accounts</title>
- <para>This section discusses some useful concepts for organizing your
+ <para>This chapter will discuss some useful concepts for organizing your
accounts. Since <application>&app;</application> does not impose any specific account tree layout,
you are free to design your account structure in any manner you wish.
However, there are a few basic accounting concepts which you will probably
want to follow when designing your accounts to maximize their
utility.</para>
- <sect2 id="accts-concepts1">
+ <sect1 id="accts-concepts1">
<title>Basic Accounting Concepts</title>
<para>As we saw in the previous chapter, accounting is based on 5 basic
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ Translators:
</mediaobject>
</screenshot>
- <sect3 id="accts-bsa2">
+ <sect2 id="accts-bsa2">
<title>Balance Sheet Accounts</title>
<para>The three so-called <emphasis>Balance Sheet Accounts</emphasis>
@@ -88,9 +88,9 @@ Translators:
represents what is left over after you subtract your liabilities from
your assets. It can be thought of as the portion of your assets that you
own outright, without any debt.</para>
- </sect3>
+ </sect2>
- <sect3 id="accts-ie2">
+ <sect2 id="accts-ie2">
<title>Income and Expense Accounts</title>
<para>The two <guilabel>Income and Expense Accounts</guilabel> are used
@@ -120,10 +120,10 @@ Translators:
Then you should introduce it here in a separate paragraph
and replace 'income and expense' by it in the latter sections of this book.
-->
- </sect3>
- </sect2>
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
- <sect2 id="accts-types1">
+ <sect1 id="accts-types1">
<title><application>&app;</application> Accounts</title>
<para>This section will show how the <application>&app;</application> definition of an account fits
@@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ Translators:
<para>These <application>&app;</application> account types are presented in more detail
below.</para>
- <sect3 id="accts-gc-bsa2">
+ <sect2 id="accts-gc-bsa2">
<title>Balance Sheet Accounts</title>
<para>The first balance sheet account we will examine is
@@ -330,9 +330,9 @@ Translators:
minus the <emphasis>things you owe</emphasis> equals your
<emphasis>net worth</emphasis>.</para>
</note>
- </sect3>
+ </sect2>
- <sect3 id="accts-gc-ie2">
+ <sect2 id="accts-gc-ie2">
<title>Income and Expense Accounts</title>
<para><emphasis>Income</emphasis> is the payment you receive for your
@@ -408,9 +408,9 @@ Translators:
</caption>
</mediaobject>
</screenshot>
- </sect3>
+ </sect2>
- <sect3 id="accts-other-types">
+ <sect2 id="accts-other-types">
<title>Other Account Types</title>
<para>There are some special other account types.</para>
@@ -425,11 +425,11 @@ Translators:
</emphasis>are used only in the OFX importer, apparently for
completeness with the specification.
</para>
- </sect3>
+ </sect2>
- </sect2>
+ </sect1>
- <sect2 id="accts-examples1">
+ <sect1 id="accts-examples1">
<title>Putting It All Together</title>
<para>Let’s go through the process of building a common personal finance
@@ -440,7 +440,7 @@ Translators:
track into the basic account types of accounting. This is fairly simple,
let’s go through an example.</para>
- <sect3 id="accts-examples-situation2">
+ <sect2 id="accts-examples-situation2">
<title>Simple Example</title>
<para>Let us assume you have a checking and a savings account at a bank,
@@ -459,9 +459,9 @@ Translators:
form of a salary, and <guilabel>expenses</guilabel> in the form of
groceries, rent, electricity, phone, and taxes (Federal, Social
Security, Medicare) on your salary.</para>
- </sect3>
+ </sect2>
- <sect3 id="accts-examples-toplevel2">
+ <sect2 id="accts-examples-toplevel2">
<title>The Basic Top Level Accounts</title>
<para>Now, you must decide how you want to group these accounts. Most
@@ -551,9 +551,9 @@ Translators:
</caption>
</mediaobject>
</screenshot>
- </sect3>
+ </sect2>
- <sect3 id="accts-examples-organization2">
+ <sect2 id="accts-examples-organization2">
<title>Making Sub-Accounts</title>
<para>You can now add to this basic top-level tree structure by inserting
@@ -684,6 +684,6 @@ Translators:
household budget. With this basic framework in place, we can now begin
to populate the accounts with transactions. The next chapter will cover
this subject in greater detail.</para>
- </sect3>
- </sect2>
-</sect1>
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
+</chapter>
diff --git a/guide/C/ch_basics.xml b/guide/C/ch_basics.xml
index f8e9cc4..586e0f3 100644
--- a/guide/C/ch_basics.xml
+++ b/guide/C/ch_basics.xml
@@ -249,7 +249,7 @@
<sect2 id="basics-accounts2">
<title>Accounts</title>
- <para>An <glossterm linkend="gnc-gl_account">account</glossterm> keeps track of what you own,
+ <para>An <firstterm>account</firstterm> keeps track of what you own,
owe, spend or receive. Each <application>&app;</application> file can
contain any number of accounts, and each account can contain many
sub-accounts up to an arbitrary number of levels. This simple feature
@@ -298,145 +298,14 @@
</sect2> <!-- basics-transactions2 -->
</sect1> <!-- basics-entry1 -->
- <sect1 id="basics-running-gnucash">
- <title>Running <application>&app;</application></title>
- <para><application>&app;</application> can be run from your desktop main menu by selecting the associated menu entry.</para>
- <para>Alternatively it can be run from a command line prompt with the command <command>gnucash</command>.</para>
+ <sect1 id="basics-interface1">
+ <title>Interface</title>
- <para>During start up, <application>&app;</application> will display the
- Splash Screen, where some information about the program (version number, build, etc.)
- and the loading process are displayed.</para>
-
- <sect2 id="basics-welcome-to-gnucash">
- <title><guilabel>Welcome to &app;</guilabel> dialog</title>
<para>The very first time you open <application>&app;</application>, you will see the
- <guilabel>Welcome to &app;!</guilabel> screen. This dialog includes three choices:</para>
- <!-- Recommend screen shot here of Welcome to GnuCash! dialog -->
-
- <itemizedlist id="welcome-screen-options">
- <listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Create a new set of accounts</guilabel> - Runs the
- <guilabel>New Account Hierarchy Setup</guilabel> assistant (see <xref linkend="basics-acct-hierarchy"/>). Select
- this option if you want to be assisted in creating a set of accounts.</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Import my QIF files</guilabel> - Runs the
- <guilabel>Import QIF Files</guilabel> assistant (see <xref linkend="importing-qif"/>). Select this option
- if you already have Quicken files (<filename>.qif</filename> files) and wish
- to import them into <application>&app;</application>.</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Open the new user tutorial</guilabel> -
- Opens the <application>&app;</application> Tutorial and Concepts Guide. Select this
- option if you are completely new to <application>&app;</application> and
- accounting concepts.</para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <note>
- <para>It is possible to access each of these items after you have left this screen,
- but the <guilabel>Welcome to &app;!</guilabel> screen will not reappear.
- To create a new set of accounts, see <xref linkend="basics-acct-hierarchy" />. To import
- QIF files, see <xref linkend="importing-qif" />.</para>
- </note>
- </sect2>
-
- <sect2 id="basics-acct-hierarchy">
- <title>New Account Hierarchy Setup</title>
-
- <para>The <emphasis>New Account Hierarchy Setup</emphasis> assistant helps you
- to create a set of <application>&app;</application> accounts. It will
- appear if you choose <guibutton>Create a new set of accounts</guibutton>
- in the <guilabel>Welcome to &app;!</guilabel> menu, or when you select
- <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>New</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.</para>
- <para>This assistant will create a new blank <application>&app;</application> file and
- guide you through the creation of a <emphasis>Chart of Accounts</emphasis>. There are several
- steps in the assistant, which are outlined below.</para>
-
- <orderedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>The first screen briefly describes what this assistant does. </para>
- </listitem>
- <listitem>
- <para><guilabel>New Book Options</guilabel> allows you to set different attributes
- for your file that affect the file as a whole. This screen has four tabs:
- Accounts, Budgeting, Business, and Counters. These items are explained elsewhere in
- the Guide, and can be changed at a later point.</para>
- </listitem>
- <listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Choose Currency</guilabel> sets the default currency for new accounts.
- This is based on the computer locale settings, and can be modified later in the
- <guilabel>Accounts</guilabel> tab under <guilabel>Preferences</guilabel>
- (see <xref linkend="configuring-preferences-accounts"/>).</para>
- </listitem>
- <listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Choose accounts to create</guilabel> allows you to create
- an initial set of accounts. These can be edited as needed afterward.
- The screen is divided into three parts.</para>
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>The left upper portion has a list of
- <guilabel>Categories</guilabel> for commonly used hierarchies of
- accounts. Select from this list the types of accounts you wish to
- use. You can select as many of the categories of accounts as you
- wish.</para>
- </listitem>
- <listitem>
- <para>The left lower section has a <guilabel>Category
- Description</guilabel> that displays a detailed description of the
- category currently highlighted.</para>
- </listitem>
- <listitem>
- <para>The right side has a list of the <guilabel>Accounts</guilabel>
- that will be created from a selected category. Note that the accounts
- listed here are <emphasis>only</emphasis> the selected category; your
- final data file will include <emphasis>all</emphasis> of the accounts
- for all of the selected Categories.</para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
- </listitem>
- <listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Setup selected accounts</guilabel> lists all the accounts you
- selected on <guilabel>Choose accounts to create</guilabel>, and allows you to
- enter opening balances and to designate <emphasis>Placeholder</emphasis> accounts.</para>
- <note>
- <para>Equity accounts do not have opening balances, so the
- opening balance value for this kind of account
- is locked and set to zero.</para>
- </note>
- <note id="placeholder-acct">
- <para><emphasis>Placeholder</emphasis> accounts are used to create a hierarchy of accounts and
- normally do not have transactions or opening balances.</para>
- </note>
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>The left side of the screen has a list of <guilabel>Account
- Names</guilabel>. Select an account by "clicking" once in the
- <guilabel>Account Names</guilabel> column with the account highlighted. This will open
- the account name for changes.</para>
- </listitem>
- <listitem>
- <para>The right side of the screen has a check-box to make an
- account a <guilabel>Placeholder</guilabel> and a box to add the
- <guilabel>Opening Balance</guilabel> for the selected account. Again
- a single click in the <guilabel>Opening Balance</guilabel> or
- <guilabel>Placeholder</guilabel> column will
- open the field for changes.</para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
- </listitem>
- <listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Finish account setup</guilabel> is the last screen and
- gives you a final option to cancel the process.</para>
- <warning>
- <para>If you choose to cancel, any selections you have made up to
- this point will be lost.</para>
- </warning>
- </listitem>
- </orderedlist>
- </sect2>
+ <guilabel>Welcome to &app;!</guilabel> screen. From there, <application>&app;</application>
+ provides other tools to help you easily find what you are looking for.
+ Let’s take a look at some of the common screens and screen boxes you will
+ see.</para>
<sect2 id="basics-tip2">
<title>Tip of the Day</title>
@@ -681,6 +550,73 @@
</sect2>
</sect1>
+ <sect1 id="basics-help1">
+ <title>Getting Help</title>
+
+ <para><application>&app;</application> offers help in many ways. We have already covered the <link linkend="basics-tip2">
+ <guilabel>Tip of the Day</guilabel></link> screen that gives you helpful hints
+ upon start-up of your <application>&app;</application> session. <application>&app;</application> also offers an extensive
+ help manual.</para>
+
+ <sect2 id="basics-manual2">
+ <title>Help Manual</title>
+
+ <para>Once you have opened <application>&app;</application>, you will see the <guilabel>Account
+ Tree</guilabel> window <guilabel>Help</guilabel> menu heading, which
+ opens the Help manual. The Help manual is organized by topic, and
+ you can expand each topic into its subtopics.</para>
+
+ <para>Topics are listed on the left side. To select a topic or subtopic,
+ click on it, and you should see the text for that topic appear on the
+ right. Use the <guibutton>Back</guibutton> and
+ <guibutton>Forward</guibutton> buttons to navigate through your topic
+ choices, and print any text using the <guibutton>Print</guibutton>
+ button.</para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="basics-web2">
+ <title>Web Access</title>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>&app; Help</guilabel> window also acts as a simple
+ web browser, so you can pull up a web site for additional information.
+ You can open any web site under this window by clicking the
+ <guibutton>Open</guibutton> <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> button and then typing in the URL.
+ Use the <guibutton>Back</guibutton>, <guibutton>Forward</guibutton>,
+ <guibutton>Reload</guibutton>, <guibutton>Stop</guibutton>, and
+ <guibutton>Print</guibutton> buttons as you would in a standard
+ browser.</para>
+
+ <para>The <ulink
+ url="http://www.gnucash.org"><citetitle>&app;</citetitle></ulink> web
+ site contains helpful information about the program and about any
+ updates to it. It also contains links to the <application>&app;</application> mailing lists for
+ developers and users, and you can search the <ulink
+ url="https://lists.gnucash.org/cgi-bin/namazu.cgi"><citetitle>archives
+ of <application>&app;</application> mailing lists</citetitle></ulink> for discussions on a
+ particular topic. If you don’t find the answers you are looking for, you
+ can post your question to the <ulink
+ url="https://lists.gnucash.org/mailman/listinfo/gnucash-user"><citetitle>&app;
+ user list</citetitle></ulink>, and someone on the list will attempt to
+ answer you.</para>
+
+ <para>The most updated <guilabel>&app; FAQ</guilabel> is also located
+ on the <ulink url="http://wiki.gnucash.org/wiki/FAQ"><citetitle>&app;
+ FAQ website</citetitle></ulink>, and contains answers to the popular
+ questions.</para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="basics-topic2">
+ <title>Topic Search</title>
+
+ <para>The online manual also provides a search function. To search for a
+ particular topic, click the <guilabel>Search</guilabel> tab at the
+ bottom of the help window and type in your topic in the field provided.
+ Click the <guibutton>Search</guibutton> button to complete your search.
+ A list of choices should appear in the box below, clicking a choice will
+ bring up its text on the right.</para>
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
+
<sect1 id="basics-files1">
<title>Storing your financial data</title>
<sect2 id="basics-files1-overview">
@@ -1515,8 +1451,8 @@
</mediaobject>
</screenshot>
</listitem>
+
</orderedlist>
-</sect1>
-§accts;
-§txns;
-</chapter>
\ No newline at end of file
+
+ </sect1>
+</chapter>
diff --git a/guide/C/ch_configuring.xml b/guide/C/ch_configuring.xml
deleted file mode 100644
index def6f27..0000000
--- a/guide/C/ch_configuring.xml
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,42 +0,0 @@
-<!--
- (Do not remove this comment block.)
- Version: 2.0.0
- Last modified: December 7th 2009
- modified: July 9th 2006
- Maintainers:
- Author:
-
- Translators:
- (translators put your name and email here)
--->
-<chapter id="chapter_configuring">
- <title>Configuring <application>&app;</application></title>
-
- <para>This chapter will detail preference settings for <application>&app;</application>.</para>
-
- <sect1 id="configuring-overview">
- <title>Overview</title>
-
- <para>Configuring is fun.</para>
-
- </sect1>
- <sect1 id="configuring-screens">
- <title>Main Configuration Screens</title>
-
- <para><application>&app;</application> stores settings in two main locations. </para>
- <sect2 id="configuring-preferences-accounting-period">
- <title>Preferences: Accounting Period Tab</title>
- <para> Stuff about the Accounting Period tab</para>
- </sect2>
- <sect2 id="configuring-preferences-accounts">
- <title>Preferences: Accounts Tab</title>
- <para> Stuff about the Accounts tab. Need this stub for the link in The Basics. More later.</para>
- </sect2>
- <sect2 id="configuring-preferences-online-banking">
- <title>Preferences: Online Banking</title>
- <para> Stuff about the Accounts tab. Need this stub for the link in The Basics. More later.</para>
- </sect2>
- </sect1>
-
-
-</chapter>
diff --git a/guide/C/ch_importing.xml b/guide/C/ch_importing.xml
deleted file mode 100644
index bf49943..0000000
--- a/guide/C/ch_importing.xml
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,672 +0,0 @@
-<!--
- (Do not remove this comment block.)
- Version: 2.0.0
- Last modified: December 7th 2009
- modified: July 9th 2006
- Maintainers:
- Author:
-
- Translators:
- (translators put your name and email here)
--->
-<chapter id="chapter_importing">
- <title>Importing Data into <application>&app;</application></title>
- <para>This chapter will detail procedures for importing data into <application>&app;</application>.</para>
- <sect1 id="importing-from-files">
- <title>Importing Transactions from Files</title>
-
- <para>Imported transactions will generally be to a specific account in your account tree. In the following
- this will be referred to as the <emphasis role="bold">import</emphasis> or
- <emphasis role="bold">base</emphasis> account. It may or may not be
- specified in the data being imported, depending on the import format. It is usually the first split
- of a transaction being imported.
- </para>
- <para>All transactions will also must have a <emphasis role="bold">destination</emphasis> account for
- at least matching splits. This may or may not be supplied in the imported data. If it is not,
- an account can be assigned on the basis of the previous import history by matching to infomation in
- the imported data. The user may always over-ride this assignment.
- </para>
- <para>Multi-split data previously exported from GnuCash may have both the import and destination accounts
- for transaction splits specified in the data file.
- </para>
- <sect2>
- <title>File Import Formats</title>
- <para>Gnucash allows transactions to be imported in the following formats:</para>
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem><para><emphasis role="bold"><link linkend="importing-qif">QIF</link></emphasis>
- (.qif) Quicken Interchange format - import data from Quicken financial software;</para></listitem>
- <listitem><para><emphasis role="bold"><link linkend="importing-ofx">OFX/QFX</link></emphasis>
- (.ofx,.qfx) Open Financial eXchange format (QXF is an Intuit/Quicken proprietary version of OFX);
- </para></listitem>
- <listitem><para><emphasis role="bold"><link linkend="importing-csv">CSV</link></emphasis>
- (.csv) Comma Separated Values;</para></listitem>
- <listitem><para><emphasis role="bold"><link linkend="importing-mt940">MT940</link></emphasis>
- MT940</para></listitem>
- <listitem><para><emphasis role="bold"><link linkend="importing-mt942">MT942</link></emphasis>
- MT942</para></listitem>
- <listitem><para><emphasis role="bold"><link linkend="importing-dtaus">DTAUS</link></emphasis>
- DTAUS</para></listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para>These import methods can be accessed from <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu>
- <guisubmenu>Import ...</guisubmenu></menuchoice>.</para>
- </sect2>
-
- <sect2 id="importing-matcher">
- <title>Import Matcher</title>
- <para>Several of the Import Assistants use an Import Matcher to implement a Bayesian approach to assign
- destination accounts, if such accounts are not specified in
- the imported data, to each imported transaction based on the previous import history of the import account.
- It also attempts to match the transactions being imported to any existing transactions
- based on the date and the description fields<!-- FIXME add any other fields used in matching -->.
- </para>
- <para>Transaction rows which match existing transactions already in the import account are flagged not to be imported. They
- will have a light green background and the A and U+R checkboxes will be unchecked and the R checkbox will be
- checked. To override and import the transaction, check the A checkbox. The U and R boxes will be unchecked
- automatically. The reliability of the match is indicated by a bar display in the Info column. If a destination
- account for the second split is assigned by the matcher if will be appended to the info column.
- </para>
- <para>Transaction rows which do not match existing transactions in the import account, for which an assignment
- of a destination account cannot be made on the basis of the previous import history to the account, will be
- displayed with an orange-yellow background and the A box will be checked and U+R and R unchecked. A destination
- account must be specified for these transactions.
- </para>
- <sect3><title>Assign a Destination Account to a Single Transaction</title>
- <para>The currently selected row is selected by Left-clicking it. It is displayed with a mid dark green background.</para>
- <para><emphasis role="bold">Double click</emphasis> on a row. This will select it and open an Account Selection
- dialog. Select the desired destination account in the dialog and click <guilabel>OK</guilabel>. The row
- background will change to a light green and the assigned destination account will be displayed
- in the Info column.
- </para>
- <para>or alternatively, <emphasis role="bold">Left-click</emphasis> on a row to select it followed by a
- <emphasis role="bold">Right-click </emphasis>to bring up a popup menu then select
- "Assign a transfer account" to display the Account Selection dialog, select the destination account and
- click the <guilabel>OK</guilabel> button.
- </para>
- </sect3>
- <sect3>
- <title>Assign a Destination Account to Multiple Transactions</title>
- <para>Sometimes you will have several transactions which will have the same destination account. Gnucash
- allows you to select multiple transactions and apply the same destination account to all transactions
- in the selection.
- </para>
- <para>Rows in a selection are displayed with a mid dark green background.</para>
- <para>Multiple rows may be selected to have the same destination account assigned to them.</para>
- <para>To select rows either:</para>
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem><para><emphasis role="bold">Left click</emphasis> on first row and then
- <emphasis role="bold">Ctrl-Left click</emphasis> on other rows to add to the selection or</para></listitem>
- <listitem><para><emphasis role="bold">Left-click</emphasis> on a first row and then
- <emphasis role="bold">Shift-Left-click</emphasis> on another row to select all rows between them.</para></listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
- <para>then <emphasis role="bold">Right-click</emphasis> to display a popup menu and then select
- <emphasis role="bold">"Assign a transfer account"</emphasis> to open the Account
- Selection dialog. Select the desired destination account and click the <guilabel>OK</guilabel>
- button in the Account Selection dialog.</para>
- </sect3>
- <sect3>
- <title>Completing the Import</title>
- <para>Once you have assigned destination accounts for all the imported transactions using the above methods
- (all row backgrounds will be a light green colour), check that the assigned destination acounts are correct
- and then press the <guilabel>OK</guilabel> button at the bottom of the Generic Import Matcher
- window. The transactions selected for import will have their splits added to the selected source
- and destination accounts.
- </para>
- <para>The choices made for the destination accounts and description/memo fields are remembered and stored and
- used for future imports to the same account to automatically assign a destination account for transaction
- records not containing destination account information.
- </para>
- </sect3>
- </sect2>
-
-
- <sect2 id="importing-qif">
- <title>Import QIF</title>
- <para>To import data from Quicken®, MS Money, or other programs that use QIF(Quicken® Interchange Format),
- you must first export your data to a QIF file. One way to do this is to export each account as a
- separate QIF file. An easier way, available in Quicken® 98 and beyond, is to export all accounts at
- once into a single QIF file. Check your program's manual to determine if this option is available.
- </para>
- <sect3><title>To import QIF files:</title><para> </para></sect3>
- <sect3>
- <title>Load all of the QIF files containing data you wish to import</title>
- <para>To do this, select <emphasis role="bold">File -> Import -> Import QIF...</emphasis> from the menu. When the QIF Import dialog
- box appears, click <emphasis role="bold">Next</emphasis> and follow the instructions to guide you through the process of loading
- your files.
- </para>
- <para>This image shows the start of the QIF Import assistant.<!--FIXME put an image of the import druid in --> </para>
- <para>You will be prompted for a filename to load. Use the Select button to select your QIF file and
- click Next to load it. Once the file is loaded, select Load another file if you have more files
- to load. When you have loaded all your QIF files, click Next to continue with the import process.
- </para>
- </sect3>
- <sect3>
- <title>Review the GnuCash accounts to be created.</title>
- <para>The importer then matches up your QIF accounts and categories with GnuCash accounts and gives
- you a brief description of the matching process. Clicking Next will bring you to a view comparing
- your QIF accounts with the corresponding GnuCash accounts created. To change an account name, select
- the row containing that account name and edit the name in the dialog box provided. Click Next when
- you have finished making changes, and proceed through a similar category matching process. QIF
- income and expense categories import as GnuCash income and expense accounts <!--(see section 3.1 FIXME for
- more on this).--> Make changes to these account names if necessary, and click Next to continue.
- </para>
- <para><emphasis role="bold">Note:</emphasis> If you are not sure what changes are needed, it is safe to
- accept the GnuCash account names. It is easy to edit the accounts later if you find you need to make
- a change.
- </para>
- <para>From the drop-down list, select a standard currency to be used for the imported accounts and click <emphasis role="bold">Next</emphasis>
- to continue. If you have stocks, mutual funds, or other securities, you will be prompted for additional
- information. The importer dialog will ask for the exchange or listing (i.e. Nasdaq), the security's
- full name, and the ticker symbol. If you do not have this information handy, you can edit the account
- information later, once the import is complete. Click <emphasis role="bold">Next</emphasis> to continue.
- </para>
- </sect3>
- <sect3>
- <title>Tell GnuCash to import the data.</title>
- <para>The last step is the import. Once you have verified your account names and investment information,
- click <emphasis role="bold">Finish</emphasis> in the Update your GnuCash accounts page to complete the import process. Depending
- upon the size of your file, the import might take a few minutes to complete, so a progress bar
- displays the percentage finished. When the import process is complete, GnuCash will return you
- to the main window, which should now display the names of the accounts you imported.
- </para>
- </sect3>
- </sect2>
-
- <!--
- <sect2 id="importing-qif-from-help">
- <title>Importing Quicken QIF Files</title>
-
- <para>Many users seek to import their financial data from Quicken.</para>
- <para>This Assistant helps you import Quicken <acronym>QIF</acronym> files. It will appear if
- you choose <guibutton>Import my QIF files</guibutton> in the
- <guilabel>Welcome to &app;!</guilabel> menu, as well as from <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu>
- <guisubmenu>Import ...</guisubmenu> <guimenuitem>Import QIF...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.</para>
-
- <para>The import process involves several steps, which are presented in a
- series of screens that are described below.</para>
-
- <orderedlist>
- <listitem>
-
- <para><guilabel>Import QIF files</guilabel> screen briefly describes the assistant.
- The three buttons at the very bottom of the screen are used throughout the process
- to navigate.</para>
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para><guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>: exit the process and cancel importing
- <acronym>QIF</acronym> files.</para>
- <warning>
- <para>If you choose to cancel at any point in the assistant, any selections you have made up to
- this point will be lost.</para>
- </warning>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para><guibutton>Back</guibutton>: return to the previous screen.</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para><guibutton>Next</guibutton> move to the next screen.</para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- </listitem>
- <listitem>
-
- <para><guilabel>Select a QIF file to load</guilabel> allows you to choose the
- source <acronym>QIF</acronym> file. The <guibutton>Select...</guibutton> button on this
- screen is used to access a list of files in your system. The
- <guibutton>Select...</guibutton> button brings up the <guilabel>Select
- QIF File</guilabel> dialog.</para>
-
- <para>Navigate to where you have stored your <acronym>QIF</acronym> files and select the
- first one then click <guibutton>Import</guibutton>. The next screen will
- display it in the <guilabel>Select a QIF File to Load</guilabel>
- field.</para>
-
- <note>
- <para>If the file you are loading does not have an <acronym>QIF</acronym> date listed
- in it you will see the <guilabel>Set a date format for this QIF file</guilabel>
- screen. Select the proper format from the pull down list and continue.</para>
- </note>
-
- <note>
- <para>If the file you are loading does not have an account name listed
- in it you will see the <guilabel>Set the default QIF account
- name</guilabel> screen. Otherwise you will skip this screen and go on
- to the screen in the next section that shows loaded <acronym>QIF</acronym> files.</para>
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>The <guilabel>Account name:</guilabel> field is used to set
- an account name for this <acronym>QIF</acronym> file.</para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
- </note>
-
- </listitem>
- <listitem>
- <para>The next screen shows you the <guilabel>QIF files you have
- loaded</guilabel>. You can use this screen to return to the previous
- screen and load more <acronym>QIF</acronym> files. It will also let you unload any files
- you have loaded by mistake.</para>
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>The top panel shows the list of <guilabel>QIF Files</guilabel>
- you have loaded.</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>The <guibutton>Load another file</guibutton> button takes you
- back to the previous screen to load another <acronym>QIF</acronym> file.</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>The <guibutton>Unload selected file</guibutton> button allows you to
- select a file from the top panel and remove it from the list.</para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para>When you have selected all the <acronym>QIF</acronym> files to be imported, click the
- <guibutton>Forward</guibutton> button.</para>
-
- </listitem>
- <listitem>
-
- <para>Depending on the type of data contained in the
- <acronym>QIF</acronym> files to be imported, you may see only one or all of the following screens:</para>
-
- <variablelist termlength="8">
- <varlistentry>
- <term><guilabel>Accounts and stock holdings</guilabel></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>This screen gives a description of the <guilabel>Accounts and stock
- holdings</guilabel> matching process on the following <guilabel>Match QIF
- accounts with &app; accounts</guilabel> screen.</para>
-
- <tip>
- <para>This and other informational screens in the
- <guilabel>Import QIF files</guilabel> assistant
- can be turned off in the <guilabel>Online Banking</guilabel> tab (see <xref linkend="configuring-preferences-online-banking"/>)
- under <guilabel>&app; Preferences</guilabel>.</para>
- </tip>
-
- <para>The next screen lets you <guilabel>Match QIF accounts with &app;
- accounts</guilabel>. You will see a list of <guilabel>QIF account
- names</guilabel> on the left and suggested <guilabel>&app; account
- names</guilabel> on the right. The <guilabel>New?</guilabel> column
- indicates if the <application>&app;</application> account name will be created by the <acronym>QIF</acronym>
- Import.</para>
-
- <para>To change the <application>&app;</application> account to a different one select the <acronym>QIF</acronym>
- account. A screen will pop up to select another account or create a new
- one.</para>
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Select an account from the list to choose a already existing
- account.</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>The <guibutton>New Account</guibutton> button allows you to
- add a new account name as a sub-account (child of selected) of the
- selected account.</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>The <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button is used to confirm your
- selection.</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>The <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button is used to exit the
- dialog without using any changes you have made.</para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
- </listitem>
- </varlistentry>
-
- <varlistentry>
- <term><guilabel>Income and Expense categories</guilabel></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>This screen gives a description of the <guilabel>Income and
- Expense categories</guilabel> matching process on the following <guilabel>Match
- QIF categories with &app; accounts</guilabel> screen.</para>
-
- <tip>
- <para>This and other informational screens in the
- <guilabel>Import QIF files</guilabel> assistant
- can be turned off in the <guilabel>Online Banking</guilabel> tab (see <xref linkend="configuring-preferences-online-banking"/>)
- under <guilabel>&app; Preferences</guilabel>.</para>
- </tip>
-
- <para>The next screen lets you <guilabel>Match QIF categories with
- &app; accounts</guilabel>. You will see a list of <guilabel>QIF
- category names</guilabel> on the left and suggested <guilabel>&app;
- account names</guilabel> on the right. The <guilabel>New?</guilabel>
- column indicates if the <application>&app;</application> account name will be created by the QIF
- Import.</para>
-
- <para>To change the <application>&app;</application> account to a different one select the QIF
- category. A dialog will pop up to select another account or create a new
- one.</para>
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Select an account from the list to choose a already existing
- account.</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>The <guibutton>New Account</guibutton> button allows you to
- add a new account name as a sub-account (child of selected) of the
- selected account.</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>The <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button is used to confirm your
- selection.</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>The <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button is used to exit the
- dialog without using any changes you have made.</para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
- </listitem>
- </varlistentry>
-
- <varlistentry>
- <term><guilabel>Payees and memos</guilabel></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>This screen gives a description of the <guilabel>Payees and
- memos</guilabel> matching process on the following <guilabel>Match payees/memos to
- &app; accounts</guilabel> screen.</para>
-
- <tip>
- <para>This and other informational screens in the
- <guilabel>Import QIF files</guilabel> assistant
- can be turned off in the <guilabel>Online Banking</guilabel> tab (see <xref linkend="configuring-preferences-online-banking"/>)
- under <guilabel>&app; Preferences</guilabel>.</para>
- </tip>
-
- <para>The next screen lets you <guilabel>Match payees/memos to &app;
- accounts</guilabel>. You will see a list of <guilabel>QIF payee/memo
- names</guilabel> on the left and suggested <guilabel>&app; account
- names</guilabel> on the right. The default <application>&app;</application> account used is
- called <guilabel>Unspecified</guilabel>. The <guilabel>New?</guilabel> column indicates if
- the <application>&app;</application> account name will be created by the QIF Import.</para>
-
- <para>To change the <application>&app;</application> account to a different one select the QIF
- payee/memo. A dialog will pop up to select another account or create a
- new one.</para>
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Select an account from the list to choose a already existing
- account.</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>The <guibutton>New Account</guibutton> button allows you to
- add a new account name as a sub-account of the selected
- account.</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>The <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button is used to confirm your
- selection.</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>The <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button is used to exit the
- dialog without using any changes you have made.</para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
- </listitem>
- </varlistentry>
- </variablelist>
-
- </listitem>
- <listitem>
-
- <para>The next screen allows you to <guilabel>Enter the QIF file
- currency</guilabel>. The drop down list defaults to the currency
- configured in the <guilabel>Accounts</guilabel> tab (see <xref linkend="configuring-preferences-accounts"/>) under
- <guilabel>&app; Preferences</guilabel>. If you wish the new accounts
- to use a different currency, select one from the list.</para>
-
- <para>When you have selected the currency, click the
- <guibutton>Forward</guibutton> button.</para>
-
- </listitem>
- <listitem>
-
- <para>Depending on the type of data contained in the
- <acronym>QIF</acronym> files to be imported, you may or may not see one or more of the following screens:</para>
-
- <variablelist termlength="8">
- <varlistentry>
- <term><guilabel>Tradable Commodities</guilabel></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>This screen gives a description of the <guilabel>Tradable
- Commodities</guilabel> process on the screen.</para>
-
- <tip>
- <para>This and other informational screens in the
- <guilabel>Import QIF files</guilabel> assistant
- can be turned off in the <guilabel>Online Banking</guilabel> tab (see <xref linkend="configuring-preferences-online-banking"/>)
- under <guilabel>&app; Preferences</guilabel>.</para>
- </tip>
-
- <para>A series of screens, one for each of the stock, mutual fund, or
- commodity, displays the exchange, full name, and symbol for each of the commodities
- listed in the <acronym>QIF</acronym> file you are importing so that you can
- check them before proceeding.</para>
- </listitem>
- </varlistentry>
-
- <varlistentry>
- <term><guilabel>Match duplicate transactions</guilabel></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>This screen gives a description of the <guilabel>Match
- duplicate transactions</guilabel> process on the following <guilabel>Select
- possible duplicates</guilabel> screen.</para>
-
- <tip>
- <para>This and other informational screens in the
- <guilabel>Import QIF files</guilabel> assistant
- can be turned off in the <guilabel>Online Banking</guilabel> tab (see <xref linkend="configuring-preferences-online-banking"/>)
- under <guilabel>&app; Preferences</guilabel>.</para>
- </tip>
-
- <para>The next screen lets you <guilabel>Select possible duplicate
- transactions</guilabel>. Imported transactions are shown on the left
- panel and possible matches to each selected transaction are shown on the
- right.</para>
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>The left panel shows the list of Imported transactions to
- select from for matching duplicates</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>The right panel shows the list of <emphasis>possible</emphasis> duplicates for the
- selected imported transaction. Select the one that most closely
- matches</para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
- </listitem>
- </varlistentry>
- </variablelist>
-
- </listitem>
- <listitem>
-
- <para>The last screen, <guibutton>Update your &app;
- accounts</guibutton>, gives you a list of three choices to finish the
- assistant.</para>
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para><guibutton>Cancel:</guibutton> exit the process and cancel importing
- <acronym>QIF</acronym> files.</para>
- <warning>
- <para>If you click this button, any selections you have made up to
- this point will be lost.</para>
- </warning>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para><guibutton>Back:</guibutton> brings up the previous screen so
- that you can change a previous selection until the first screen.</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para><guibutton>Forward:</guibutton> imports the data and creates the
- accounts you have specified.</para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- </listitem>
- </orderedlist>
-
- <para>You should now have successfully imported your accounts.</para>
-
- <tip>
- <para>Imported transactions might need to be <emphasis role="strong">reconciled</emphasis>.
- This process is described in the <application>&app;</application> Tutorial and Concepts guide.</para>
- </tip>
-
- </sect2>
- -->
-
- <sect2 id="importing-ofx">
- <title>Import OFX/QFX</title>
- <para>This opens a file selection dialog. Navigate to the file you wish to import, select a file with
- the appropriate extension (.ofx or .qfx), then press the <emphasis role="bold">Import</emphasis> button.</para>
- <para>Gnucash opens an Account Selection dialog to select an account in your CoA corresponding to data source. Select
- the appropriate account from the account tree and press the <emphasis role="bold">OK</emphasis> button. On subsequent import of files from the
- same source (identified by tags in the file), the source is remembered and the account selection dialog is not
- displayed.</para>
- <para>The generic import transaction matcher dialog is opened next. See the <link linkend="importing-matcher">
- Import Matcher</link> section (common to both OFX/QFX and CSV import formats) following the Import CSV
- section to continue the import process.
- </para>
- </sect2>
- <sect2 id="importing-csv">
- <title>Import CSV</title>
- <para>Clicking on <emphasis role="bold">Import CSV</emphasis> in the Import menu will bring up the Import Assistant dialog. The first step brings up a file selection
- dialog. Navigate to the location where the file you wish to import is located and select the file to import then click the
- <emphasis role="bold">OK</emphasis> button.
- </para>
- <para>The next window will allow you to set parameters for the importing of the file. All widgets have tooltips which explain what
- the setting affects and the options for the setting.
- </para>
- <sect3 id="importing-csv-save">
- <title>Load and Save Settings</title>
- <para>If this import is a regular occurrence, once you have set the other import paramters, you can save these settings by typing
- in a setting name in the <emphasis role="bold">Load and Save Settings Entry</emphasis> combo box and pressing the <emphasis role="bold">Save</emphasis> button just to the right of the box.
- Previously defined settings can be retrieved by selecting the appropriate setting name from the dropdown list activated by
- the down arrow at the right end of the text box. The trash can button to the right of the Save button can be used to remove
- the settings selected from the drop down list for the box. The settings group <emphasis role="bold">"GnuCash Export Settings"</emphasis> define a setting
- group for the export and reimport of GnuCash transaction data - use this if importing data previously exported from GnuCash.
- </para>
- </sect3>
- <sect3>
- <title>Account</title>
- <para>This combo box allows you to select the base or import account into which the transactions will be imported. It may be left unset
- if the imported data contains a column listing the accounts associated with each split or the import data
- specifies the account for first split of the transaction.</para>
- </sect3>
- <sect3>
- <title>File Format</title>
- <para>This section allows you to define whether the file has:
- </para>
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para><emphasis role="bold">Fixed width columns</emphasis> Selecting this radio button will allow you to define
- column boundaries by double clicking at the appropriate positions in the sample records displayed in the
- panel below. Single clicking in a column will narrow, widen or merge the column.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- <listitem>
- <para><emphasis role="bold">Separators</emphasis> Selecting this radio button will allow you to define characters
- which will be used to distinguish columns in the input file. The default is comma separated however spaces,
- tabs,colons or semicolons or any combination of them may be used to separate columns in the input file by
- selecting the appropriate check boxes. You may also define custom separators by typing the required characters
- into the text box and selecting the <emphasis role="bold">Custom</emphasis> checkbox. This may be used in combination with any of the
- predefined separators.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- <listitem>
- <para><emphasis role="bold">Multi-split</emphasis> Selecting this check box allows the splits for a single transaction
- to be defined on consecutive lines within the file with each line defining a single split. If not selected each
- line is assumed to contain the information for a single transaction including one or two splits.
- </para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
- </sect3>
- <sect3>
- <title>Miscellaneous</title>
- <para>The miscellaneous settings allow you to set:
- </para>
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem><para><emphasis role="bold">Encoding</emphasis>This is usually the UTF-8 variant for your locale;</para></listitem>
- <listitem><para><emphasis role="bold">Date Format</emphasis> This does not default to the Locale setting so check it matches the data you are importing;</para></listitem>
- <listitem><para><emphasis role="bold">Currency Format</emphasis>;</para></listitem>
- <listitem><para><emphasis role="bold">Leading Lines to Skip</emphasis>;</para></listitem>
- <listitem><para><emphasis role="bold">Trailing Lines to Skip</emphasis>;</para></listitem>
- <listitem><para><emphasis role="bold">Skip alternate lines</emphasis>;</para></listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
- <para>to match the settings for the file you are importing. Tooltips may also contain information on the setting and options.</para>
- </sect3>
- <sect3>
- <title>Import Panel</title>
- <para>The import panel shows the data being imported as it is interpreted using the settings chosen to define columns and formats.
- The dropdown lists in the headers for each column of the import allow you to associate a specific column in the imported data
- with a specific field in the display of a transaction in an account register. At a minimum to import data, columns in the
- imported data containing the following information <emphasis role="bold">must</emphasis> be specified:
- </para>
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem><para><emphasis role="bold">Date </emphasis>of transaction;</para></listitem>
- <listitem><para><emphasis role="bold">Account</emphasis> into which transaction is to be imported (or alternatively set the base account as above);</para></listitem>
- <listitem><para><emphasis role="bold">Description</emphasis> of the transaction;</para></listitem>
- <listitem><para><emphasis role="bold">Deposit or Withdrawal</emphasis> column.</para></listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
- <para>The <emphasis role="bold">Skip Errors</emphasis> check box will skip trying to import any rows with errors in matching the columns.
- </para>
- <para>When you are happy with all the import settings, <link linkend="importing-csv-save">save</link> them
- if you will use the same settings again, then press the <emphasis role="bold">Next</emphasis> button.
- This will bring up a window which allows you to map the accounts identified in the account column (Account Id) with accounts
- in the GnuCash account tree (Account name). Double click on a row to bring up a dialog to select the matching GnuCash account.
- When you have selected a match for all accounts, click on the <emphasis role="bold">Next</emphasis> button.
- </para>
- <para>The Transaction Information panel allows review of data entry settings so far.
- </para>
- <para>Clicking on Match Transactions will then bring up the main <link linkend="importing-matcher">Import Matcher</link>
- window described in the next section.
- </para>
- </sect3>
- </sect2>
-
- <sect2 id="importing-mt940">
- <title>Import MT940</title>
- <para>Use this option to import MT940 data.</para>
- </sect2>
-
- <sect2 id="importing-mt942">
- <title>Import MT942</title>
- <para>Use this option to import MT942 data.</para>
- </sect2>
-
- <sect2 id="importing-dtaus">
- <title>Import DTAUS</title>
- <para>Use this option to import DTAUS data.</para>
- </sect2>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
diff --git a/guide/C/ch_oview.xml b/guide/C/ch_oview.xml
index d1b7041..484a81b 100644
--- a/guide/C/ch_oview.xml
+++ b/guide/C/ch_oview.xml
@@ -442,35 +442,16 @@
<sect1 id="more_help">
<title>Getting More Help</title>
-
- <para><application>&app;</application> offers help in many ways, including the <link linkend="basics-tip2">
- <guilabel>Tip of the Day</guilabel></link>, context help, a website, a wiki, the mailing lists, and IRC chat.</para>
-
<sect2 id="online_help">
- <title>Context Help</title>
- <para>The context help provides detailed instructions for using
+ <title>Online Help</title>
+ <para>The online help is the counterpart to this guide. It
+ provides the detailed instructions for using
<application>&app;'s</application> menus, windows, and
controls. To open online help, select <menuchoice><guimenu>Help</guimenu>
<guimenuitem>Contents</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.</para>
- <para>The <guilabel>&app; Help</guilabel> window also acts as a simple
- web browser, so you can pull up a web site for additional information.
- You can open any web site under this window by clicking the
- <guibutton>Open</guibutton> <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> button and then typing in the URL.
- Use the <guibutton>Back</guibutton>, <guibutton>Forward</guibutton>,
- <guibutton>Reload</guibutton>, <guibutton>Stop</guibutton>, and
- <guibutton>Print</guibutton> buttons as you would in a standard
- browser.</para>
- </sect2>
-
- <sect2 id="website">
- <title><application>&app;</application> Website</title>
- <para>The <ulink
- url="http://www.gnucash.org"><citetitle>&app;</citetitle></ulink> web
- site contains helpful information about the program and about any
- updates to it. It also contains links to other online resources.</para>
- </sect2>
-
- <sect2 id="wiki">
+
+ </sect2>
+ <sect2 id="wiki">
<title><application>&app;</application> Wiki</title>
<para>An immense amount of less-formal documenation, both of
<application>&app;</application> itself and its maintenance and
@@ -506,17 +487,6 @@
to additional useful resources such as the <application>&app;</application> wiki
and bug tracking system.</para>
</sect2>
- <sect2 id="topic-search">
- <title>Topic Search</title>
-
- <para>The online manual also provides a search function. To search for a
- particular topic, click the <guilabel>Search</guilabel> tab at the
- bottom of the help window and type in your topic in the field provided.
- Click the <guibutton>Search</guibutton> button to complete your search.
- A list of choices should appear in the box below, clicking a choice will
- bring up its text on the right.</para>
- </sect2>
-
</sect1>
<sect1 id="oview-install1">
diff --git a/guide/C/ch_txns.xml b/guide/C/ch_txns.xml
index eb218d6..711eabe 100644
--- a/guide/C/ch_txns.xml
+++ b/guide/C/ch_txns.xml
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@
Translators:
(translators put your name and email here)
-->
-<sect1 id="chapter_txns">
+<chapter id="chapter_txns">
<title>Transactions</title>
<para>This chapter will give you the basic information you need to
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@
framework and structure of a chart of accounts, transactions are the data
which fills each account.</para>
- <sect2 id="txns-concepts1">
+ <sect1 id="txns-concepts1">
<title>Basic Concepts</title>
<para>A <emphasis>transaction</emphasis> in a double entry accounting
@@ -50,64 +50,49 @@
<para>The account register is explained in the upcoming section,
<xref linkend="txns-register-oview"/>.</para>
- </sect2>
+ </sect1>
- <sect2 id="txns-register-oview">
+ <sect1 id="txns-register-oview">
<title>The Account Register</title>
- <para>The <emphasis>account register</emphasis> is the window that allows you to view
- or edit preexisting transactions, or add new transactions for a particular account. To open
- an account register from the Account Tree, double-click the account name, right click the
- account name and select Open Account from the menu, or use the Open button on the toolbar.
- <application>&app;</application> will display the account register window.</para>
-
- <sect3 id="txns-registers-features2">
- <title>Features of the Account Register</title>
-
- <para>The <emphasis>Titlebar</emphasis> of the account register displays the account
- name. Below the <emphasis>Titlebar</emphasis>, the <emphasis>Menubar</emphasis> displays
- the menu items available within the account register, and the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis>
- contains handy buttons that help you work with the account register.</para>
-
- <para>At the bottom left of the register window, <application>&app;</application> displays
- helpful messages as you move about the register. To the right, you can see the current account
- balance and the total of cleared splits.</para>
- </sect3>
- <sect3 id="txns-regstyle1">
- <title>Choosing a Register Style</title>
- <para><application>&app;</application> offers several options for viewing your registers. The
+
+ <para>The <emphasis>account register</emphasis> is the <application>&app;</application> window, which allows you to view or edit preexisting transactions, or add new transactions for a particular account. To open an account register from the Account Tree, double-click the account name, right click the account name and select Open Account from the menu, or use the Open button on the toolbar. <application>&app;</application> will display the account register window.</para>
+ <sect2 id="txns-registers-features2">
+ <title>Features of the Account Register</title>
+
+ <para>The <emphasis>Titlebar</emphasis> of the account register displays the account name. Below the <emphasis>Titlebar</emphasis>, the <emphasis>Menubar</emphasis> displays the menu items available within the account register, and the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> contains handy buttons that help you work with the account register.</para>
+
+ <para>At the bottom left of the register window, <application>&app;</application> displays helpful messages as you move about the register. To the right, you can see the current account balance and the total of cleared splits.</para>
+ </sect2>
+<sect2 id="txns-regstyle1">
+ <title>Choosing a Register Style</title>
+
+ <para><application>&app;</application> offers several options for viewing your registers. The
default style is <guilabel>Basic Ledger</guilabel> mode, which displays
only the summary of splits affecting the current account. This is the
style that most closely resembles other popular personal financial
- packages. You can choose a different register style from the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu></menuchoice> menu.
- There are two other view modes:</para>
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para><menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Auto-Split Ledger</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
- style expands the current transaction automatically. As you highlight a
- new transaction in the register, the transaction automatically expands to
- show all splits.</para>
- </listitem>
- <listitem>
- <para><menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Transaction
- Journal</guimenuitem></menuchoice> style shows all splits for all transactions in
- the register, which is more like an accounting journal.</para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para>All styles permit you to view your data in either single-line or
+ packages. You can choose a different register style from the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu></menuchoice> menu. There are two other view modes:</para>
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem><para><menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Auto-Split Ledger</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+ style expands the current transaction automatically. As you highlight a
+ new transaction in the register, the transaction automatically expands to
+ show all splits.</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para><menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Transaction
+ Journal</guimenuitem></menuchoice> style shows all splits for all transactions in the register, which is more like an accounting journal.</para></listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>All styles permit you to view your data in either single-line or
double-line format. Select <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu>
- <guimenuitem>Double Line</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, and you will see your transaction
- line expand to two register lines. Double-line mode will also display the transaction-level Notes field.</para>
+ <guimenuitem>Double Line</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, and you will see your transaction
+ line expand to two register lines. Double-line mode will also display the transaction-level Notes field.</para>
- <para>Below are screenshots that demonstrate how the Basic Ledger and Transaction Journal views differ.</para>
- <para>For this example, let’s assume that you have purchased 3 pair of Jeans for
- $1,000, and have recorded the purchase as a split transaction with each pair entered
- on a separate split.</para>
- <para>The below screenshots illustrate the different view modes.</para>
+ <para>Below are screenshots that demonstrate how the Basic Ledger and Transaction Journal views differ.
+ </para>
+ <para>For this example, let’s assume that you have purchased 3 pair of Jeans for $1,000, and have recorded the purchase as a split transaction with each pair entered on a separate split.</para>
+ <para>The below screenshots illustrate the different view modes.</para>
- <para>First let’s view the Jeans transaction from your checking account:</para>
+ <para>First let’s view the Jeans transaction from your checking account:</para>
- <screenshot id="txns-registersplit4">
+ <screenshot id="txns-registersplit4">
<mediaobject>
<imageobject>
<imagedata fileref="figures/txns_registersplit4.png" format="PNG"
@@ -122,12 +107,12 @@
This image shows one split transaction with 3 Jeans purchases
</para></caption>
</mediaobject>
- </screenshot>
+ </screenshot>
- <para>Now, let’s open the <emphasis>Expenses:Clothes</emphasis> account, and look at it in Basic view.</para>
+ <para>Now, let's open the <emphasis>Expenses:Clothes</emphasis> account, and look at it in Basic view.</para>
- <screenshot id="txns-registersplit5">
- <mediaobject>
+<screenshot id="txns-registersplit5">
+ <mediaobject>
<imageobject>
<imagedata fileref="figures/txns_registersplit5.png" format="PNG"
srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
@@ -140,30 +125,30 @@
<caption><para>This image shows <emphasis>Expenses:Clothes</emphasis> account
in Basic Ledger mode.</para></caption>
</mediaobject>
- </screenshot>
- <para>Three entries appear here, but there was only the single split entry in the
- checking account. Further examination shows that each row has a different amount,
- $200, $300, and $500. This demonstrates that each row in this view reflects a single
- split from the original transaction.</para>
+ </screenshot>
+<para>Three entries appear here, but there was only the single split entry in the checking account. Further examination shows that each row has a different amount, $200, $300, and $500. This demonstrates that each row in this view reflects a single split from the original transaction.</para>
- <para>Changing to Transaction Journal mode will display only the original split transaction.</para>
+ <para>Changing to Transaction Journal mode will display only the original split transaction.</para>
- <screenshot id="txns-registersplit6">
+ <screenshot id="txns-registersplit6">
<mediaobject>
<imageobject>
<imagedata fileref="figures/txns_registersplit6.png" format="PNG"
srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
</imageobject>
+
<textobject>
<phrase>A jump to the <emphasis>Expenses:Clothes</emphasis> account</phrase>
</textobject>
+
<caption><para>This image shows <emphasis>Expenses:Clothes</emphasis> account in
Transaction Journal mode.</para></caption>
</mediaobject>
- </screenshot>
+ </screenshot>
+
+</sect2>
- </sect3>
- <sect3 id="txns-shortcuts1">
+<sect2 id="txns-shortcuts1">
<title>Using Entry Shortcuts</title>
<para><application>&app;</application> provides several time-saving shortcuts for entering your
@@ -266,8 +251,8 @@
resulting value to the amount field when you press the
<keycap>Tab</keycap> key.</para>
- <para>All of the menu items have access keys defined, and these are marked
- by underlined characters in the menu names. Press <keycap>Alt</keycap> +
+ <para>All of the menu items have access keys defined, and these are marked
+ by underlined characters in the menu names. Press <keycap>Alt</keycap> +
[underlined character] to bring up the menu, then select an item by typing
its underlined character. For example, typing <keycombo>
<keycap>Alt</keycap>
@@ -322,8 +307,13 @@
<para>In the <guilabel>Reconcile</guilabel> window you can use these
keyboard shortcuts:</para>
- <itemizedlist> <listitem> <para><keycap>Tab</keycap> moves to the next box and
- <keycombo><keycap>Shift</keycap><keycap>Tab</keycap></keycombo> moves to the previous box</para> </listitem>
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><keycap>Tab</keycap> moves to the next box and
+ <keycombo><keycap>Shift</keycap><keycap>Tab</keycap></keycombo>
+ moves to the previous
+ box</para>
+ </listitem>
<listitem>
<para>Space bar toggles the status between reconciled and not
@@ -335,9 +325,9 @@
entries within the current box</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
- </sect3>
- </sect2>
- <sect2 id="txns-registers-txntypes">
+</sect2>
+</sect1>
+ <sect1 id="txns-registers-txntypes">
<title>Simple vs. Split Transactions</title>
<para>Every transaction in <application>&app;</application> has at least two splits, but a transaction can have more than two splits. A transaction with only two splits is called a <emphasis>simple transaction</emphasis>, since it only involves the current account and a single remote account. A transaction with three or more accounts is called a <emphasis>split transaction</emphasis>.</para>
@@ -437,7 +427,7 @@
exactly the same, but the transaction line now reflects the credit to
the <emphasis>Income:Salary</emphasis> account.</para>
- <sect3 id="txns-registers-twoaccount2">
+ <sect2 id="txns-registers-twoaccount2">
<title>Simple Transaction Example</title>
<para>Starting with the chart of accounts we created in the
@@ -498,9 +488,9 @@
groceries.</para></caption>
</mediaobject>
</screenshot>
- </sect3>
+ </sect2>
- <sect3 id="txns-registers-multiaccount2">
+ <sect2 id="txns-registers-multiaccount2">
<title>Split Transaction Example</title>
<para>The need for 3 or more splits in a transaction occurs when you need
@@ -549,10 +539,10 @@
</textobject>
</mediaobject>
</figure>
- </sect3>
- </sect2>
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
- <sect2 id="txns-reconcile1">
+ <sect1 id="txns-reconcile1">
<title>Reconciliation</title>
<para>Once transactions have been entered into <application>&app;</application>, it is important to verify
@@ -604,7 +594,7 @@
<emphasis role="strong">reconciled</emphasis> balances will be thrown off.</para>
</warning>
- <sect3 id="txns-reconcile-window2">
+ <sect2 id="txns-reconcile-window2">
<title>Reconcile windows</title>
<para>The reconciliation windows are used to reconcile a <application>&app;</application> account
@@ -822,10 +812,10 @@
reconciliation.</para></caption>
</mediaobject>
</screenshot>
- </sect3>
- </sect2>
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
- <sect2 id="txns-sxn1">
+ <sect1 id="txns-sxn1">
<title>Scheduled Transactions</title>
<para>Scheduled transactions are made to help entering repetitive money
@@ -842,7 +832,7 @@
<link linkend="txns-sxn-ledger2">from the ledger</link> or from the
<link linkend="txns-sxn-editor2">Scheduled Transactions Editor</link>.</para>
- <sect3 id="txns-sxn-ledger2">
+ <sect2 id="txns-sxn-ledger2">
<title>Creating from the Ledger</title>
<para>Enter the first occurrence of your to-schedule transaction in the
@@ -934,9 +924,9 @@
<application>&app;</application> now has memorized this scheduled transaction and on the 28th of
next month, it will pop up a window asking if it should create it (see
far below for a screenshot of this window).</para>
- </sect3>
+ </sect2>
- <sect3 id="txns-sxn-editor2">
+ <sect2 id="txns-sxn-editor2">
<title>Creating from the Editor</title>
<para>Another way of entering a scheduled transaction is from the
@@ -1235,10 +1225,10 @@
by selecting <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Open</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and
choosing the previously saved <filename>gcashdata_3</filename> <application>&app;</application> file.</para>
</note>
- </sect3>
- </sect2>
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
- <sect2 id="txns-puttoget1">
+ <sect1 id="txns-puttoget1">
<title>Putting It All Together</title>
<para>In the previous sections of this chapter the concepts and mechanics
@@ -1247,7 +1237,7 @@
chapter, by setting some opening balances, adding transactions and a
scheduled transaction.</para>
- <sect3 id="txns-puttoget-openfile">
+ <sect2 id="txns-puttoget-openfile">
<title>Open <application>&app;</application> file</title>
<para>Start with opening the previous datafile we stored,
@@ -1270,9 +1260,9 @@
section.</para></caption>
</mediaobject>
</screenshot>
- </sect3>
+ </sect2>
- <sect3 id="txns-puttoget-open2">
+ <sect2 id="txns-puttoget-open2">
<title>Opening Balances</title>
<para>As shown earlier in <xref linkend="txns-registers-twoaccount2"/>
@@ -1340,9 +1330,9 @@
balances.</para></caption>
</mediaobject>
</screenshot>
- </sect3>
+ </sect2>
- <sect3 id="txns-puttoget-add2">
+ <sect2 id="txns-puttoget-add2">
<title>Additional Transaction Examples</title>
<para>Now add some more transactions to simulate a month’s expenses.
@@ -1462,16 +1452,16 @@
linkend="chapter_txns" />.</para></caption>
</mediaobject>
</screenshot>
- </sect3>
+ </sect2>
- <sect3 id="txns-puttoget-save">
+ <sect2 id="txns-puttoget-save">
<title>Save file</title>
<para>Before we go to the report section, let’s save the <application>&app;</application> data
file (<filename>gcashdata_4</filename>).</para>
- </sect3>
+ </sect2>
- <sect3 id="txns-puttoget-reports">
+ <sect2 id="txns-puttoget-reports">
<title>Reports</title>
<para>But only having data available on the computer screen will not
@@ -1564,6 +1554,6 @@
</screenshot>
</listitem>
</orderedlist>
- </sect3>
- </sect2>
-</sect1>
\ No newline at end of file
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
+</chapter>
diff --git a/guide/C/gnucash-guide.xml b/guide/C/gnucash-guide.xml
index c896216..1eb3d46 100644
--- a/guide/C/gnucash-guide.xml
+++ b/guide/C/gnucash-guide.xml
@@ -11,10 +11,8 @@
<!-- List of files: -->
<!ENTITY chapter1 SYSTEM "ch_oview.xml">
<!ENTITY chapter2 SYSTEM "ch_basics.xml">
-<!ENTITY sectaccts SYSTEM "ch_accts.xml">
-<!ENTITY secttxns SYSTEM "ch_txns.xml">
-<!ENTITY chapter3 SYSTEM "ch_importing.xml">
-<!ENTITY chapter4 SYSTEM "ch_configuring.xml">
+<!ENTITY chapter3 SYSTEM "ch_accts.xml">
+<!ENTITY chapter4 SYSTEM "ch_txns.xml">
<!ENTITY chapter5 SYSTEM "ch_cbook.xml">
<!ENTITY chapter6 SYSTEM "ch_expenses.xml">
<!ENTITY chapter7 SYSTEM "ch_cc.xml">
diff --git a/help/C/Help_ch_GettingStarted.xml b/help/C/Help_ch_GettingStarted.xml
index 66e4972..a23a70c 100644
--- a/help/C/Help_ch_GettingStarted.xml
+++ b/help/C/Help_ch_GettingStarted.xml
@@ -18,8 +18,51 @@
<chapter id="getting-started">
<title>Getting Started</title>
+
<sect1 id="first-time">
- <title>Welcome to <application>&app;</application>! Screen</title>
+ <title>Running <application>&app;</application></title>
+ <para><application>&app;</application> can be run from your desktop main menu by selecting the associated menu entry.</para>
+ <para>Alternatively it can be run from a shell (command line) with the command <command>gnucash</command>.</para>
+
+ <para>During the loading of the <application>&app;</application> main window you will see the
+ <emphasis>&app; Splash Screen</emphasis> where some information
+ about the program itself and the loading process are displayed.</para>
+
+ <sect2 id="welcome-to-gnucash">
+ <title><guilabel>Welcome to &app;</guilabel> dialog</title>
+ <para>Next you will be presented with
+ the <guilabel>Welcome to &app;!</guilabel> dialog with three choices:</para>
+
+ <itemizedlist id="CreateAccounts">
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Create a new set of accounts:</guilabel> Runs the
+ <guilabel>New Account Hierarchy Setup</guilabel> assistant (see <xref linkend="acct-hierarchy"/>). Select
+ this option if you want to be assisted in creating a set of accounts.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Import my QIF files:</guilabel> Runs the
+ <guilabel>Import QIF Files</guilabel> assistant (see <xref linkend="import-qif"/>). Select this option
+ if you already have Quicken files (<filename>.qif</filename> files) from another
+ financial application and wish to import them into <application>&app;</application>.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Open the new user tutorial:</guilabel>
+ Opens the <application>&app;</application> Tutorial and Concepts Guide. Select this
+ option if you are completely new to <application>&app;</application> and
+ accounting concepts.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>It is possible to run these items after you have made a choice here,
+ but the <guilabel>Welcome to &app;!</guilabel> screen will not reappear.
+ To try one of the other choices later, read
+ <xref linkend="acct-hierarchy" />, <xref linkend="import-qif" /> and
+ <xref linkend="tutorial" /> to see how to start them from the
+ <application>&app;</application> menu.</para>
+ </note>
<para>This screen is intended for you to use to get up and running
quickly. The <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button is used to exit the
@@ -36,14 +79,182 @@
in <xref linkend="GUIMenus"></xref>.</para>
</note>
+ </sect2>
+
</sect1>
<sect1 id="acct-hierarchy">
<title>New Account Hierarchy Setup</title>
+
<para>This assistant helps you to create a set of <application>&app;</application> accounts. It will
appear if you choose <guibutton>Create a new set of accounts</guibutton>
- in the <guilabel>Welcome to &app;!</guilabel> menu, or if you select
- <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>New</guimenuitem></menuchoice> .</para>
+ in the <guilabel>Welcome to &app;!</guilabel> menu.</para>
+ <para>This will create a new blank <application>&app;</application> file and then automatically start
+ the <guilabel>New Account Hierarchy Setup</guilabel> assistant.</para>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>To start this assistant manually, go to <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu>
+ <guimenuitem>New</guimenuitem></menuchoice> if you need to create a new file.
+ If you want to run the assistant within the opened file, go to
+ <menuchoice><guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>New Account Hierarchy...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+ when the accounts tree tab is displayed.</para>
+ </tip>
+
+<orderedlist>
+<listitem>
+ <para>The <guilabel>New Account Hierarchy Setup</guilabel> assistant opens
+ with a screen that briefly describes what this assistant does. The three
+ buttons at the very bottom of the screen will not change while using the
+ assistant.</para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guibutton>Cancel:</guibutton> exit the process and cancel creating
+ a new set of accounts.</para>
+ <warning>
+ <para>If you click this button, any selections you have made up to
+ this point will be lost.</para>
+ </warning>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guibutton>Back:</guibutton> brings up the previous screen so
+ that you can change a previous selection until the first screen.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guibutton>Forward:</guibutton> brings up the next
+ screen so you can continue through the assistant.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+
+ <para>The next screen allows you to <guilabel>Choose Currency</guilabel>
+ to use as default for your accounts.</para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The <guilabel>Currency:</guilabel> drop down list defaults to the currency
+ configured in the <guilabel>Accounts</guilabel> tab under
+ <guilabel>&app; Preferences</guilabel> (see <xref linkend="prefs-accounts"/>). If you wish your accounts to
+ use a different default currency, select one from the list.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The <guibutton>Forward </guibutton>button is used to confirm
+ your selection and continue to the next screen.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+
+ <para>The next screen is used to <guilabel>Choose accounts to create</guilabel>.</para>
+ <para>You will see a screen divided into three parts.</para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The left upper portion has a list of
+ <guilabel>Categories</guilabel> for commonly used hierarchies of
+ accounts. Select from this list the types of accounts you wish to
+ use. You can select as many of the categories of accounts as you
+ wish.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The left lower section has a <guilabel>Category
+ Description</guilabel> that displays a detailed description of the
+ category currently highlighted.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The right side has a list of the <guilabel>Accounts</guilabel>
+ that will be created from the selected category.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The <guibutton>Select All</guibutton> button allows you to
+ include all of the account categories.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The <guibutton>Clear All </guibutton>button allows you to
+ deselect all of the categories selected.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+
+ <para>The next screen allows you to <guilabel>Setup selected accounts</guilabel>
+ by entering the opening balances and by selecting if the account is a placeholder.</para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>Equity accounts do not have opening balances so the
+ opening balance value for this kind of accounts
+ is locked and set to <guilabel>zero</guilabel> by
+ <application>&app;</application></para>
+ </note>
+
+ <note id="placeholder-acct">
+ <para><emphasis>Placeholder</emphasis> accounts are used to create a hierarchy of accounts and
+ normally do not have transactions or opening balances.</para>
+ </note>
+
+ <para>Follow the instructions in the display on how to select the
+ account and entering an opening balance for the account. A single
+ click is used to highlight an account.</para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The left side of the screen has a list of <guilabel>Account
+ Names</guilabel>. Select an account by "clicking" once in the
+ <guilabel>Account Names</guilabel> column with the account highlighted. This will open
+ the account name for changes.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The right side of the screen has a check-box to make an
+ account a <guilabel>Placeholder</guilabel> and a box to add the
+ <guilabel>Opening Balance</guilabel> for the selected account. Again
+ a single click in the <guilabel>Opening Balance</guilabel> or
+ <guilabel>Placeholder</guilabel> column will
+ open the field for changes.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+</listitem>
+<listitem>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>Finish account setup</guilabel> is the last screen and
+ gives you a final list of the three choices to finish the assistant.</para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guibutton>Cancel:</guibutton> exits the assistant and cancels creating
+ a new set of accounts.</para>
+ <warning>
+ <para>If you click this button, any selections you have made up to
+ this point will be lost.</para>
+ </warning>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guibutton>Back:</guibutton> brings up the previous screen so
+ that you can change a previous selection until the first screen.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guibutton>Apply:</guibutton> creates the accounts you have selected.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+</listitem>
+</orderedlist>
+
+ <para>You should now have a hierarchy of accounts in your main <application>&app;</application>
+ account window.</para>
</sect1>
<sect1 id="import-qif">
commit 6d50f4aa1ae4ed5f80bfc1f65c41962ceafa9e75
Author: David Thomas <sunfish62 at yahoo.com>
Date: Wed Sep 19 10:05:11 2018 -0400
Adding back two entity declarations to Makefile.am, per fellen
diff --git a/guide/C/Makefile.am b/guide/C/Makefile.am
index bac61db..3b9c528 100644
--- a/guide/C/Makefile.am
+++ b/guide/C/Makefile.am
@@ -13,6 +13,8 @@ entities = \
legal.xml \
ch_oview.xml \
ch_basics.xml \
+ ch_accts.xml \
+ ch_txns.xml \
ch_importing.xml \
ch_configuring.xml \
ch_cbook.xml \
commit c70abf4a94aa0f3b13ba2f7eb8b02dfc26d19d1c
Author: David Thomas <sunfish62 at yahoo.com>
Date: Tue Sep 18 22:59:37 2018 -0400
Deleting commented out content per jralls.
diff --git a/help/C/Help_ch_GettingStarted.xml b/help/C/Help_ch_GettingStarted.xml
index 2db0437..66e4972 100644
--- a/help/C/Help_ch_GettingStarted.xml
+++ b/help/C/Help_ch_GettingStarted.xml
@@ -21,50 +21,6 @@
<sect1 id="first-time">
<title>Welcome to <application>&app;</application>! Screen</title>
-<!-- Delete content. Section moved to Guide
- <para><application>&app;</application> can be run from your desktop main menu by selecting the associated menu entry.</para>
- <para>Alternatively it can be run from a shell (command line) with the command <command>gnucash</command>.</para>
-
- <para>During the loading of the <application>&app;</application> main window you will see the
- <emphasis>&app; Splash Screen</emphasis> where some information
- about the program itself and the loading process are displayed.</para>
-
- <sect2 id="welcome-to-gnucash">
- <title><guilabel>Welcome to &app;</guilabel> dialog</title>
- <para>Next you will be presented with
- the <guilabel>Welcome to &app;!</guilabel> dialog with three choices:</para>
-
- <itemizedlist id="CreateAccounts">
- <listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Create a new set of accounts:</guilabel> Runs the
- <guilabel>New Account Hierarchy Setup</guilabel> assistant (see <xref linkend="acct-hierarchy"/>). Select
- this option if you want to be assisted in creating a set of accounts.</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Import my QIF files:</guilabel> Runs the
- <guilabel>Import QIF Files</guilabel> assistant (see <xref linkend="import-qif"/>). Select this option
- if you already have Quicken files (<filename>.qif</filename> files) from another
- financial application and wish to import them into <application>&app;</application>.</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Open the new user tutorial:</guilabel>
- Opens the <application>&app;</application> Tutorial and Concepts Guide. Select this
- option if you are completely new to <application>&app;</application> and
- accounting concepts.</para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <note>
- <para>It is possible to run these items after you have made a choice here,
- but the <guilabel>Welcome to &app;!</guilabel> screen will not reappear.
- To try one of the other choices later, read
- <xref linkend="acct-hierarchy" />, <xref linkend="import-qif" /> and
- <xref linkend="tutorial" /> to see how to start them from the
- <application>&app;</application> menu.</para>
- </note>
-end Delete -->
<para>This screen is intended for you to use to get up and running
quickly. The <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button is used to exit the
screen. It will then prompt you with <guilabel>Display Welcome Dialog
@@ -80,9 +36,6 @@ end Delete -->
in <xref linkend="GUIMenus"></xref>.</para>
</note>
-<!-- Delete content. Section moved to Guide
- </sect2>
-End delete -->
</sect1>
<sect1 id="acct-hierarchy">
@@ -91,174 +44,6 @@ End delete -->
appear if you choose <guibutton>Create a new set of accounts</guibutton>
in the <guilabel>Welcome to &app;!</guilabel> menu, or if you select
<menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>New</guimenuitem></menuchoice> .</para>
-<!-- Delete content. Section moved to Guide
- <para>This will create a new blank <application>&app;</application> file and then automatically start
- the <guilabel>New Account Hierarchy Setup</guilabel> assistant.</para>
-
- <tip>
- <para>To start this assistant manually, go to <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu>
- <guimenuitem>New</guimenuitem></menuchoice> if you need to create a new file.
- If you want to run the assistant within the opened file, go to
- <menuchoice><guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>New Account Hierarchy...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
- when the accounts tree tab is displayed.</para>
- </tip>
-
-<orderedlist>
-<listitem>
- <para>The <guilabel>New Account Hierarchy Setup</guilabel> assistant opens
- with a screen that briefly describes what this assistant does. The three
- buttons at the very bottom of the screen will not change while using the
- assistant.</para>
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para><guibutton>Cancel:</guibutton> exit the process and cancel creating
- a new set of accounts.</para>
- <warning>
- <para>If you click this button, any selections you have made up to
- this point will be lost.</para>
- </warning>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para><guibutton>Back:</guibutton> brings up the previous screen so
- that you can change a previous selection until the first screen.</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para><guibutton>Forward:</guibutton> brings up the next
- screen so you can continue through the assistant.</para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-
- <para>The next screen allows you to <guilabel>Choose Currency</guilabel>
- to use as default for your accounts.</para>
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>The <guilabel>Currency:</guilabel> drop down list defaults to the currency
- configured in the <guilabel>Accounts</guilabel> tab under
- <guilabel>&app; Preferences</guilabel> (see <xref linkend="prefs-accounts"/>). If you wish your accounts to
- use a different default currency, select one from the list.</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>The <guibutton>Forward </guibutton>button is used to confirm
- your selection and continue to the next screen.</para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-
- <para>The next screen is used to <guilabel>Choose accounts to create</guilabel>.</para>
- <para>You will see a screen divided into three parts.</para>
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>The left upper portion has a list of
- <guilabel>Categories</guilabel> for commonly used hierarchies of
- accounts. Select from this list the types of accounts you wish to
- use. You can select as many of the categories of accounts as you
- wish.</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>The left lower section has a <guilabel>Category
- Description</guilabel> that displays a detailed description of the
- category currently highlighted.</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>The right side has a list of the <guilabel>Accounts</guilabel>
- that will be created from the selected category.</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>The <guibutton>Select All</guibutton> button allows you to
- include all of the account categories.</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>The <guibutton>Clear All </guibutton>button allows you to
- deselect all of the categories selected.</para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-
- <para>The next screen allows you to <guilabel>Setup selected accounts</guilabel>
- by entering the opening balances and by selecting if the account is a placeholder.</para>
-
- <note>
- <para>Equity accounts do not have opening balances so the
- opening balance value for this kind of accounts
- is locked and set to <guilabel>zero</guilabel> by
- <application>&app;</application></para>
- </note>
-
- <note id="placeholder-acct">
- <para><emphasis>Placeholder</emphasis> accounts are used to create a hierarchy of accounts and
- normally do not have transactions or opening balances.</para>
- </note>
-
- <para>Follow the instructions in the display on how to select the
- account and entering an opening balance for the account. A single
- click is used to highlight an account.</para>
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>The left side of the screen has a list of <guilabel>Account
- Names</guilabel>. Select an account by "clicking" once in the
- <guilabel>Account Names</guilabel> column with the account highlighted. This will open
- the account name for changes.</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>The right side of the screen has a check-box to make an
- account a <guilabel>Placeholder</guilabel> and a box to add the
- <guilabel>Opening Balance</guilabel> for the selected account. Again
- a single click in the <guilabel>Opening Balance</guilabel> or
- <guilabel>Placeholder</guilabel> column will
- open the field for changes.</para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
-</listitem>
-<listitem>
-
- <para>The <guilabel>Finish account setup</guilabel> is the last screen and
- gives you a final list of the three choices to finish the assistant.</para>
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para><guibutton>Cancel:</guibutton> exits the assistant and cancels creating
- a new set of accounts.</para>
- <warning>
- <para>If you click this button, any selections you have made up to
- this point will be lost.</para>
- </warning>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para><guibutton>Back:</guibutton> brings up the previous screen so
- that you can change a previous selection until the first screen.</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para><guibutton>Apply:</guibutton> creates the accounts you have selected.</para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-</listitem>
-</orderedlist>
-
- <para>You should now have a hierarchy of accounts in your main <application>&app;</application>
- account window.</para>
-end delete -->
</sect1>
<sect1 id="import-qif">
commit 9623f0ce95949db843ef397b8bc5b02499228913
Author: David Thomas <sunfish62 at yahoo.com>
Date: Tue Sep 18 22:48:16 2018 -0400
Adding changes to Makefile.am, per fellen comment.
diff --git a/guide/C/Makefile.am b/guide/C/Makefile.am
index 2770cfd..bac61db 100644
--- a/guide/C/Makefile.am
+++ b/guide/C/Makefile.am
@@ -13,8 +13,8 @@ entities = \
legal.xml \
ch_oview.xml \
ch_basics.xml \
- ch_accts.xml \
- ch_txns.xml \
+ ch_importing.xml \
+ ch_configuring.xml \
ch_cbook.xml \
ch_cc.xml \
ch_expenses.xml \
commit 67f69daf81470b9fc8a6ba93e3659f65e089a579
Author: David Thomas <sunfish62 at yahoo.com>
Date: Mon Sep 17 16:30:34 2018 -0400
Bug-796855 - Add lengthy text to ch_Importing from David C. that was originally slated for Help in bug 796856
diff --git a/guide/C/ch_basics.xml b/guide/C/ch_basics.xml
index e35707f..f8e9cc4 100644
--- a/guide/C/ch_basics.xml
+++ b/guide/C/ch_basics.xml
@@ -249,7 +249,7 @@
<sect2 id="basics-accounts2">
<title>Accounts</title>
- <para>An <firstterm>account</firstterm> keeps track of what you own,
+ <para>An <glossterm linkend="gnc-gl_account">account</glossterm> keeps track of what you own,
owe, spend or receive. Each <application>&app;</application> file can
contain any number of accounts, and each account can contain many
sub-accounts up to an arbitrary number of levels. This simple feature
diff --git a/guide/C/ch_importing.xml b/guide/C/ch_importing.xml
index 1d8f016..bf49943 100644
--- a/guide/C/ch_importing.xml
+++ b/guide/C/ch_importing.xml
@@ -11,15 +11,169 @@
-->
<chapter id="chapter_importing">
<title>Importing Data into <application>&app;</application></title>
-
<para>This chapter will detail procedures for importing data into <application>&app;</application>.</para>
-
- <sect1 id="importing-overview">
- <title>Overview</title>
-
- <para>Importing stuff is fun.</para>
-
+ <sect1 id="importing-from-files">
+ <title>Importing Transactions from Files</title>
+
+ <para>Imported transactions will generally be to a specific account in your account tree. In the following
+ this will be referred to as the <emphasis role="bold">import</emphasis> or
+ <emphasis role="bold">base</emphasis> account. It may or may not be
+ specified in the data being imported, depending on the import format. It is usually the first split
+ of a transaction being imported.
+ </para>
+ <para>All transactions will also must have a <emphasis role="bold">destination</emphasis> account for
+ at least matching splits. This may or may not be supplied in the imported data. If it is not,
+ an account can be assigned on the basis of the previous import history by matching to infomation in
+ the imported data. The user may always over-ride this assignment.
+ </para>
+ <para>Multi-split data previously exported from GnuCash may have both the import and destination accounts
+ for transaction splits specified in the data file.
+ </para>
+ <sect2>
+ <title>File Import Formats</title>
+ <para>Gnucash allows transactions to be imported in the following formats:</para>
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem><para><emphasis role="bold"><link linkend="importing-qif">QIF</link></emphasis>
+ (.qif) Quicken Interchange format - import data from Quicken financial software;</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para><emphasis role="bold"><link linkend="importing-ofx">OFX/QFX</link></emphasis>
+ (.ofx,.qfx) Open Financial eXchange format (QXF is an Intuit/Quicken proprietary version of OFX);
+ </para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para><emphasis role="bold"><link linkend="importing-csv">CSV</link></emphasis>
+ (.csv) Comma Separated Values;</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para><emphasis role="bold"><link linkend="importing-mt940">MT940</link></emphasis>
+ MT940</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para><emphasis role="bold"><link linkend="importing-mt942">MT942</link></emphasis>
+ MT942</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para><emphasis role="bold"><link linkend="importing-dtaus">DTAUS</link></emphasis>
+ DTAUS</para></listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>These import methods can be accessed from <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu>
+ <guisubmenu>Import ...</guisubmenu></menuchoice>.</para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="importing-matcher">
+ <title>Import Matcher</title>
+ <para>Several of the Import Assistants use an Import Matcher to implement a Bayesian approach to assign
+ destination accounts, if such accounts are not specified in
+ the imported data, to each imported transaction based on the previous import history of the import account.
+ It also attempts to match the transactions being imported to any existing transactions
+ based on the date and the description fields<!-- FIXME add any other fields used in matching -->.
+ </para>
+ <para>Transaction rows which match existing transactions already in the import account are flagged not to be imported. They
+ will have a light green background and the A and U+R checkboxes will be unchecked and the R checkbox will be
+ checked. To override and import the transaction, check the A checkbox. The U and R boxes will be unchecked
+ automatically. The reliability of the match is indicated by a bar display in the Info column. If a destination
+ account for the second split is assigned by the matcher if will be appended to the info column.
+ </para>
+ <para>Transaction rows which do not match existing transactions in the import account, for which an assignment
+ of a destination account cannot be made on the basis of the previous import history to the account, will be
+ displayed with an orange-yellow background and the A box will be checked and U+R and R unchecked. A destination
+ account must be specified for these transactions.
+ </para>
+ <sect3><title>Assign a Destination Account to a Single Transaction</title>
+ <para>The currently selected row is selected by Left-clicking it. It is displayed with a mid dark green background.</para>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold">Double click</emphasis> on a row. This will select it and open an Account Selection
+ dialog. Select the desired destination account in the dialog and click <guilabel>OK</guilabel>. The row
+ background will change to a light green and the assigned destination account will be displayed
+ in the Info column.
+ </para>
+ <para>or alternatively, <emphasis role="bold">Left-click</emphasis> on a row to select it followed by a
+ <emphasis role="bold">Right-click </emphasis>to bring up a popup menu then select
+ "Assign a transfer account" to display the Account Selection dialog, select the destination account and
+ click the <guilabel>OK</guilabel> button.
+ </para>
+ </sect3>
+ <sect3>
+ <title>Assign a Destination Account to Multiple Transactions</title>
+ <para>Sometimes you will have several transactions which will have the same destination account. Gnucash
+ allows you to select multiple transactions and apply the same destination account to all transactions
+ in the selection.
+ </para>
+ <para>Rows in a selection are displayed with a mid dark green background.</para>
+ <para>Multiple rows may be selected to have the same destination account assigned to them.</para>
+ <para>To select rows either:</para>
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem><para><emphasis role="bold">Left click</emphasis> on first row and then
+ <emphasis role="bold">Ctrl-Left click</emphasis> on other rows to add to the selection or</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para><emphasis role="bold">Left-click</emphasis> on a first row and then
+ <emphasis role="bold">Shift-Left-click</emphasis> on another row to select all rows between them.</para></listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ <para>then <emphasis role="bold">Right-click</emphasis> to display a popup menu and then select
+ <emphasis role="bold">"Assign a transfer account"</emphasis> to open the Account
+ Selection dialog. Select the desired destination account and click the <guilabel>OK</guilabel>
+ button in the Account Selection dialog.</para>
+ </sect3>
+ <sect3>
+ <title>Completing the Import</title>
+ <para>Once you have assigned destination accounts for all the imported transactions using the above methods
+ (all row backgrounds will be a light green colour), check that the assigned destination acounts are correct
+ and then press the <guilabel>OK</guilabel> button at the bottom of the Generic Import Matcher
+ window. The transactions selected for import will have their splits added to the selected source
+ and destination accounts.
+ </para>
+ <para>The choices made for the destination accounts and description/memo fields are remembered and stored and
+ used for future imports to the same account to automatically assign a destination account for transaction
+ records not containing destination account information.
+ </para>
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
+
+
<sect2 id="importing-qif">
+ <title>Import QIF</title>
+ <para>To import data from Quicken®, MS Money, or other programs that use QIF(Quicken® Interchange Format),
+ you must first export your data to a QIF file. One way to do this is to export each account as a
+ separate QIF file. An easier way, available in Quicken® 98 and beyond, is to export all accounts at
+ once into a single QIF file. Check your program's manual to determine if this option is available.
+ </para>
+ <sect3><title>To import QIF files:</title><para> </para></sect3>
+ <sect3>
+ <title>Load all of the QIF files containing data you wish to import</title>
+ <para>To do this, select <emphasis role="bold">File -> Import -> Import QIF...</emphasis> from the menu. When the QIF Import dialog
+ box appears, click <emphasis role="bold">Next</emphasis> and follow the instructions to guide you through the process of loading
+ your files.
+ </para>
+ <para>This image shows the start of the QIF Import assistant.<!--FIXME put an image of the import druid in --> </para>
+ <para>You will be prompted for a filename to load. Use the Select button to select your QIF file and
+ click Next to load it. Once the file is loaded, select Load another file if you have more files
+ to load. When you have loaded all your QIF files, click Next to continue with the import process.
+ </para>
+ </sect3>
+ <sect3>
+ <title>Review the GnuCash accounts to be created.</title>
+ <para>The importer then matches up your QIF accounts and categories with GnuCash accounts and gives
+ you a brief description of the matching process. Clicking Next will bring you to a view comparing
+ your QIF accounts with the corresponding GnuCash accounts created. To change an account name, select
+ the row containing that account name and edit the name in the dialog box provided. Click Next when
+ you have finished making changes, and proceed through a similar category matching process. QIF
+ income and expense categories import as GnuCash income and expense accounts <!--(see section 3.1 FIXME for
+ more on this).--> Make changes to these account names if necessary, and click Next to continue.
+ </para>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold">Note:</emphasis> If you are not sure what changes are needed, it is safe to
+ accept the GnuCash account names. It is easy to edit the accounts later if you find you need to make
+ a change.
+ </para>
+ <para>From the drop-down list, select a standard currency to be used for the imported accounts and click <emphasis role="bold">Next</emphasis>
+ to continue. If you have stocks, mutual funds, or other securities, you will be prompted for additional
+ information. The importer dialog will ask for the exchange or listing (i.e. Nasdaq), the security's
+ full name, and the ticker symbol. If you do not have this information handy, you can edit the account
+ information later, once the import is complete. Click <emphasis role="bold">Next</emphasis> to continue.
+ </para>
+ </sect3>
+ <sect3>
+ <title>Tell GnuCash to import the data.</title>
+ <para>The last step is the import. Once you have verified your account names and investment information,
+ click <emphasis role="bold">Finish</emphasis> in the Update your GnuCash accounts page to complete the import process. Depending
+ upon the size of your file, the import might take a few minutes to complete, so a progress bar
+ displays the percentage finished. When the import process is complete, GnuCash will return you
+ to the main window, which should now display the names of the accounts you imported.
+ </para>
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <!--
+ <sect2 id="importing-qif-from-help">
<title>Importing Quicken QIF Files</title>
<para>Many users seek to import their financial data from Quicken.</para>
@@ -389,5 +543,130 @@
</tip>
</sect2>
- </sect1>
+ -->
+
+ <sect2 id="importing-ofx">
+ <title>Import OFX/QFX</title>
+ <para>This opens a file selection dialog. Navigate to the file you wish to import, select a file with
+ the appropriate extension (.ofx or .qfx), then press the <emphasis role="bold">Import</emphasis> button.</para>
+ <para>Gnucash opens an Account Selection dialog to select an account in your CoA corresponding to data source. Select
+ the appropriate account from the account tree and press the <emphasis role="bold">OK</emphasis> button. On subsequent import of files from the
+ same source (identified by tags in the file), the source is remembered and the account selection dialog is not
+ displayed.</para>
+ <para>The generic import transaction matcher dialog is opened next. See the <link linkend="importing-matcher">
+ Import Matcher</link> section (common to both OFX/QFX and CSV import formats) following the Import CSV
+ section to continue the import process.
+ </para>
+ </sect2>
+ <sect2 id="importing-csv">
+ <title>Import CSV</title>
+ <para>Clicking on <emphasis role="bold">Import CSV</emphasis> in the Import menu will bring up the Import Assistant dialog. The first step brings up a file selection
+ dialog. Navigate to the location where the file you wish to import is located and select the file to import then click the
+ <emphasis role="bold">OK</emphasis> button.
+ </para>
+ <para>The next window will allow you to set parameters for the importing of the file. All widgets have tooltips which explain what
+ the setting affects and the options for the setting.
+ </para>
+ <sect3 id="importing-csv-save">
+ <title>Load and Save Settings</title>
+ <para>If this import is a regular occurrence, once you have set the other import paramters, you can save these settings by typing
+ in a setting name in the <emphasis role="bold">Load and Save Settings Entry</emphasis> combo box and pressing the <emphasis role="bold">Save</emphasis> button just to the right of the box.
+ Previously defined settings can be retrieved by selecting the appropriate setting name from the dropdown list activated by
+ the down arrow at the right end of the text box. The trash can button to the right of the Save button can be used to remove
+ the settings selected from the drop down list for the box. The settings group <emphasis role="bold">"GnuCash Export Settings"</emphasis> define a setting
+ group for the export and reimport of GnuCash transaction data - use this if importing data previously exported from GnuCash.
+ </para>
+ </sect3>
+ <sect3>
+ <title>Account</title>
+ <para>This combo box allows you to select the base or import account into which the transactions will be imported. It may be left unset
+ if the imported data contains a column listing the accounts associated with each split or the import data
+ specifies the account for first split of the transaction.</para>
+ </sect3>
+ <sect3>
+ <title>File Format</title>
+ <para>This section allows you to define whether the file has:
+ </para>
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold">Fixed width columns</emphasis> Selecting this radio button will allow you to define
+ column boundaries by double clicking at the appropriate positions in the sample records displayed in the
+ panel below. Single clicking in a column will narrow, widen or merge the column.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold">Separators</emphasis> Selecting this radio button will allow you to define characters
+ which will be used to distinguish columns in the input file. The default is comma separated however spaces,
+ tabs,colons or semicolons or any combination of them may be used to separate columns in the input file by
+ selecting the appropriate check boxes. You may also define custom separators by typing the required characters
+ into the text box and selecting the <emphasis role="bold">Custom</emphasis> checkbox. This may be used in combination with any of the
+ predefined separators.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><emphasis role="bold">Multi-split</emphasis> Selecting this check box allows the splits for a single transaction
+ to be defined on consecutive lines within the file with each line defining a single split. If not selected each
+ line is assumed to contain the information for a single transaction including one or two splits.
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect3>
+ <sect3>
+ <title>Miscellaneous</title>
+ <para>The miscellaneous settings allow you to set:
+ </para>
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem><para><emphasis role="bold">Encoding</emphasis>This is usually the UTF-8 variant for your locale;</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para><emphasis role="bold">Date Format</emphasis> This does not default to the Locale setting so check it matches the data you are importing;</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para><emphasis role="bold">Currency Format</emphasis>;</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para><emphasis role="bold">Leading Lines to Skip</emphasis>;</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para><emphasis role="bold">Trailing Lines to Skip</emphasis>;</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para><emphasis role="bold">Skip alternate lines</emphasis>;</para></listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ <para>to match the settings for the file you are importing. Tooltips may also contain information on the setting and options.</para>
+ </sect3>
+ <sect3>
+ <title>Import Panel</title>
+ <para>The import panel shows the data being imported as it is interpreted using the settings chosen to define columns and formats.
+ The dropdown lists in the headers for each column of the import allow you to associate a specific column in the imported data
+ with a specific field in the display of a transaction in an account register. At a minimum to import data, columns in the
+ imported data containing the following information <emphasis role="bold">must</emphasis> be specified:
+ </para>
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem><para><emphasis role="bold">Date </emphasis>of transaction;</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para><emphasis role="bold">Account</emphasis> into which transaction is to be imported (or alternatively set the base account as above);</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para><emphasis role="bold">Description</emphasis> of the transaction;</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para><emphasis role="bold">Deposit or Withdrawal</emphasis> column.</para></listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ <para>The <emphasis role="bold">Skip Errors</emphasis> check box will skip trying to import any rows with errors in matching the columns.
+ </para>
+ <para>When you are happy with all the import settings, <link linkend="importing-csv-save">save</link> them
+ if you will use the same settings again, then press the <emphasis role="bold">Next</emphasis> button.
+ This will bring up a window which allows you to map the accounts identified in the account column (Account Id) with accounts
+ in the GnuCash account tree (Account name). Double click on a row to bring up a dialog to select the matching GnuCash account.
+ When you have selected a match for all accounts, click on the <emphasis role="bold">Next</emphasis> button.
+ </para>
+ <para>The Transaction Information panel allows review of data entry settings so far.
+ </para>
+ <para>Clicking on Match Transactions will then bring up the main <link linkend="importing-matcher">Import Matcher</link>
+ window described in the next section.
+ </para>
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="importing-mt940">
+ <title>Import MT940</title>
+ <para>Use this option to import MT940 data.</para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="importing-mt942">
+ <title>Import MT942</title>
+ <para>Use this option to import MT942 data.</para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="importing-dtaus">
+ <title>Import DTAUS</title>
+ <para>Use this option to import DTAUS data.</para>
+ </sect2>
+</sect1>
</chapter>
commit 3f873a9825323c978a238d9fe22f9cefaf050e76
Author: David Thomas <sunfish62 at yahoo.com>
Date: Thu Sep 13 21:41:11 2018 -0400
Replace closing sect1 tag that was mistakenly commented out in Help_ch_GettingStarted.xml
diff --git a/help/C/Help_ch_GettingStarted.xml b/help/C/Help_ch_GettingStarted.xml
index d54d409..2db0437 100644
--- a/help/C/Help_ch_GettingStarted.xml
+++ b/help/C/Help_ch_GettingStarted.xml
@@ -258,8 +258,8 @@ End delete -->
<para>You should now have a hierarchy of accounts in your main <application>&app;</application>
account window.</para>
- </sect1>
end delete -->
+ </sect1>
<sect1 id="import-qif">
<title>Import QIF Files</title>
commit a2c5006ac9bc380a9f604cb5edca80c767b13843
Author: David Thomas <sunfish62 at yahoo.com>
Date: Thu Sep 13 20:32:30 2018 -0400
Fix error in file structure.
diff --git a/guide/C/ch_basics.xml b/guide/C/ch_basics.xml
index 5af01c4..e35707f 100644
--- a/guide/C/ch_basics.xml
+++ b/guide/C/ch_basics.xml
@@ -1517,3 +1517,6 @@
</listitem>
</orderedlist>
</sect1>
+§accts;
+§txns;
+</chapter>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/guide/C/ch_txns.xml b/guide/C/ch_txns.xml
index 6e063cb..eb218d6 100644
--- a/guide/C/ch_txns.xml
+++ b/guide/C/ch_txns.xml
@@ -1566,5 +1566,4 @@
</orderedlist>
</sect3>
</sect2>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
\ No newline at end of file
+</sect1>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/guide/C/gnucash-guide.xml b/guide/C/gnucash-guide.xml
index a18ef2d..c896216 100644
--- a/guide/C/gnucash-guide.xml
+++ b/guide/C/gnucash-guide.xml
@@ -11,8 +11,8 @@
<!-- List of files: -->
<!ENTITY chapter1 SYSTEM "ch_oview.xml">
<!ENTITY chapter2 SYSTEM "ch_basics.xml">
-<!ENTITY chapter2a SYSTEM "ch_accts.xml">
-<!ENTITY chapter2b SYSTEM "ch_txns.xml">
+<!ENTITY sectaccts SYSTEM "ch_accts.xml">
+<!ENTITY secttxns SYSTEM "ch_txns.xml">
<!ENTITY chapter3 SYSTEM "ch_importing.xml">
<!ENTITY chapter4 SYSTEM "ch_configuring.xml">
<!ENTITY chapter5 SYSTEM "ch_cbook.xml">
@@ -495,8 +495,6 @@
<title>Getting Started</title>
&chapter1;
&chapter2;
-&chapter2a;
-&chapter2b;
&chapter3;
&chapter4;
</part>
commit 7a7a0da41220f7ab4bb47f97fa84215f3888391c
Author: David Thomas <sunfish62 at yahoo.com>
Date: Thu Sep 13 20:11:49 2018 -0400
Fix typo in entity
diff --git a/guide/C/gnucash-guide.xml b/guide/C/gnucash-guide.xml
index a3180a2..a18ef2d 100644
--- a/guide/C/gnucash-guide.xml
+++ b/guide/C/gnucash-guide.xml
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
<!ENTITY chapter1 SYSTEM "ch_oview.xml">
<!ENTITY chapter2 SYSTEM "ch_basics.xml">
<!ENTITY chapter2a SYSTEM "ch_accts.xml">
-<!ENTITY chapter2b SYSTEM "ch_txnss.xml">
+<!ENTITY chapter2b SYSTEM "ch_txns.xml">
<!ENTITY chapter3 SYSTEM "ch_importing.xml">
<!ENTITY chapter4 SYSTEM "ch_configuring.xml">
<!ENTITY chapter5 SYSTEM "ch_cbook.xml">
commit 3144c4e6b9f4fe335499cc3c63a66f871757c1c8
Author: David Thomas <sunfish62 at yahoo.com>
Date: Thu Sep 13 18:30:30 2018 -0400
Committing broken version with ch_accts.xml and ch_txns.xml in separate files.
xmllint yields:
ch_basics.xml:1520: parser error : Premature end of data in tag chapter line 18
^
gnucash-guide.xml:497: parser error : Failure to process entity chapter2
&chapter2;
^
gnucash-guide.xml:497: parser error : Entity 'chapter2' not defined
&chapter2;
^
diff --git a/guide/C/ch_accts.xml b/guide/C/ch_accts.xml
index 5cd4691..be2796c 100644
--- a/guide/C/ch_accts.xml
+++ b/guide/C/ch_accts.xml
@@ -13,17 +13,17 @@ Originally written by
Translators:
(translators put your name and email here)
-->
-<chapter id="chapter_accts">
+<sect1 id="chapter_accts">
<title>Accounts</title>
- <para>This chapter will discuss some useful concepts for organizing your
+ <para>This section discusses some useful concepts for organizing your
accounts. Since <application>&app;</application> does not impose any specific account tree layout,
you are free to design your account structure in any manner you wish.
However, there are a few basic accounting concepts which you will probably
want to follow when designing your accounts to maximize their
utility.</para>
- <sect1 id="accts-concepts1">
+ <sect2 id="accts-concepts1">
<title>Basic Accounting Concepts</title>
<para>As we saw in the previous chapter, accounting is based on 5 basic
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ Translators:
</mediaobject>
</screenshot>
- <sect2 id="accts-bsa2">
+ <sect3 id="accts-bsa2">
<title>Balance Sheet Accounts</title>
<para>The three so-called <emphasis>Balance Sheet Accounts</emphasis>
@@ -88,9 +88,9 @@ Translators:
represents what is left over after you subtract your liabilities from
your assets. It can be thought of as the portion of your assets that you
own outright, without any debt.</para>
- </sect2>
+ </sect3>
- <sect2 id="accts-ie2">
+ <sect3 id="accts-ie2">
<title>Income and Expense Accounts</title>
<para>The two <guilabel>Income and Expense Accounts</guilabel> are used
@@ -120,10 +120,10 @@ Translators:
Then you should introduce it here in a separate paragraph
and replace 'income and expense' by it in the latter sections of this book.
-->
- </sect2>
- </sect1>
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
- <sect1 id="accts-types1">
+ <sect2 id="accts-types1">
<title><application>&app;</application> Accounts</title>
<para>This section will show how the <application>&app;</application> definition of an account fits
@@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ Translators:
<para>These <application>&app;</application> account types are presented in more detail
below.</para>
- <sect2 id="accts-gc-bsa2">
+ <sect3 id="accts-gc-bsa2">
<title>Balance Sheet Accounts</title>
<para>The first balance sheet account we will examine is
@@ -330,9 +330,9 @@ Translators:
minus the <emphasis>things you owe</emphasis> equals your
<emphasis>net worth</emphasis>.</para>
</note>
- </sect2>
+ </sect3>
- <sect2 id="accts-gc-ie2">
+ <sect3 id="accts-gc-ie2">
<title>Income and Expense Accounts</title>
<para><emphasis>Income</emphasis> is the payment you receive for your
@@ -408,9 +408,9 @@ Translators:
</caption>
</mediaobject>
</screenshot>
- </sect2>
+ </sect3>
- <sect2 id="accts-other-types">
+ <sect3 id="accts-other-types">
<title>Other Account Types</title>
<para>There are some special other account types.</para>
@@ -425,11 +425,11 @@ Translators:
</emphasis>are used only in the OFX importer, apparently for
completeness with the specification.
</para>
- </sect2>
+ </sect3>
- </sect1>
+ </sect2>
- <sect1 id="accts-examples1">
+ <sect2 id="accts-examples1">
<title>Putting It All Together</title>
<para>Let’s go through the process of building a common personal finance
@@ -440,7 +440,7 @@ Translators:
track into the basic account types of accounting. This is fairly simple,
let’s go through an example.</para>
- <sect2 id="accts-examples-situation2">
+ <sect3 id="accts-examples-situation2">
<title>Simple Example</title>
<para>Let us assume you have a checking and a savings account at a bank,
@@ -459,9 +459,9 @@ Translators:
form of a salary, and <guilabel>expenses</guilabel> in the form of
groceries, rent, electricity, phone, and taxes (Federal, Social
Security, Medicare) on your salary.</para>
- </sect2>
+ </sect3>
- <sect2 id="accts-examples-toplevel2">
+ <sect3 id="accts-examples-toplevel2">
<title>The Basic Top Level Accounts</title>
<para>Now, you must decide how you want to group these accounts. Most
@@ -551,9 +551,9 @@ Translators:
</caption>
</mediaobject>
</screenshot>
- </sect2>
+ </sect3>
- <sect2 id="accts-examples-organization2">
+ <sect3 id="accts-examples-organization2">
<title>Making Sub-Accounts</title>
<para>You can now add to this basic top-level tree structure by inserting
@@ -684,6 +684,6 @@ Translators:
household budget. With this basic framework in place, we can now begin
to populate the accounts with transactions. The next chapter will cover
this subject in greater detail.</para>
- </sect2>
- </sect1>
-</chapter>
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
+</sect1>
diff --git a/guide/C/ch_basics.xml b/guide/C/ch_basics.xml
index d4e0ffb..5af01c4 100644
--- a/guide/C/ch_basics.xml
+++ b/guide/C/ch_basics.xml
@@ -1517,2234 +1517,3 @@
</listitem>
</orderedlist>
</sect1>
-<sect1 id="chapter_accts">
- <title>Accounts</title>
-
- <para>This section discusses some useful concepts for organizing your
- accounts. Since <application>&app;</application> does not impose any specific account tree layout,
- you are free to design your account structure in any manner you wish.
- However, there are a few basic accounting concepts which you will probably
- want to follow when designing your accounts to maximize their
- utility.</para>
-
- <sect2 id="accts-concepts1">
- <title>Basic Accounting Concepts</title>
-
- <para>As we saw in the previous chapter, accounting is based on 5 basic
- account types: <guilabel>Assets</guilabel>,
- <guilabel>Liabilities</guilabel>, <guilabel>Equity</guilabel>,
- <guilabel>Income</guilabel> and <guilabel>Expenses</guilabel>. We will now
- expand on our understanding of these account types, and show how they are
- represented in <application>&app;</application>. But first, let’s divide them into 2 groups, the
- balance sheet accounts and the income and expense accounts.
- As the name says the balance sheet accounts can be summarized in the
- balance of what you own and owe <emphasis>at a point in the time</emphasis>,
- while the income and expense accounts can be summarized in the Profit & Loss report,
- which shows the <emphasis>change of values in a period of time</emphasis> like the economic year </para>
-
- <para>Let’s have a quick look at the Accounting Equation (<emphasis>Assets
- - Liabilities = Equity + (Income - Expenses)</emphasis>) again as a
- reminder, before we go deeper into each account type.</para>
-
- <screenshot id="accts-AccountRelationships">
- <mediaobject>
- <imageobject role="html">
- <imagedata fileref="figures/basics_AccountRelationships.png"
- format="PNG" srccredit="Geert Janssens" ></imagedata>
- </imageobject>
-
- <imageobject role="fo">
- <imagedata fileref="figures/basics_AccountRelationships.svg"
- format="SVG" srccredit="Geert Janssens"
- contentwidth="4in"></imagedata>
- </imageobject>
- <textobject>
- <phrase>The basic accounts relationships</phrase>
- </textobject>
-
- <caption>
- <para>A graphical view of the relationship between the 5 basic
- accounts. Net worth (equity) increases through income and decreases
- through expenses. The arrows represent the movement of value.</para>
- </caption>
- </mediaobject>
- </screenshot>
-
- <sect3 id="accts-bsa2">
- <title>Balance Sheet Accounts</title>
-
- <para>The three so-called <emphasis>Balance Sheet Accounts</emphasis>
- are <guilabel>Assets</guilabel>, <guilabel>Liabilities</guilabel>, and
- <guilabel>Equity</guilabel>. Balance Sheet Accounts are used to track
- the things you own or owe.</para>
-
- <para><guilabel>Assets</guilabel> is the group of things that you own.
- Your assets could include a car, cash, a house, stocks, or anything else
- that has convertible value. Convertible value means that theoretically
- you could sell the item for cash.</para>
-
- <para><guilabel>Liabilities</guilabel> is the group of things on which
- you owe money. Your liabilities could include a car loan, a student
- loan, a mortgage, your investment margin account, or anything else which
- you must pay back at some time.</para>
-
- <para><guilabel>Equity</guilabel> is the same as "net worth." It
- represents what is left over after you subtract your liabilities from
- your assets. It can be thought of as the portion of your assets that you
- own outright, without any debt.</para>
- </sect3>
-
- <sect3 id="accts-ie2">
- <title>Income and Expense Accounts</title>
-
- <para>The two <guilabel>Income and Expense Accounts</guilabel> are used
- to increase or decrease the value of your accounts. Thus, while the
- balance sheet accounts simply <emphasis>track</emphasis> the value of
- the things you own or owe, income and expense accounts allow you to
- <emphasis>change</emphasis> the value of these accounts.</para>
-
- <para><guilabel>Income</guilabel> is the payment you receive for your
- time, services you provide, or the use of your money. When you receive a
- paycheck, for example, that check is a payment for labor you provided to
- an employer. Other examples of income include commissions, tips,
- dividend income from stocks, and interest income from bank accounts.
- Income will always increase the value of your Assets and thus your
- Equity.</para>
-
- <para><guilabel>Expense</guilabel> refers to money you spend to purchase
- goods or services provided by someone else
- <emphasis>for early consumption</emphasis>. Examples of expenses are a
- meal at a restaurant, rent, groceries, gas for your car, or tickets to
- see a play. Expenses will always decrease your Equity. If you pay for
- the expense immediately, you will decrease your Assets, whereas if you
- pay for the expense on credit you increase your Liabilities.</para>
-<!--
- Translators:
- Your language might have a generic term for 'income and expense'.
- Then you should introduce it here in a separate paragraph
- and replace 'income and expense' by it in the latter sections of this book.
--->
- </sect3>
- </sect2>
-
- <sect2 id="accts-types1">
- <title><application>&app;</application> Accounts</title>
-
- <para>This section will show how the <application>&app;</application> definition of an account fits
- into the view of the 5 basic accounting types.</para>
-
- <para>But first, let’s begin with a definition of an
- <guilabel>account</guilabel> in <application>&app;</application>. A <application>&app;</application>
- <guilabel>account</guilabel> is an entity which contains other
- sub-accounts, or that contains <guilabel>transactions</guilabel>. Since an
- account can contain other accounts, you often see <guilabel>account
- trees</guilabel> in <application>&app;</application>, in which logically associated accounts are grouped
- together within a common parent account.</para>
-
- <para>A <application>&app;</application> account must have a unique name (that you assign) and one
- of the predefined <application>&app;</application> <quote>account types</quote>. There are a total of 12 account
- types in <application>&app;</application>. These 12 account types are based on the 5 basic
- accounting types; the reason there are more <application>&app;</application> account types than
- basic accounting types is that this allows <application>&app;</application> to perform specialized
- tracking and handling of certain accounts. There are 6 asset accounts
- (<emphasis>Cash</emphasis>, <emphasis>Bank</emphasis>,
- <emphasis>Stock</emphasis>, <emphasis>Mutual Fund</emphasis>,
- <emphasis>Accounts Receivable</emphasis>, and <emphasis>Other Assets</emphasis>),
- 3 liability accounts (<emphasis>Credit Card</emphasis>,
- <emphasis>Accounts Payable</emphasis>, and <emphasis>Liability</emphasis>),
- 1 equity account (<emphasis>Equity</emphasis>), 1 income account
- (<emphasis>Income</emphasis>), and 1 expense account
- (<emphasis>Expenses</emphasis>).</para>
-
- <para>These <application>&app;</application> account types are presented in more detail
- below.</para>
-
- <sect3 id="accts-gc-bsa2">
- <title>Balance Sheet Accounts</title>
-
- <para>The first balance sheet account we will examine is
- <emphasis>Assets</emphasis>, which, as you remember from the previous
- section, refers to things you own.</para>
-
- <para>To help you organize your asset accounts and to simplify
- transaction entry, <application>&app;</application> supports several types of asset
- accounts:</para>
-
- <orderedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Cash</guilabel> Use this account to track the money
- you have on hand, in your wallet, in your piggy bank, under your
- mattress, or wherever you choose to keep it handy. This is the most
- <emphasis>liquid</emphasis>, or easily traded, type of asset.</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Bank</guilabel> This account is used to track your
- cash balance that you keep in institutions such as banks, credit
- unions, savings and loan, or brokerage firms - wherever someone else
- safeguards your money. This is the second most
- <emphasis>liquid</emphasis> type of account, because you can easily
- convert it to cash on hand.</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Stock</guilabel> Track your individual stocks and
- bonds using this type of account. The stock account’s register
- provides extra columns for entering number of shares and price of
- your investment. With these types of assets, you may not be able to
- easily convert them to cash unless you can find a buyer, and you are
- not guaranteed to get the same amount of cash you paid for
- them.</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Mutual Fund</guilabel> This is similar to the stock
- account, except that it is used to track funds. Its account register
- provides the same extra columns for entering share and price
- information. Funds represent ownership shares of a variety of
- investments, and like stocks they do not offer any guaranteed cash
- value.</para>
-
- <para><application>&app;</application> treats account types Stock and
- Mutual Fund the same.
- </para>
-
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Accounts Receivable</guilabel> (A/Receivable) This
- is typically a business use only account in which you place
- outstanding debts owed to you. It is considered an asset because you
- should be able to count on these funds arriving.</para>
-
- <para>Transactions involving an Accounts Receivable account should not be added,
- changed or deleted in any way other than by using
- </para>
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem><para>post/unpost bill/invoice/voucher or</para>
- </listitem>
- <listitem><para>process payment</para></listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Asset</guilabel> No matter how diverse they
- are, <application>&app;</application> handles many other situations
- easily. The account type <quote>Asset</quote>, covers all assets not
- listed above.</para>
-
- <para><application>&app;</application> treats account types Cash,
- Bank and Asset the same.
- </para>
-
- <para>Accounts are repositories of information used to track or record
- the kinds of actions that occur related to the purpose for which the
- account is established.</para>
-
- <para>For businesses, activities being tracked and reported are
- frequently subdivided more finely than what has been considered thus
- far. For a more developed treatment of the possibilities, please read
- the descriptions presented in
- <xref linkend="chapter_other_assets"/> of this Guide.</para>
-
- <para>For personal finances a person can follow the business groupings
- or not, as they seem useful to the activities the person is tracking
- and to the kind of reporting that person needs to have to manage their
- financial assets. For additional information, consult
- <xref linkend="chapter_other_assets"/> of this Guide.</para>
- </listitem>
- </orderedlist>
-
- <para>The second balance sheet account is
- <emphasis>Liabilities</emphasis>, which as you recall, refers to what
- you owe, money you have borrowed and are obligated to pay back some day.
- These represent the rights of your lenders to obtain repayment from you.
- Tracking the liability balances lets you know how much debt you have at
- a given point in time.</para>
-
- <para><application>&app;</application> offers three liability account types:</para>
-
- <orderedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Credit Card</guilabel> Use this to track your credit
- card receipts and reconcile your credit card statements. Credit
- cards represent a short-term loan that you are obligated to repay to
- the credit card company. This type of account can also be used for
- other short-term loans such as a line of credit from your
- bank.</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Accounts Payable</guilabel> (A/Payable) This is
- typically a business use only account in which you place bills you
- have yet to pay.
- </para>
-
- <para>Transactions involving an Accounts Payable account should not be added,
- changed or deleted in any way other than by using
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem><para>post/unpost bill/invoice/voucher or</para></listitem>
- <listitem><para>process payment</para></listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Liability</guilabel> Use this type of account for
- all other loans, generally larger long-term loans such as a mortgage
- or vehicle loan. This account can help you keep track of how much
- you owe and how much you have already repaid.</para>
-
- <para><application>&app;</application> treats account types Credit
- Card and Liability the same.
- </para>
-
- </listitem>
- </orderedlist>
-
- <tip>
- <para>Liabilities in accounting act in an opposite manner from assets:
- <emphasis>credits</emphasis> (right-column value entries) increase
- liability account balances and <emphasis>debits</emphasis>
- (left-column value entries) decrease them. (See note later in this
- chapter)</para>
- </tip>
-
- <para>The final balance sheet account is <emphasis>Equity</emphasis>,
- which is synonymous with <quote>net worth</quote>. It represents what is left over
- after you subtract your liabilities from your assets, so it is the
- portion of your assets that you own outright, without any debt. In
- <application>&app;</application>, use this type of account as the source of your opening bank
- balances, because these balances represent your beginning net
- worth.</para>
-
- <para>There is usually only a single <application>&app;</application> equity account, called naturally
- enough, <guilabel>Equity</guilabel>.
- For companies, cooperatives etc. you can create a subaccount for each partner.</para>
-
- <tip>
- <para>In equity accounts, credits increase account balances and debits
- decrease them. (See note later in this chapter)</para>
- </tip>
-
- <note>
- <para>The accounting equation that links balance-sheet accounts is
- Assets = Liabilities + Equity or rearranged Assets - Liabilities =
- Equity. So, in common terms, the <emphasis>things you own</emphasis>
- minus the <emphasis>things you owe</emphasis> equals your
- <emphasis>net worth</emphasis>.</para>
- </note>
- </sect3>
-
- <sect3 id="accts-gc-ie2">
- <title>Income and Expense Accounts</title>
-
- <para><emphasis>Income</emphasis> is the payment you receive for your
- time, services you provide, or the use of your money. In <application>&app;</application>, use an
- <guilabel>Income</guilabel> type account to track these.</para>
-
- <tip>
- <para>Credits increase income account balances and debits decrease
- them. As described in <xref linkend="basics-accounting1"></xref>,
- credits represent money transferred
- <emphasis>from</emphasis> an account. So in these special income
- accounts, when you transfer money <emphasis>from</emphasis> (credit)
- the income account to another account, the balance of the income
- account <emphasis>increases</emphasis>. For example, when you deposit
- a paycheck and record the transaction as a transfer from an income
- account to a bank account, the balances of both accounts
- increase.</para>
- </tip>
-
- <para><emphasis>Expenses</emphasis> refer to money you spend to purchase
- goods or services provided by someone else. In <application>&app;</application>, use an
- <guilabel>Expense</guilabel> type account to track your expenses.</para>
-
- <tip>
- <para>Debits increase expense account balances and credits decrease
- them. (See note later in this chapter.)</para>
- </tip>
-
- <note>
- <para>When you subtract total expenses from total income for a time
- period, you get net income. This net income is then added to the
- balance sheet as retained earnings, which is a type of
- <guilabel>Equity</guilabel> account.</para>
- </note>
-
- <para>Below are the standard <guilabel>Income</guilabel> and
- <guilabel>Expense</guilabel> accounts after selecting <guilabel>Common
- Accounts</guilabel> in the assistant for creating a new Account Hierarchy
- (<menuchoice><guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>New Account
- Hierarchy...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>).</para>
-
- <screenshot id="accts-DefaultIncomeAccounts">
- <mediaobject>
- <imageobject>
- <imagedata fileref="figures/accts_DefaultIncomeAccounts.png"
- format="PNG" srccredit="Cristian Marchi"></imagedata>
- </imageobject>
-
- <textobject>
- <phrase>Default income accounts</phrase>
- </textobject>
-
- <caption>
- <para>This image shows the standard <emphasis>Income</emphasis>
- accounts</para>
- </caption>
- </mediaobject>
- </screenshot>
- <screenshot id="accts-DefaultExpenseAccounts">
- <mediaobject>
- <imageobject>
- <imagedata fileref="figures/accts_DefaultExpenseAccounts.png"
- format="PNG" srccredit="Cristian Marchi" ></imagedata>
- </imageobject>
-
- <textobject>
- <phrase>Some default expense accounts</phrase>
- </textobject>
-
- <caption>
- <para>This image shows some standard <emphasis>Expenses</emphasis>
- accounts</para>
- </caption>
- </mediaobject>
- </screenshot>
- </sect3>
-
- <sect3 id="accts-other-types">
- <title>Other Account Types</title>
-
- <para>There are some special other account types.</para>
-
- <para><emphasis>Trading</emphasis> Multiple currency transactions have
- splits in <quote>Trading</quote> accounts to make the transaction
- balance in each currency as well as in total value. See
- <xref linkend="chapter_currency" /> for more information.
- </para>
-
- <para><emphasis>Money Market</emphasis> and <emphasis>Credit Line
- </emphasis>are used only in the OFX importer, apparently for
- completeness with the specification.
- </para>
- </sect3>
-
- </sect2>
-
- <sect2 id="accts-examples1">
- <title>Putting It All Together</title>
-
- <para>Let’s go through the process of building a common personal finance
- <emphasis>chart of accounts</emphasis> using the information we have
- learned from this chapter. A chart of accounts is simply a new <application>&app;</application>
- file in which you group your accounts to track your finances. In building
- this chart of accounts, the first task is to divide the items you want to
- track into the basic account types of accounting. This is fairly simple,
- let’s go through an example.</para>
-
- <sect3 id="accts-examples-situation2">
- <title>Simple Example</title>
-
- <para>Let us assume you have a checking and a savings account at a bank,
- and are employed and thus receive a paycheck. You have a credit card
- (Visa), and you pay monthly utilities in the form of rent, phone, and
- electricity. Naturally, you also need to buy groceries. For now, we will
- not worry about how much money you have in the bank, how much you owe on
- the credit card, etc. We want to simply build the framework for this
- chart of accounts.</para>
-
- <para>Your <guilabel>assets</guilabel> would be the bank savings and
- checking account. Your <guilabel>liabilities</guilabel> are the credit
- card. Your <guilabel>Equity</guilabel> would be the starting values of
- your bank accounts and credit card (we do not have those amounts yet,
- but we know they exist). You have <guilabel>income</guilabel> in the
- form of a salary, and <guilabel>expenses</guilabel> in the form of
- groceries, rent, electricity, phone, and taxes (Federal, Social
- Security, Medicare) on your salary.</para>
- </sect3>
-
- <sect3 id="accts-examples-toplevel2">
- <title>The Basic Top Level Accounts</title>
-
- <para>Now, you must decide how you want to group these accounts. Most
- likely, you want your <emphasis>Assets</emphasis> grouped together, your <emphasis>Liabilities</emphasis> grouped
- together, your <emphasis>Equity</emphasis> grouped together, your <emphasis>Income</emphasis> grouped together,
- and your <emphasis>Expenses</emphasis> grouped together. This is the most common way of
- building a <application>&app;</application> chart of accounts, and it is highly recommended that
- you always begin this way.</para>
-
- <para>Start with a clean <application>&app;</application> file by selecting
- <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>New File</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menu. The
- <guilabel>New Account Hierarchy Setup</guilabel> assistant will start. Press <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to close
- the assistant as we don’t want to use one of the predefined accounts structure; instead we will build a basic
- starting account structure from scratch. In the empty <application>&app;</application> window select
- <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>New Accounts Page</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menu:
- the <guilabel>Accounts</guilabel> tab will open. Finally select
- <menuchoice><guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>New Account...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.</para>
-
- <para>Now you are ready to build this basic starting account structure</para>
-
- <orderedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Account name <guilabel>Assets</guilabel> (account type
- <guilabel>Asset</guilabel>, parent account <guilabel>New top level
- account</guilabel>)</para>
-
- <screenshot id="accts-CreateAssetsAccounts">
- <mediaobject>
- <imageobject>
- <imagedata fileref="figures/accts_CreateAssetsAccount.png"
- format="PNG" srccredit="Cristian Marchi"></imagedata>
- </imageobject>
-
- <textobject>
- <phrase>Creating an Assets account</phrase>
- </textobject>
-
- <caption>
- <para>This image shows the dialog to create an assets
- account</para>
- </caption>
- </mediaobject>
- </screenshot>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Account name <guilabel>Liabilities</guilabel> (account type
- <guilabel>Liability</guilabel>, parent account <guilabel>New top
- level account</guilabel>)</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Account name <guilabel>Equity</guilabel> (account type
- <guilabel>Equity</guilabel>, parent account <guilabel>New top level
- account</guilabel>)</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Account name <guilabel>Income</guilabel> (account type
- <guilabel>Income</guilabel>, parent account <guilabel>New top level
- account</guilabel>)</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Account name <guilabel>Expenses</guilabel> (account type
- <guilabel>Expenses</guilabel>, parent account <guilabel>New top
- level account</guilabel>)</para>
- </listitem>
- </orderedlist>
-
- <para>When you have created the top-level accounts, the main Account page
- in <application>&app;</application> should look like below.</para>
-
- <screenshot id="accts-toplevel">
- <mediaobject>
- <imageobject>
- <imagedata fileref="figures/accts_toplevel.png" format="PNG"
- srccredit="Cristian Marchi"></imagedata>
- </imageobject>
-
- <textobject>
- <phrase>The Basic Top-level Accounts</phrase>
- </textobject>
-
- <caption>
- <para>This image shows the basic top-level accounts.</para>
- </caption>
- </mediaobject>
- </screenshot>
- </sect3>
-
- <sect3 id="accts-examples-organization2">
- <title>Making Sub-Accounts</title>
-
- <para>You can now add to this basic top-level tree structure by inserting
- some real transaction-holding sub-accounts. Notice that the tax accounts
- are placed within a sub-account named <emphasis>Taxes</emphasis>. You can make sub-accounts
- within sub-accounts. This is typically done with a group of related
- accounts (such as tax accounts in this example).</para>
- <tip>
- <para>Instead of selecting <menuchoice><guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>New Account...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
- from the menu, you can alternatively create a new sub-account of an account by right clicking
- on the main account’s name and selecting the <guilabel>New Account...</guilabel> entry.
- This will open a dialog similar to the one depicted in
- <xref linkend="accts-examples-toplevel2" /> where the new sub-account will be already set as a
- child of the main account.</para>
- </tip>
- <orderedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Account name <guilabel>Cash</guilabel> (account type
- <guilabel>Cash</guilabel>, parent account
- <emphasis>Assets</emphasis>)
- </para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Account name <guilabel>Checking</guilabel> (account type
- <guilabel>Bank</guilabel>, parent account
- <emphasis>Assets</emphasis>)</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Account name <guilabel>Savings</guilabel> (account type
- <guilabel>Bank</guilabel>, parent account
- <emphasis>Assets</emphasis>)</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Account name <guilabel>Visa</guilabel> (account type
- <guilabel>Credit Card</guilabel>, parent account
- <emphasis>Liabilities</emphasis>)</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Account name <guilabel>Salary</guilabel> (account type
- <guilabel>Income</guilabel>, parent account
- <emphasis>Income</emphasis>)</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Account name <guilabel>Phone</guilabel> (account type
- <guilabel>Expense</guilabel>, parent account
- <emphasis>Expenses</emphasis>)</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Account name <guilabel>Electricity</guilabel> (account type
- <guilabel>Expense</guilabel>, parent account
- <emphasis>Expenses</emphasis>)</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Account name <guilabel>Rent</guilabel> (account type
- <guilabel>Expense</guilabel>, parent account
- <emphasis>Expenses</emphasis>)</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Account name <guilabel>Groceries</guilabel> (account type
- <guilabel>Expense</guilabel>, parent account
- <emphasis>Expenses</emphasis>)</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Account name <guilabel>Taxes</guilabel> (account type
- <guilabel>Expense</guilabel>, parent account
- <emphasis>Expenses</emphasis>)</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Account name <guilabel>Federal</guilabel> (account type
- <guilabel>Expense</guilabel>, parent account
- <emphasis>Expenses:Taxes</emphasis>)</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Account name <guilabel>Social Security</guilabel> (account
- type <guilabel>Expense</guilabel>, parent account
- <emphasis>Expenses:Taxes</emphasis>)</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Account name <guilabel>Medicare</guilabel> (account type
- <guilabel>Expense</guilabel>, parent account
- <emphasis>Expenses:Taxes</emphasis>)</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Account name <guilabel>Opening Balance</guilabel> (account
- type <guilabel>Equity</guilabel>, parent account
- <emphasis>Equity</emphasis>)</para>
- </listitem>
- </orderedlist>
-
- <para>After you have created these additional sub-accounts, the end
- result should look like below</para>
-
- <screenshot id="accts-tree">
- <mediaobject>
- <imageobject>
- <imagedata fileref="figures/accts_tree.png" format="PNG"
- srccredit="Cristian Marchi"></imagedata>
- </imageobject>
-
- <textobject>
- <phrase>The Basic Chart of Accounts</phrase>
- </textobject>
-
- <caption>
- <para>This image shows a simple chart of accounts.</para>
- </caption>
- </mediaobject>
- </screenshot>
-
- <para>Save this chart of accounts with the name
- <filename>gcashdata_3</filename>, as well as <filename>gcashdata_3emptyAccts</filename>,
- as we will continue to use them in the later chapters.</para>
-
- <para>You have now created a chart of accounts to track a simple
- household budget. With this basic framework in place, we can now begin
- to populate the accounts with transactions. The next chapter will cover
- this subject in greater detail.</para>
- </sect3>
- </sect2>
-</sect1>
-<sect1 id="chapter_txns">
- <title>Transactions</title>
-
- <para>This chapter will give you the basic information you need to
- understand and use transactions in <application>&app;</application>. Whereas accounts are the
- framework and structure of a chart of accounts, transactions are the data
- which fills each account.</para>
-
- <sect2 id="txns-concepts1">
- <title>Basic Concepts</title>
-
- <para>A <emphasis>transaction</emphasis> in a double entry accounting
- system such as <application>&app;</application> is an exchange between at least 2 accounts. Thus, a
- single transaction must always consist of at least two parts, a <emphasis>from</emphasis> and
- a <emphasis>to</emphasis> account. The <emphasis>from</emphasis> account is transferring value to the <emphasis>to</emphasis> account.
- Accountants call these parts of a transaction <emphasis>Ledger
- Entries</emphasis>. In <application>&app;</application>, they are called
- <emphasis>Splits</emphasis>.</para>
-
- <para>A split identifies the account to which it refers, the
- amount of money specifically moved to or from that account, and
- can contain a few other specific pieces of information if needed.
- <application>&app;</application> supports multiple splits in a
- single transaction, and the splits can move money into or out of
- the involved accounts arbitrarily.</para>
-
- <para>For example, you receive a paycheck and deposit it into your savings
- account at the bank. The <emphasis>transaction</emphasis> that occurs is
- that your bank savings account (an asset) received money from your income
- account. Two accounts are affected, and in this case there is a net
- increase in your equity.</para>
-
- <para>Working with transactions in <application>&app;</application> is performed using what is
- known as the <emphasis>account register</emphasis>. Every account you
- create has an account register. It will appear familiar to you as it looks
- very similar to the log used to track checkbooks.</para>
-
- <para>The account register is explained in the upcoming section,
- <xref linkend="txns-register-oview"/>.</para>
- </sect2>
-
- <sect2 id="txns-register-oview">
- <title>The Account Register</title>
- <para>The <emphasis>account register</emphasis> is the window that allows you to view
- or edit preexisting transactions, or add new transactions for a particular account. To open
- an account register from the Account Tree, double-click the account name, right click the
- account name and select Open Account from the menu, or use the Open button on the toolbar.
- <application>&app;</application> will display the account register window.</para>
-
- <sect3 id="txns-registers-features2">
- <title>Features of the Account Register</title>
-
- <para>The <emphasis>Titlebar</emphasis> of the account register displays the account
- name. Below the <emphasis>Titlebar</emphasis>, the <emphasis>Menubar</emphasis> displays
- the menu items available within the account register, and the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis>
- contains handy buttons that help you work with the account register.</para>
-
- <para>At the bottom left of the register window, <application>&app;</application> displays
- helpful messages as you move about the register. To the right, you can see the current account
- balance and the total of cleared splits.</para>
- </sect3>
- <sect3 id="txns-regstyle1">
- <title>Choosing a Register Style</title>
- <para><application>&app;</application> offers several options for viewing your registers. The
- default style is <guilabel>Basic Ledger</guilabel> mode, which displays
- only the summary of splits affecting the current account. This is the
- style that most closely resembles other popular personal financial
- packages. You can choose a different register style from the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu></menuchoice> menu.
- There are two other view modes:</para>
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para><menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Auto-Split Ledger</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
- style expands the current transaction automatically. As you highlight a
- new transaction in the register, the transaction automatically expands to
- show all splits.</para>
- </listitem>
- <listitem>
- <para><menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Transaction
- Journal</guimenuitem></menuchoice> style shows all splits for all transactions in
- the register, which is more like an accounting journal.</para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para>All styles permit you to view your data in either single-line or
- double-line format. Select <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu>
- <guimenuitem>Double Line</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, and you will see your transaction
- line expand to two register lines. Double-line mode will also display the transaction-level Notes field.</para>
-
- <para>Below are screenshots that demonstrate how the Basic Ledger and Transaction Journal views differ.</para>
- <para>For this example, let’s assume that you have purchased 3 pair of Jeans for
- $1,000, and have recorded the purchase as a split transaction with each pair entered
- on a separate split.</para>
- <para>The below screenshots illustrate the different view modes.</para>
-
- <para>First let’s view the Jeans transaction from your checking account:</para>
-
- <screenshot id="txns-registersplit4">
- <mediaobject>
- <imageobject>
- <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_registersplit4.png" format="PNG"
- srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
- </imageobject>
-
- <textobject>
- <phrase>3 Jeans purchases</phrase>
- </textobject>
-
- <caption><para>
- This image shows one split transaction with 3 Jeans purchases
- </para></caption>
- </mediaobject>
- </screenshot>
-
- <para>Now, let’s open the <emphasis>Expenses:Clothes</emphasis> account, and look at it in Basic view.</para>
-
- <screenshot id="txns-registersplit5">
- <mediaobject>
- <imageobject>
- <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_registersplit5.png" format="PNG"
- srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
- </imageobject>
-
- <textobject>
- <phrase>A jump to the <emphasis>Expenses:Clothes</emphasis> account</phrase>
- </textobject>
-
- <caption><para>This image shows <emphasis>Expenses:Clothes</emphasis> account
- in Basic Ledger mode.</para></caption>
- </mediaobject>
- </screenshot>
- <para>Three entries appear here, but there was only the single split entry in the
- checking account. Further examination shows that each row has a different amount,
- $200, $300, and $500. This demonstrates that each row in this view reflects a single
- split from the original transaction.</para>
-
- <para>Changing to Transaction Journal mode will display only the original split transaction.</para>
-
- <screenshot id="txns-registersplit6">
- <mediaobject>
- <imageobject>
- <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_registersplit6.png" format="PNG"
- srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
- </imageobject>
- <textobject>
- <phrase>A jump to the <emphasis>Expenses:Clothes</emphasis> account</phrase>
- </textobject>
- <caption><para>This image shows <emphasis>Expenses:Clothes</emphasis> account in
- Transaction Journal mode.</para></caption>
- </mediaobject>
- </screenshot>
-
- </sect3>
- <sect3 id="txns-shortcuts1">
- <title>Using Entry Shortcuts</title>
-
- <para><application>&app;</application> provides several time-saving shortcuts for entering your
- data. When you type the first few characters of a description that you
- have used before, the QuickFill feature automatically fills in the rest of
- the transaction as you last entered it. When you type in the first
- characters of an account name in either the <guilabel>Transfer</guilabel>
- field of the transaction line or the <guilabel>Account</guilabel> field of
- the split line, QuickFill will automatically complete the name from your
- account list. It also helps you with entering sub-accounts in these
- fields: simply type the first characters of the parent account name
- followed by a <keycap>:</keycap> (colon) and the first characters of the sub-account name. For
- example, to enter <emphasis>Assets:Checking</emphasis>, you might type
- <userinput>A:C</userinput> and let <application>&app;</application> fill in the rest.</para>
- <warning><para>Because <keycap>:</keycap> is the account separator symbol,
- you can not use it in your account names.</para></warning>
- <tip><para>If you really need the colon in your account names, you can select another symbol by
- <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guisubmenu>Preferences</guisubmenu><guisubmenu>Accounts</guisubmenu>
- <guilabel>Character</guilabel></menuchoice>.</para></tip>
- <para>Register keyboard shortcuts also save you time, and <application>&app;</application> provides
- several of them. In the date field, you can type:</para>
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para><keycap>+</keycap> or <keycap>=</keycap> to increment the date
- and <keycap>-</keycap> or <keycap>_</keycap> to decrement the
- date</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para><keycap>]</keycap> or <keycap>}</keycap> to increment the month
- and <keycap>[</keycap> or <keycap>{</keycap> to decrement the
- month</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para><keycap>M</keycap> or <keycap>m</keycap> to enter the first date
- of the month</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para><keycap>H</keycap> or <keycap>h</keycap> to enter the last date
- of the month</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para><keycap>Y</keycap> or <keycap>y</keycap> to enter the first date
- of the year</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para><keycap>R</keycap> or <keycap>r</keycap> to enter the last date
- of the year</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para><keycap>T</keycap> or <keycap>t</keycap> to enter today’s
- date</para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <tip><para>These date shortcuts not only work in the account register but everywhere
- you can enter a date.</para></tip>
-
- <tip><para>Specifically for dates there's another way you can save time: you can enter
- partial dates. For example if you only enter one number, <application>&app;</application>
- will interpret it as the day in the current month of the current year. If you only enter
- a day and month, <application>&app;</application> will automatically append the year. The
- default this to take such a date in a sliding window starting 11 months before the current
- month. This means that if you enter 1/5 (January 5th) as date while the current date is
- in December 2015, the date will be completed as 1/5/16. This default can be changed via
- <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guisubmenu>Preferences</guisubmenu><guisubmenu>Date/Time</guisubmenu>
- <guilabel>Date Completion</guilabel></menuchoice>. You can change it to either always
- evaluate a date in the current calendar year or change the start of the sliding window.</para></tip>
-
- <para>In the <guilabel>Num</guilabel> field of the transaction line, you
- can type <keycap>+</keycap> to increment the transaction number from the
- last one you typed in. Typing <keycap>-</keycap> will decrement the
- number. This will also work in the <guilabel>Action</guilabel> field of
- the split line, if you choose to enter split numbers there. The
- <guilabel>Action</guilabel> field also supports QuickFill - if you type
- the first characters of a common action (such as
- <guilabel>Deposit</guilabel>), <application>&app;</application> will fill in the rest.</para>
-
- <para>The <guilabel>Transfer</guilabel> field supports QuickFill
- of account names. You can start typing an account name and
- <application>&app;</application> will fill in the remaining part of the name. Typing the
- separator character at any time will complete the current level of
- the account name, leaving the cursor positioned to start the next
- level of account name. For example, typing <keycap>A:C</keycap> the
- standard set of account names will complete to the
- <emphasis>Assets:Checking</emphasis> account. You can also type the
- <keycap>Menu</keycap> or <keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>Down</keycap></keycombo> keys in this
- field to pop up a list of all account names.</para>
-
- <para>In any of the amount fields, you can use a built-in calculator.
- Simply type in the first value, followed by <keycap>+</keycap>,
- <keycap>-</keycap>, <keycap>*</keycap>, or <keycap>/</keycap>, then type
- in the second value. <application>&app;</application> will perform the calculation and return the
- resulting value to the amount field when you press the
- <keycap>Tab</keycap> key.</para>
-
- <para>All of the menu items have access keys defined, and these are marked
- by underlined characters in the menu names. Press <keycap>Alt</keycap> +
- [underlined character] to bring up the menu, then select an item by typing
- its underlined character. For example, typing <keycombo>
- <keycap>Alt</keycap>
-
- <keycap>A</keycap>
- </keycombo> brings up the Actions menu, then typing
- <keycap>P</keycap> will split the transaction. A few of the menu items
- also have shortcut keys that immediately invoke the command (typically
- using the <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> key). These shortcuts are listed next
- to the item.</para>
-
- <para>To move around the register, use these keys to save time:</para>
-
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para><keycap>Tab</keycap> to move to the next field, <keycombo>
- <keycap>Shift</keycap>
-
- <keycap>Tab</keycap>
- </keycombo> to move to the previous field</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para><keycap>Home</keycap> to move to the beginning of the field,
- <keycap>End</keycap> to move to the end of the field</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para><keycap function="enter">Enter</keycap> or <keycap>↓</keycap> to move to the next
- transaction, <keycap>↑</keycap> to move to the previous
- transaction</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para><keycap>Page Up</keycap> to move up one screen, <keycap>Page
- Down</keycap> to move down one screen</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para><keycombo>
- <keycap>Shift</keycap>
-
- <keycap>Page Up</keycap>
- </keycombo> to go to the first transaction, <keycombo>
- <keycap>Shift</keycap>
-
- <keycap>Page Down</keycap>
- </keycombo> to go to the last transaction</para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para>In the <guilabel>Reconcile</guilabel> window you can use these
- keyboard shortcuts:</para>
-
- <itemizedlist> <listitem> <para><keycap>Tab</keycap> moves to the next box and
- <keycombo><keycap>Shift</keycap><keycap>Tab</keycap></keycombo> moves to the previous box</para> </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Space bar toggles the status between reconciled and not
- reconciled</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para><keycap>↑</keycap> and <keycap>↓</keycap> navigate through the
- entries within the current box</para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
- </sect3>
- </sect2>
- <sect2 id="txns-registers-txntypes">
- <title>Simple vs. Split Transactions</title>
-
- <para>Every transaction in <application>&app;</application> has at least two splits, but a transaction can have more than two splits. A transaction with only two splits is called a <emphasis>simple transaction</emphasis>, since it only involves the current account and a single remote account. A transaction with three or more accounts is called a <emphasis>split transaction</emphasis>.</para>
- <para>When the register is in Basic view, you will see a summary of the splits affecting the current account. For a simple transaction, the <guilabel>Transfer</guilabel> column will display the other account from which money is <emphasis>transferred</emphasis>. For a split transaction, the <guilabel>Transfer</guilabel> column will display <guilabel>-- Split Transaction --</guilabel>. You can see the individual splits of each
- transaction by clicking the <guibutton>Split</guibutton> button in the
- <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> while selecting the appropriate transaction.</para>
-
- <para>For split transactions, the first line of the transaction is the
- <emphasis>transaction line</emphasis>. It contains a
- <guilabel>Date</guilabel>, optional <guilabel>Num</guilabel> (such as a
- check number), transaction <guilabel>Description</guilabel>, total
- amount affecting the current account (<guilabel>Tot Deposit</guilabel>
- here), and updated account <guilabel>Balance</guilabel> after the
- current transaction. Note that in the expanded view, the
- <guilabel>Transfer</guilabel> column heading disappears, and there is no
- account name listed in that field. This line shows you only a summary of
- the transaction’s effect on the current account. For more detailed
- information, you need to look at the individual splits that make up the
- transaction.</para>
- <note>
- <para>Note: An account register displays a transaction when that
- transaction has a split assigned to the account. If a given transaction
- has more than one split assigned to the account, then in Basic and
- Auto-Split views, that transaction will appear in the register one
- time for each split assigned to that account. In Transaction Journal
- view, such a transaction will only appear once in the register.</para>
- </note>
-
-<para>The partial lines below the transaction line are the
- <emphasis>split lines</emphasis>, and they are separated by gray lines.
- As you highlight one of the split lines, the column headings change to
- show the split-related fields:</para>
-
-<screenshot id="txns-registersplit2">
- <mediaobject>
- <imageobject>
- <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_registersplit2.png" format="PNG"
- srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
- </imageobject>
-
- <textobject>
- <phrase>How split headings change</phrase>
- </textobject>
-
- <caption><para>This image shows how split headings
- change.</para></caption>
- </mediaobject>
-</screenshot>
-
-<para>Each split contains an optional <guilabel>Action</guilabel>, or
- type of split, which you can either type in or choose from a pull-down
- list. The split also contains an optional <guilabel>Memo</guilabel>
- which describes the split. Each split affects an
- <guilabel>Account</guilabel>, which can be selected from a pull-down
- list of your accounts. The <guilabel>R</guilabel> field indicates
- whether the split has been reconciled. The last two columns show the
- amount of the split and whether money is coming into or going out of the
- account.</para>
-
-<para>As we discussed in <xref linkend="basics-accounting1" />, total
- debits (left-column entries) must equal total credits (right-column
- entries) for each transaction. In the example shown above, the total
- debits equal the total credits, so this transaction is balanced. If you
- notice, the transaction line contains the same debit amount as the
- <guilabel>Checking</guilabel> split line. Why is this shown twice?
- Because the transaction line is merely a <emphasis>summary</emphasis> of
- the transaction’s effect on the current account. The same transaction in
- a different account will have a different transaction line, one that
- shows the effect on that particular account. You can see this by
- highlighting another split line and clicking the
- <guibutton>Jump</guibutton> button on the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis>.</para>
-
-<para>In this example, if you jump to the
- <emphasis>Income:Salary</emphasis> account, <application>&app;</application> brings up the same
- transaction in the <emphasis>Income:Salary</emphasis> - Register:</para>
-
-<screenshot id="txns-registersplit3">
- <mediaobject>
- <imageobject>
- <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_registersplit3.png" format="PNG"
- srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
- </imageobject>
-
- <textobject>
- <phrase>A jump to the <emphasis>Income:Salary</emphasis> account</phrase>
- </textobject>
-
- <caption><para>This image shows a jump to the
- <emphasis>Income:Salary</emphasis> account.</para></caption>
- </mediaobject>
-</screenshot>
-
-<para>Note that the transaction line total now summarizes the effect on
- the <emphasis>Income:Salary</emphasis> account instead of the
- <emphasis>Checking Account</emphasis>, because you are looking at the
- <emphasis>Income:Salary</emphasis> account register. The splits are
- exactly the same, but the transaction line now reflects the credit to
- the <emphasis>Income:Salary</emphasis> account.</para>
-
- <sect3 id="txns-registers-twoaccount2">
- <title>Simple Transaction Example</title>
-
- <para>Starting with the chart of accounts we created in the
- previous chapter <filename>gcashdata_3</filename>, double click on the
- <guilabel>Checking</guilabel> asset account. Let’s add a simple
- transaction to the checking account. When you first create your accounts
- in <application>&app;</application>, it is common to start them off with an initial
- balance.</para>
-
- <para>In the first transaction row, enter a date (eg: March, 1, 2006), a
- description (eg: <quote>Opening Balance</quote>), click on the <guilabel>Transfer</guilabel> pop-up menu
- and select <emphasis>Equity:Opening Balances</emphasis>, add a deposit
- value of $1000, and press the <keycap function="enter">Enter</keycap> key. The account register should now
- appear similar to this figure:</para>
-
- <screenshot id="txns-register-2account">
- <mediaobject>
- <imageobject>
- <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_register_2account.png"
- format="PNG" srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
- </imageobject>
-
- <textobject>
- <phrase>The Checking Account - Register</phrase>
- </textobject>
-
- <caption><para>This image shows <emphasis>Assets:Checking</emphasis> -
- Register after inserting a starting value
- transaction.</para></caption>
- </mediaobject>
- </screenshot>
-
- <para>Setting the starting balances of an account is an example of a
- simple two account transaction. In this case, affecting the
- <emphasis>Assets:Checking</emphasis> and the <emphasis>Equity:Opening Balances</emphasis>
- accounts.</para>
-
- <para>As another example of a simple 2 account transaction, add another
- transaction to describe the purchase of $45.21 worth of groceries. From
- within the <emphasis>Assets:Checking</emphasis> account, you would set
- <guilabel>Transfer</guilabel> to
- <emphasis>Expenses:Groceries</emphasis>. The account register should now
- appear:</para>
-
- <screenshot id="txns-register-2account2">
- <mediaobject>
- <imageobject>
- <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_register_2account2.png"
- format="PNG" srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
- </imageobject>
-
- <textobject>
- <phrase>The Checking Account - Register</phrase>
- </textobject>
-
- <caption><para>This image shows <emphasis>Assets:Checking</emphasis> -
- Register after adding a transaction for
- groceries.</para></caption>
- </mediaobject>
- </screenshot>
- </sect3>
-
- <sect3 id="txns-registers-multiaccount2">
- <title>Split Transaction Example</title>
-
- <para>The need for 3 or more splits in a transaction occurs when you need
- to split either the <quote>from</quote> or the <quote>to</quote> account in a transaction into
- multiple accounts. The classic example of this is when you receive a
- paycheck. Your take home pay from a paycheck will typically be less than
- your net pay, with the difference being due to taxes, retirement account
- payments, and/or other items. Thus, the single transaction of you
- receiving a paycheck involves other accounts besides simply
- <emphasis>Assets:Checking</emphasis> and
- <emphasis>Income:Salary</emphasis>.</para>
- <para>To add the paycheck split transaction from the<emphasis role="italic"> Assets:Checking</emphasis> account register window, click on a new transaction line and click <guilabel>Split</guilabel>. Note that if you have set your register view to Auto-Split or Transaction Journal, the splits will be opened for you. Enter the description of this transaction on the first line(e.g. “Employers R Usâ€). In the split lines below this, enter the various splits that make up this transaction, one by one. To enter the splits, first choose the account, then enter the amount by which to change the account. Keep in mind that when in an asset account register, amounts entered in the left column increase the account balance, while amounts entered in the right column decrease the balance (for more about this, see <xref linkend="basics-transactions2"/>). Tab or click the next split line and repeat the process. Note that if you are using the keyboard to navigate the transaction, use<keycap> Tab</keycap> to move from field to field, as using <keycap>Enter</keycap> will commit the transaction and create splits to an Imbalance account.</para>
- <note>
- <para>When creating a transaction in <application>&app;</application>, splits can be entered in any order.
- However, when the transaction is closed (either when leaving the transaction, or when
- pressing the <keycap function="enter">Enter</keycap> key), all debit splits will jump ahead of all credit splits.</para>
- </note>
-
- <para>In this example, choose the deposit account
- (<emphasis>Assets:Checking</emphasis>) and then enter the amount that
- is being deposited into it (e.g. $670). Follow this by entering the
- amounts for the various taxes:
- <emphasis>Expenses:Taxes:Federal</emphasis> account, $180;
- <emphasis>Expenses:Taxes:Medicare</emphasis> account, $90; and
- <emphasis>Expenses:Taxes:Social Security</emphasis> account, $60. Finally,
- enter the gross total of your paycheck ($1,000 in this example) as a
- withdrawal transfer from <emphasis>Income:Salary</emphasis>.</para>
-
- <para>The final split should look like <xref
- linkend="txns-register-multiaccount"/>. Remember to press <keycap function="enter">Enter</keycap> after finishing the entry. But you
- should also know that when you press <keycap function="enter">Enter</keycap>, the split view will be
- <quote>folded</quote> back into a simplified transaction view. The
- splits are still there; you just have to click
- <guilabel>Split</guilabel> to view them. See <xref
- linkend="txns-registers-features2"/> for details.</para>
-
- <figure id="txns-register-multiaccount">
- <title>Entering a split transaction</title>
- <mediaobject>
- <imageobject>
- <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_register_multiaccount.png"
- format="PNG" srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
- </imageobject>
- <textobject>
- <phrase>Account Register - Split Transaction</phrase>
- </textobject>
- </mediaobject>
- </figure>
- </sect3>
- </sect2>
-
- <sect2 id="txns-reconcile1">
- <title>Reconciliation</title>
-
- <para>Once transactions have been entered into <application>&app;</application>, it is important to verify
- that they agree with the records of your financial institution. This
- verification process is known as <emphasis role="strong">reconciliation</emphasis>, and it is key to determine
- whether your records are accurate. Most commonly, you will check transactions
- against bank statements, although you can use this process to verify any
- transaction.</para>
-
- <para><application>&app;</application> keeps track of the reconciliation status of each
- transaction. The reconciliation status of a transaction is shown by the
- reconciliation <guilabel>R</guilabel> field in a register:
- <emphasis>y</emphasis> indicates that a transaction has been
- reconciled, <emphasis>n</emphasis> indicates that it has not, and <emphasis>c</emphasis> indicates that it has
- been cleared, but not reconciled. A split marked cleared signifies that you got some kind of confirmation
- that the institution accepted the order (e.g. you have the restaurant's receipt for your credit card purchase).
- You can toggle the reconciliation status
- between <emphasis>n</emphasis> and <emphasis>c</emphasis> by clicking in the <guilabel>R</guilabel> field; you can set
- it to <emphasis>y</emphasis> by using <xref linkend="txns-reconcile-window2" />.</para>
-
- <para>At the bottom of the account window, there are (among others) two running
- balances (the <guilabel>cleared</guilabel> and <guilabel>reconciled</guilabel> balance), and the
- <guilabel>total</guilabel> balance. The former balances should correspond to how much money
- the bank thinks you have in your account, while the latter includes outstanding transactions.</para>
-
- <para>For example, when you write a check for something, you should
- enter the transaction into <application>&app;</application>. The reconciliation <guilabel>R</guilabel> field of the
- transaction will initially contain <guilabel>n</guilabel> (new). Your new entry will
- contribute to the <guilabel>total</guilabel> balance, but not to the <guilabel>cleared</guilabel> and
- <guilabel>reconciled</guilabel> balance. Later, if you got some confirmation that the check has been cashed,
- you might click on the transaction’s <guilabel>R</guilabel> field to change it to <emphasis>c</emphasis>
- (cleared). When you do this, the <guilabel>cleared</guilabel> balance will
- change to include this amount. When the bank statement arrives, you can
- then compare it to what you’ve recorded in <application>&app;</application> by opening the reconciliation
- window. There, you will be able to change the <guilabel>R</guilabel> field to <emphasis>y</emphasis> (reconciled).</para>
-
- <note>
- <para>You cannot reconcile directly in a register window by clicking in the <emphasis>R</emphasis> field. You must use the
- reconciliation window. Once a transaction has been marked <emphasis>reconciled</emphasis>,
- it can no longer be easily changed without breaking the
- <link linkend="rec-start-blnc"><guilabel>Starting Balance</guilabel></link> of the next reconciliation.</para>
- </note>
-
- <warning>
- <para>It is important to understand that reconciliation is done for a given
- date, and when you reconcile an account based on a statement from a given date,
- you are reconciling <emphasis role="strong">all transactions prior to that date</emphasis>. Therefore, if you
- add or modify transactions that predate your last reconciliation, your
- <emphasis role="strong">reconciled</emphasis> balances will be thrown off.</para>
- </warning>
-
- <sect3 id="txns-reconcile-window2">
- <title>Reconcile windows</title>
-
- <para>The reconciliation windows are used to reconcile a <application>&app;</application> account
- with a statement that a bank or other institution has sent you.
- Reconciliation is useful not only to double-check your records against
- those of your bank, but also to get a better idea of outstanding
- transactions, e.g. uncashed checks.</para>
-
- <para>To use the reconciliation windows, select an account from the
- account tree and click on <menuchoice><guimenu>Actions</guimenu>
- <guimenuitem>Reconcile</guimenuitem></menuchoice>. A window like the one below will appear in which you can
- enter the reconcile information.</para>
-
- <screenshot id="txns-reconcile-window-1">
- <mediaobject>
- <imageobject role="html">
- <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_reconcile_window1.png"
- format="PNG" srccredit="Cristian Marchi"></imagedata>
- </imageobject>
- <imageobject role="fo">
- <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_reconcile_window1.png"
- format="PNG" srccredit="Cristian Marchi"></imagedata>
- </imageobject>
-
- <textobject>
- <phrase>Reconcile Window</phrase>
- </textobject>
-
- <caption><para>The initial reconcile window.</para></caption>
- </mediaobject>
- </screenshot>
-
- <para>In the initial reconcile window, some <guilabel>Reconcile Information</guilabel> need to be entered.</para>
- <variablelist>
- <varlistentry><term><guilabel>Statement Date</guilabel></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>The date of the statement you will be reconciling against.</para>
- <tip>
- <para>Click on the down arrow in the right of this field to open a calendar</para>
- </tip>
- </listitem>
- </varlistentry>
-
- <varlistentry id="rec-start-blnc"><term><guilabel>Starting Balance</guilabel></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>This is a non-editable item which displays the balance from the previous
- reconciliation. It should match the starting balance in your statement.</para>
-
- <warning><para>Sometimes, the opening balance in <application>&app;</application> does not match
- that found on your statement. This can happen the first time you reconcile your account or
- when a previously-reconciled transaction is de-reconciled or deleted.</para></warning>
-
- <note><para>The first time you reconcile your account, the <guilabel>starting balance</guilabel>
- will be <guilabel>0.00</guilabel>, thus probably not the <emphasis>opening balance</emphasis>
- of your account. When you reconcile the account, the <emphasis>opening balance</emphasis> for the
- account will be included in the reconciliation, and the result should balance.</para></note>
-
- <tip>
- <para>In the case when a previously-reconciled transaction is accidentally de-reconciled, you
- can simply re-reconcile the transaction along with the transactions on the current statement, and
- the result should balance.</para>
-
- <para>The case of accidentally deleting a previously-reconciled transaction presents
- more of a challenge; if you cannot determine what was
- deleted and restore it to the register, you will have to create a dummy
- transaction to get the reconciliation to finish.</para>
- </tip>
- <caution><para>While the latter case does not matter for your private accounting,
- you should have a really good explanation for your auditors, if you are the
- accountant of a club or a company.</para></caution>
- </listitem>
- </varlistentry>
-
- <varlistentry><term><guilabel>Ending Balance</guilabel></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>This field should be filled with the ending balance as it appears in the statement.</para>
- <note>
- <para><application>&app;</application> automatically fills this field with the
- <guilabel>Present</guilabel> balance as shown in the lower part of the
- account’s register.</para>
- </note>
- </listitem>
- </varlistentry>
-
- <varlistentry><term><guilabel>Include Sub-accounts</guilabel></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>Check this option if you want to include in the reconciliation the transactions
- that belongs to the sub-accounts of the currently selected account. Note that all sub-accounts must be in the same commodity as the parent for the option to be enabled.</para>
- </listitem>
- </varlistentry>
-
- <varlistentry><term><guibutton>Enter Interest Payment</guibutton></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>Clicking this button opens a new window that allow you to enter an interest transaction to the account to be
- reconciled.</para>
- <tip>
- <para>The <guilabel>Interest Payment</guilabel> window might be opened automatically when you start a reconciliation
- for an account of the type <emphasis>Bank</emphasis>, <emphasis>Credit</emphasis>,
- <emphasis>Mutual</emphasis>, <emphasis>Asset</emphasis>, <emphasis>Receivable</emphasis>,
- <emphasis>Payable</emphasis>, and <emphasis>Liability</emphasis>. If you want to disable
- this behavior for any of the previous accounts, go to the <guilabel>Register</guilabel> tab of the
- <guilabel>&app; Preferences</guilabel> and uncheck the <guilabel>Automatic interest transfer</guilabel>
- option. Alternatively, to disable this behavior only for the selected account, press the
- <guibutton>No Auto Interest Payments for this Account</guibutton> button in the
- <guilabel>Interest Payment</guilabel> window.</para>
- </tip>
- </listitem>
- </varlistentry>
- </variablelist>
-
- <para>Then, click on the <guibutton>Ok</guibutton> button, and you will see
- the transactions listing reconcile window:</para>
-
- <screenshot id="txns-reconcile-window-2">
- <mediaobject>
- <imageobject role="html">
- <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_reconcile_window2.png"
- format="PNG" srccredit="Cristian Marchi" width="510"></imagedata>
- </imageobject>
- <imageobject role="fo">
- <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_reconcile_window2.png"
- format="PNG" srccredit="Cristian Marchi"></imagedata>
- </imageobject>
-
- <textobject>
- <phrase>Reconcile Window</phrase>
- </textobject>
-
- <caption><para>The transactions listing in the reconcile
- window.</para></caption>
- </mediaobject>
- </screenshot>
-
- <para>The two panes called <guilabel>Funds In</guilabel> and
- <guilabel>Funds Out</guilabel>, lists all the unreconciled transactions that belongs to the account
- that is going to be reconciled.
- The <guilabel>R</guilabel> columns show whether the transactions have been reconciled.</para>
-
- <para>Now, examine each item on the bank statement, and look for the
- matching item in the <guilabel>Reconcile</guilabel> window.</para>
-
- <para>If you cannot find a transaction, then perhaps you forgot to enter it, or did not know that the transaction
- had happened. You can use the <guibutton>New</guibutton> button on the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis>, or the
- <menuchoice><guimenu>Transaction</guimenu><guimenuitem>New</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
- menu item in the menu, to open a register window and enter the missing
- transaction. The new item will appear in the <guilabel>Reconcile</guilabel> window when you
- press the <guibutton>Enter</guibutton> button in the register after entering the transaction.</para>
-
- <para>When you find the item in the <guilabel>Reconcile</guilabel> window, compare the amount
- in the item to the amount on the statement. If they disagree, you may
- have made an error when you entered the transaction in <application>&app;</application>. You can
- use the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> button on the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis>, or the
- <menuchoice><guimenu>Transaction</guimenu><guimenuitem>Edit</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
- item, to open a register window and correct the transaction.</para>
-
- <para>If the amounts agree, click on the item in the <guilabel>Reconcile</guilabel> window.
- A check mark wil appear in the <guilabel>R</guilabel> column aside the selected transaction.
- <application>&app;</application> will automatically update the amounts in the lower right summary pane.</para>
-
- <tip>
- <para>You can use the <keycap>up</keycap>/<keycap>down</keycap> arrow keys to scroll to the item, the
- <keycap>space</keycap> key to mark the item as reconciled and the <keycap>Tab</keycap>
- key to switch panes.</para>
- </tip>
-
- <para>You then repeat this for each item that appears on the bank
- statement, verifying that the amounts match with the amounts in <application>&app;</application>,
- and marking off transactions in <application>&app;</application> as they are reconciled.</para>
-
- <tip>
- <para>You can check or uncheck the reconcile status of all transactions in
- either pane by clicking on a transaction in the required pane then clicking
- <keycap>Ctrl-A</keycap> followed by <keycap>space</keycap>. This will toggle
- the reconcile status of all transactions in the pane to either checked or
- unchecked state. This procedure can be repeated to achieve the desired status
- for the transactions in the pane.</para>
- </tip>
-
- <para>At the bottom of the <guilabel>Reconcile</guilabel> window there is a <guilabel>Difference</guilabel> field,
- which should show <guilabel>0.00</guilabel> when you are done reconciling. If it shows some
- other value, then either you have missed transactions, or some amounts
- may be incorrect in <application>&app;</application>. (Or, less likely, the bank may have made an
- error.)</para>
-
- <note><para>Under some circumstances, it may be difficult or impossible to determine why an account will not reconcile. If you are unable to correct the discrepancy between your books and a statement, <application>&app;</application> includes a <guibutton>Balance</guibutton> button on the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> that will automatically create a balancing entry for you in the amount that cannot be reconciled.</para>
- <para>To use this, carry out the full reconciliation (marking all transactions that you can identify) and then click this button. <application>&app;</application> will create a balancing entry for the remaining discrepancy that uses the <emphasis>Special Accounts:Orphan-XXX</emphasis> account (where "XXX" represents your currency). The Reconcile window will close; re-opening it will allow you to check the newly-created balancing entry and finish the process.</para></note>
-
- <para>When you have marked off all the items on the bank statement and the difference is 0.00, press the <guibutton>Finish</guibutton> button on the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> or
- select <menuchoice><guimenu>Reconcile</guimenu><guimenuitem>Finish</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menu.
- The <guilabel>Reconcile</guilabel> window will close.
- In the register window, the <guilabel>R</guilabel> field of the reconciled transactions will
- change to <emphasis>y</emphasis>.</para>
-
- <para>In this case, we have not received all the information yet, so we
- simply press the <guibutton>Postpone</guibutton> button, so we can continue at
- a later stage. Observe that the <guilabel>R</guilabel> column indicates we cleared (<emphasis>c</emphasis>)
- two transactions. They have not been reconciled yet, but we have
- verified these two transactions so they have been marked as cleared. If
- you look at the <emphasis>Statusbar</emphasis> at the bottom of the account register, you
- will see a summary of what has been reconciled and what has been cleared
- (<guilabel>Cleared:USD 954.79 Reconciled:USD 0.00</guilabel>)</para>
-
- <screenshot id="txns-reconcile-window-3">
- <mediaobject>
- <imageobject>
- <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_reconcile_window3.png"
- format="PNG" srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
- </imageobject>
-
- <textobject>
- <phrase>Checking account</phrase>
- </textobject>
-
- <caption><para>The Checking account after postponing the
- reconciliation.</para></caption>
- </mediaobject>
- </screenshot>
- </sect3>
- </sect2>
-
- <sect2 id="txns-sxn1">
- <title>Scheduled Transactions</title>
-
- <para>Scheduled transactions are made to help entering repetitive money
- operations, like subscriptions, insurances or taxes. By using scheduled
- transactions, you only have to enter the concerned transaction once, set a
- few parameters like start date, frequency and a little description, and
- then <application>&app;</application> will tell you whenever a scheduled transaction is ready to be
- created, and create it for you.</para>
-
- <para>In this howto, we’ll take a monthly Internet subscription of 20 USD
- as example, which is taken on the 28th of each month.</para>
-
- <para>In <application>&app;</application>, there are two ways of creating scheduled transactions,
- <link linkend="txns-sxn-ledger2">from the ledger</link> or from the
- <link linkend="txns-sxn-editor2">Scheduled Transactions Editor</link>.</para>
-
- <sect3 id="txns-sxn-ledger2">
- <title>Creating from the Ledger</title>
-
- <para>Enter the first occurrence of your to-schedule transaction in the
- ledger. In the <guilabel>Transfer</guilabel> field for this transaction, type
- <emphasis>Expenses:Internet</emphasis> as shown in the next screenshot.</para>
-
- <screenshot id="txns-sxn-ledger-1">
- <mediaobject>
- <imageobject>
- <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_sxn_ledger1.png" format="PNG"
- srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
- </imageobject>
-
- <textobject>
- <phrase>Step one creating scheduled transaction from the
- ledger</phrase>
- </textobject>
-
- <caption><para>Step one creating scheduled transaction from the
- ledger</para></caption>
- </mediaobject>
- </screenshot>
-
- <note>
- <para>Since we did not create the <emphasis>Expenses:Internet</emphasis> account, <application>&app;</application>
- will prompt us to create it.</para>
- </note>
-
- <para>Then you right click on your transaction and select
- <guilabel>Schedule...</guilabel></para>
-
- <screenshot id="txns-sxn-ledger-2">
- <mediaobject>
- <imageobject>
- <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_sxn_ledger2.png" format="PNG"
- srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
- </imageobject>
-
- <textobject>
- <phrase>Step two creating scheduled transaction from the
- ledger</phrase>
- </textobject>
-
- <caption><para>Step two creating scheduled transaction from the
- ledger</para></caption>
- </mediaobject>
- </screenshot>
-
- <para>A window like this will appear:</para>
-
- <screenshot id="txns-sxn-ledger-3">
- <mediaobject>
- <imageobject>
- <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_sxn_ledger3.png" format="PNG"
- srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
- </imageobject>
-
- <textobject>
- <phrase>Step three creating scheduled transaction from the
- ledger</phrase>
- </textobject>
-
- <caption><para>Step three creating scheduled transaction from the
- ledger</para></caption>
- </mediaobject>
- </screenshot>
-
- <para>Let’s fill the values, we know that the subscription is taken on
- the 28th each month, and the next one is for next month (since we
- entered the one for this month manually) :</para>
-
- <screenshot id="txns-sxn-ledger-4">
- <mediaobject>
- <imageobject>
- <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_sxn_ledger4.png" format="PNG"
- srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
- </imageobject>
-
- <textobject>
- <phrase>Filling in data to a scheduled transaction</phrase>
- </textobject>
-
- <caption><para>Filling in data to a scheduled
- transaction</para></caption>
- </mediaobject>
- </screenshot>
-
- <para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button, and the transaction will be scheduled.
- <application>&app;</application> now has memorized this scheduled transaction and on the 28th of
- next month, it will pop up a window asking if it should create it (see
- far below for a screenshot of this window).</para>
- </sect3>
-
- <sect3 id="txns-sxn-editor2">
- <title>Creating from the Editor</title>
-
- <para>Another way of entering a scheduled transaction is from the
- <guilabel>Scheduled Transaction Editor</guilabel>, it may be faster if we have several
- scheduled transactions to create at once.</para>
-
- <para>From the main accounts windows, select
- <menuchoice><guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guisubmenu>Scheduled Transactions</guisubmenu>
- <guimenuitem>Scheduled Transaction Editor</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the <emphasis>Menubar</emphasis>.
- A new <guilabel>Scheduled Transactions</guilabel> tab will be opened in the
- current <application>&app;</application> window as shown above:</para>
-
- <screenshot id="txns-sxn-editor-2">
- <mediaobject>
- <imageobject role="html">
- <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_sxn_editor-2.png" format="PNG"
- srccredit="Cristian Marchi" width="510"/>
- </imageobject>
-
- <imageobject role="fo">
- <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_sxn_editor-2.png" format="PNG"
- srccredit="Cristian Marchi"/>
- </imageobject>
-
- <textobject>
- <phrase>Empty <guilabel>Scheduled Transactions</guilabel> tab</phrase>
- </textobject>
-
- <caption><para>Empty <guilabel>Scheduled Transactions</guilabel> tab</para></caption>
- </mediaobject>
- </screenshot>
-
- <para>This tab contains a list, now empty, of all the scheduled
- transactions. Let’s create a new one by clicking on the <guibutton>New</guibutton>
- button in the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis>. A window like the one below will pop up:</para>
-
- <screenshot id="txns-sxn-editor-3-overview">
- <mediaobject>
- <imageobject role="html">
- <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_sxn_editor-3-overview.png" format="PNG"
- srccredit="Cristian Marchi" width="510"/>
- </imageobject>
-
- <imageobject role="fo">
- <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_sxn_editor-3-overview.png" format="PNG"
- srccredit="Cristian Marchi" />
- </imageobject>
-
- <textobject>
- <phrase>
- <guimenuitem>Edit Scheduled Transaction</guimenuitem> window,
- <guilabel>Overview</guilabel> tab</phrase>
- </textobject>
-
- <caption><para><guimenuitem>Edit Scheduled Transaction</guimenuitem>
- window, <guilabel>Overview</guilabel> tab</para></caption>
- </mediaobject>
- </screenshot>
-
- <para>First, let’s enter a name for this new scheduled
- transaction in the top of the window.</para>
- <note>
- <para>This name will only identify the transaction
- in the <guilabel>Edit Scheduled Transaction</guilabel> window,
- it will never appear in the ledger.</para>
- </note>
-
- <para>In the <guilabel>Options</guilabel> pane of the <guilabel>Overview</guilabel>
- tab you have four options:</para>
-
- <variablelist>
- <varlistentry><term><guilabel>Enable</guilabel></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>Sets the status of the scheduled transaction.</para>
- </listitem>
- </varlistentry>
-
- <varlistentry><term><guilabel>Create automatically</guilabel></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>If enabled, will insert this transaction in the
- ledger without asking you before (see below). If needed, you can be advised
- when the transaction is entered by checking the <guilabel>Notify me when created</guilabel>
- option.</para>
- </listitem>
- </varlistentry>
-
- <varlistentry><term><guilabel>Create in advance</guilabel></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>Sets how many days in advance the transaction will be created.</para>
- </listitem>
- </varlistentry>
-
- <varlistentry><term><guilabel>Remind in advance</guilabel></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>Sets how many days in advance a reminder is presented. This
- can be used, for example, when you have to pay something by check, and a reminder
- one week before allows you to send your check before the deadline.</para>
- </listitem>
- </varlistentry>
- </variablelist>
-
- <para>The <guilabel>Occurences</guilabel> pane allows you to tell <application>&app;</application> that
- this scheduled transaction won’t last for ever. For example if you are repaying a loan,
- you can enter the loan end date or the number of occurences left.</para>
-
- <para>Select now the <guilabel>Frequency</guilabel> tab in the <guilabel>Edit Scheduled Transaction</guilabel> window.
- Here you can set the time-related options of the transaction.</para>
-
- <screenshot id="txns-sxn-editor-3-frequency">
- <mediaobject>
- <imageobject role="html">
- <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_sxn_editor-3-frequency.png" format="PNG"
- srccredit="Cristian Marchi" width="510"/>
- </imageobject>
-
- <imageobject role="fo">
- <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_sxn_editor-3-frequency.png" format="PNG"
- srccredit="Cristian Marchi" />
- </imageobject>
-
- <textobject>
- <phrase>
- <guimenuitem>Edit Scheduled Transaction</guimenuitem> window,
- <guilabel>Frequency</guilabel> tab</phrase>
- </textobject>
-
- <caption><para><guimenuitem>Edit Scheduled Transaction</guimenuitem>
- window, <guilabel>Frequency</guilabel> tab</para></caption>
- </mediaobject>
- </screenshot>
-
- <variablelist>
- <varlistentry><term><guilabel>Frequency</guilabel></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>Sets the basic frequency of the transaction, with options for <guilabel>once</guilabel>,
- <guilabel>daily</guilabel>, <guilabel>weekly</guilabel>, <guilabel>semi-monthly</guilabel> and
- <guilabel>monthly</guilabel>.
- In this example, this is set to <guilabel>monthly</guilabel>.</para>
- <note>
- <para>It is possible to set a transaction to occur at intervals <emphasis>other</emphasis> than
- those listed in the <guilabel>Frequency</guilabel> list, by changing the setting in the
- <guilabel>Every</guilabel> control (see below).</para>
- </note>
- </listitem>
- </varlistentry>
-
- <varlistentry><term><guilabel>Start Date</guilabel></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>Sets when the transaction will begin. In the example, this would
- be set to the start of the next month.</para>
- </listitem>
- </varlistentry>
-
- <varlistentry><term><guilabel>Every</guilabel></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>This option allows you to schedule transactions by multiplies of the value in
- <guilabel>Frequency</guilabel>. For example, to create a transaction that runs every 3 weeks, set
- <guilabel>Frequency</guilabel> to <guilabel>Weeks</guilabel> and <guilabel>Every</guilabel> to
- <guilabel>3</guilabel>.</para>
- </listitem>
- </varlistentry>
-
- <varlistentry><term><guilabel>On the</guilabel> and <guilabel>Except on weekends</guilabel></term>
- <listitem>
- <para>Sets the day of the month that the transaction is scheduled, and controls what
- <application>&app;</application> will do when the day occurs on a weekend day.</para>
- </listitem>
- </varlistentry>
- </variablelist>
-
- <note>
- <para>We know that the subscription is taken on the 28th each month, so the <guilabel>Start date</guilabel>
- will be November 1, 2003 (assuming November is the next month), the <guilabel>Frequency</guilabel> will be
- <guilabel>Monthly</guilabel>, it will be taken every month on the 28th. Since in our example the internet
- subscription is automatically taken from the account, we have no need to create it in advance, nor
- give an end date.</para>
- </note>
-
- <para>When the elements on this tab are filled in, <application>&app;</application> will highlights the
- calendar below to indicate when future transactions will be run.</para>
-
- <para>Finally select the <guilabel>Template Transaction</guilabel> tab and enter your transaction
- in the lower part as you would do in the ledger, with the only difference of having no date.</para>
-
- <para>Now, you should have a window like this:</para>
-
- <screenshot id="txns-sxn-editor-3-template">
- <mediaobject>
- <imageobject role="html">
- <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_sxn_editor-3-template.png" format="PNG"
- srccredit="Cristian Marchi" width="510"/>
- </imageobject>
-
- <imageobject role="fo">
- <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_sxn_editor-3-template.png" format="PNG"
- srccredit="Cristian Marchi" />
- </imageobject>
-
- <textobject>
- <phrase><guimenuitem>Edit Scheduled Transaction</guimenuitem>
- window, <guilabel>Template Transaction</guilabel> tab</phrase>
- </textobject>
-
- <caption><para><guimenuitem>Edit Scheduled Transaction</guimenuitem>
- window, <guilabel>Template Transaction</guilabel> tab</para></caption>
- </mediaobject>
- </screenshot>
-
- <para>Remember to click on the <guibutton>Enter</guibutton> icon, to validate and enter the
- transaction.</para>
-
- <para>Now click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>, it takes you to the <guilabel>Scheduled Transactions</guilabel> tab,
- now showing one item in the <guilabel>Transactions</guilabel> list:</para>
-
- <screenshot id="txns-sxn-editor-4">
- <mediaobject>
- <imageobject role="html">
- <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_sxn_editor-4.png" format="PNG"
- srccredit="Cristian Marchi" width="510"/>
- </imageobject>
-
- <imageobject role="fo">
- <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_sxn_editor-4.png" format="PNG"
- srccredit="Cristian Marchi" />
- </imageobject>
-
- <textobject>
- <phrase>Entered scheduled transaction</phrase>
- </textobject>
-
- <caption><para>Entered scheduled transaction</para></caption>
- </mediaobject>
- </screenshot>
-
- <tip>
- <para>If you click in the calendar part on the first day of one month, a
- small window, following your mouse, will show you what is planned for
- this day. To make the small window disappear again, just click in it
- one more time.</para>
- </tip>
-
- <para>You can now close the <guilabel>Scheduled Transaction</guilabel> tab, and
- <guilabel>save</guilabel> your work.</para>
-
- <note>
- <para>What comes below is just an illustration, and is not meant to be
- entered into the <application>&app;</application> database at this stage. As per this example,
- the below dialogs will appear when the scheduled transaction is
- supposed to run.</para>
- </note>
-
- <para>From now on, when <application>&app;</application> is launched and a scheduled
- transaction is scheduled or need to be entered,
- you may see a <guilabel>Since Last Run...</guilabel> window summarizing the scheduled transactions
- operations (<guilabel>Reminder</guilabel>, <guilabel>To-Create</guilabel> etc... a better
- description of each option can be found in the <application>&app;</application> manual):</para>
-
- <screenshot id="txns-sxn-editor-slr">
- <mediaobject>
- <imageobject role="html">
- <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_sxn_editor_slr.png" format="PNG"
- srccredit="Cristian Marchi" width="510"/>
- </imageobject>
-
- <imageobject role="fo">
- <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_sxn_editor_slr.png" format="PNG"
- srccredit="Cristian Marchi" />
- </imageobject>
-
- <textobject>
- <phrase>Scheduled transaction popup reminder</phrase>
- </textobject>
-
- <caption><para>Scheduled transaction popup reminder</para></caption>
- </mediaobject>
- </screenshot>
-
- <para>You can click on the <guilabel>Status</guilabel> column to change
- the scheduled transaction status if needed. Then just click on <guibutton>Ok</guibutton> to
- close the <guilabel>Since Last Run...</guilabel> window and to apply the pending operations.
- Select <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to skip entering in the ledger the pending operations.</para>
-
- <para>If the <guilabel>Status</guilabel> field was set to <guilabel>To-Create</guilabel>,
- then if you take a look in your bank account register, you’ll see the transaction has been created:</para>
-
- <tip>
- <para>If you enable the <guilabel>Review created transactions</guilabel> option in the lower right of the
- <guilabel>Since Last Run...</guilabel> window, <application>&app;</application> will open, after pressing
- <guibutton>Ok</guibutton>, the register tab of each account where the scheduled
- transactions were entered automatically.</para>
- </tip>
-
- <note>
- <para>If you entered the transaction for 28 of April at this stage,
- then please <emphasis>revert back</emphasis> to the last saved <application>&app;</application> file
- by selecting <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Open</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and
- choosing the previously saved <filename>gcashdata_3</filename> <application>&app;</application> file.</para>
- </note>
- </sect3>
- </sect2>
-
- <sect2 id="txns-puttoget1">
- <title>Putting It All Together</title>
-
- <para>In the previous sections of this chapter the concepts and mechanics
- of working with transactions in <application>&app;</application> have been discussed. This section
- will expand upon the chart of accounts initially built in the previous
- chapter, by setting some opening balances, adding transactions and a
- scheduled transaction.</para>
-
- <sect3 id="txns-puttoget-openfile">
- <title>Open <application>&app;</application> file</title>
-
- <para>Start with opening the previous datafile we stored,
- <filename>gcashdata_3emptyAccts</filename>, and store it as
- <filename>gcashdata_4</filename> directly. The main window should look
- something like this:</para>
-
- <screenshot id="txns-puttoget1-Charts">
- <mediaobject>
- <imageobject>
- <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_puttoget_Charts.png" format="PNG"
- srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
- </imageobject>
-
- <textobject>
- <phrase>Starting point for Putting It All Together</phrase>
- </textobject>
-
- <caption><para>This image shows the starting point for this
- section.</para></caption>
- </mediaobject>
- </screenshot>
- </sect3>
-
- <sect3 id="txns-puttoget-open2">
- <title>Opening Balances</title>
-
- <para>As shown earlier in <xref linkend="txns-registers-twoaccount2"/>
- with the <emphasis>Assets:Checking</emphasis>
- account, the starting balances in an account are typically assigned to a
- special account called <emphasis>Equity:Opening Balance</emphasis>. To
- start filling in this chart of account, begin by setting the starting
- balances for the accounts. Assume that there is $1000 in the savings
- account and $500 charged on the credit card.</para>
-
- <orderedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Open the <emphasis>Assets:Savings</emphasis> account register.
- Select <guimenu>View</guimenu> from the menu and check to make sure
- you are in Basic Ledger style. You will view your transactions in
- the other modes later, but for now let’s enter a basic transaction
- using the basic default style.</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>From the <emphasis>Assets:Savings</emphasis> account register
- window, enter a basic 2 account transaction to set your starting
- balance to $1000, transferred from <emphasis>Equity:Opening Balance</emphasis>.
- Remember, basic transactions transfer money from
- a source account to a destination account. Record the transaction
- (press the <keycap function="enter">Enter</keycap> key, or click on
- the <guibutton>Enter</guibutton> icon).</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>From the <emphasis>Assets:Checking</emphasis> account register
- window, enter a basic 2 account transaction to set your starting
- balance to $1000, transferred from <emphasis>Equity:Opening Balance</emphasis>.</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>From the <emphasis>Liabilities:Visa</emphasis> account
- register window, enter a basic 2 account transaction to set your
- starting balance to $500, transferred from <emphasis>Equity:Opening Balance</emphasis>.
- This is done by entering the $500 as a <guilabel>charge</guilabel>
- in the <emphasis>Visa</emphasis> account (or <guilabel>decrease</guilabel> in the <emphasis>Opening Balance</emphasis> account),
- since it is money you borrowed. Record the transaction (press the
- <keycap function="enter">Enter</keycap> key, or click on
- the <guibutton>Enter</guibutton> icon).</para>
- </listitem>
- </orderedlist>
-
- <para>You should now have 3 accounts with opening balances set.
- <emphasis>Assets:Checking</emphasis>,
- <emphasis>Assets:Savings</emphasis>, and
- <emphasis>Liabilities:Visa</emphasis>.</para>
-
- <screenshot id="txns-puttoget1-Charts1">
- <mediaobject>
- <imageobject>
- <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_puttoget_Charts1.png"
- format="PNG" srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
- </imageobject>
-
- <textobject>
- <phrase>Chart accounts after setting opening balance</phrase>
- </textobject>
-
- <caption><para>This image shows the opening
- balances.</para></caption>
- </mediaobject>
- </screenshot>
- </sect3>
-
- <sect3 id="txns-puttoget-add2">
- <title>Additional Transaction Examples</title>
-
- <para>Now add some more transactions to simulate a month’s expenses.
- During the month, $78 is spent on electricity, $45 on phone, and $350 on
- rent. All paid by check. We also spent $45.21 on groceries, received $670
- as salary, and paid our Internet bill this month. Finally, let’s move
- $100 from the savings account to the checking account.</para>
-
- <orderedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Open the <emphasis>Expenses:Electricity</emphasis> account
- register and enter a simple 2 account transaction to pay the $78
- electrical bill at the end of the current month (eg: March 28,
- 2006). Enter a description (eg: Light Company) and the check number
- (eg: 102). The <guilabel>Transfer</guilabel> account should be
- <emphasis>Assets:Checking</emphasis>.</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Open the <emphasis>Assets:Checking</emphasis> account register
- and enter a simple 2 account transaction to pay the $45 phone bill
- at the end of the current month (eg: March 28, 2006). Enter a
- description (eg: Phone Company Name) and the check number (eg: 103).
- The <guilabel>Transfer</guilabel> account should be
- <emphasis>Expenses:Phone</emphasis>. Notice that you can enter
- expense transactions from either the credit side (the expense
- accounts) or the debit side (the asset account).</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Open the <emphasis>Expenses:Rent</emphasis> account register
- and enter a simple 2 account transaction to pay the $350 in rent at
- the end of the current month (eg: March 28, 2006). Enter a
- description (eg: April Rent) and the check number (eg: 104). The
- <guilabel>Transfer</guilabel> account should be
- <emphasis>Assets:Checking</emphasis>.</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Duplicate this transaction using the
- <guibutton>Duplicate</guibutton> button in the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis>. Start by
- clicking on the current rent transaction, and click on the
- <guilabel>Duplicate</guilabel> icon. Enter the transaction date a
- month out in the future (eg: April 28, 2006), and notice the blue
- line separator that <application>&app;</application> uses to separate future transactions
- from current ones. In this way, you can enter transactions before
- they occur.</para>
-
- <para>You could also set up a scheduled transaction to pay your
- rent, since the value of the rent is likely to be constant for the
- foreseeable future. <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>Start by clicking on the current (April 28) rent
- transaction, and click on the <guilabel>Schedule</guilabel>
- icon</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Change to <guilabel>Monthly</guilabel>, change
- description if needed and press <guibutton>OK</guibutton></para>
- </listitem>
- </itemizedlist></para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>To transfer money from your savings account to your checking
- account, open the <emphasis>Assets:Savings</emphasis> account
- register, add a new transaction setting
- the <guilabel>Transfer</guilabel> to <emphasis>Assets:Checking</emphasis> in the amount
- of $100 (date 6 March, 2006).</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>As another example of a simple 2 account transaction, add
- another transaction to describe the purchase of $45.21 worth of
- groceries on 5 of March. From within the <emphasis>Assets:Checking</emphasis> account, you
- would set <guilabel>Transfer</guilabel> to
- <emphasis>Expenses:Groceries</emphasis>. The account register should
- now appear:</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>To add a paycheck transaction from the
- <emphasis>Assets:Checking</emphasis> account register window, click
- on a new transaction line, and click on <guilabel>Split</guilabel>.
- First enter the description of this transaction on the first line
- (eg: <quote>Employers R Us</quote>), as well as the date (14 March). In the
- <quote>split</quote> line below this, enter the deposit into
- <emphasis>Assets:Checking</emphasis> (eg:$670). Follow this with the various tax deposits
- (<emphasis>Assets:Checking</emphasis> (eg: $670),
- <emphasis>Expenses:Taxes:Federal</emphasis> account (eg: $180),
- <emphasis>Expenses:Taxes:Medicare</emphasis> account (eg: $90), and
- <emphasis>Expenses:Taxes:Social Security</emphasis> account (eg: $60)) and
- lastly the gross total of your paycheck (eg: $1000) as a withdrawal
- transfer from <emphasis>Income:Salary</emphasis>.</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>You also need to pay for your Internet subscription of 20 USD on
- the 28th.</para>
- </listitem>
- </orderedlist>
-
- <screenshot id="txns-puttoget2-Charts1">
- <mediaobject>
- <imageobject>
- <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_puttoget_Charts2.png"
- format="PNG" srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
- </imageobject>
-
- <textobject>
- <phrase>Chart accounts after setting all the various
- transactions</phrase>
- </textobject>
-
- <caption><para>This image shows the ending balances after <xref
- linkend="chapter_txns" />.</para></caption>
- </mediaobject>
- </screenshot>
- </sect3>
-
- <sect3 id="txns-puttoget-save">
- <title>Save file</title>
-
- <para>Before we go to the report section, let’s save the <application>&app;</application> data
- file (<filename>gcashdata_4</filename>).</para>
- </sect3>
-
- <sect3 id="txns-puttoget-reports">
- <title>Reports</title>
-
- <para>But only having data available on the computer screen will not
- make your accountant happy, therefore <application>&app;</application> comes with a large number
- of highly customizable reports.</para>
-
-<!-- Add this note when the reports chapter is ready
- <note>
- <para>More details on the reports can be found in <xref linkend="chapter_reports" /></para>
- </note>
--->
-
- <para>Let’s have a look at a <guilabel>Cash Flow</guilabel>, and a
- <guilabel>Transaction</guilabel> Report.</para>
-
- <orderedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para>First let’s have a look at the <guilabel>Cash Flow</guilabel>
- report for the month of March.</para>
-
- <para>Select the cash flow report from <menuchoice><guimenu>Reports</guimenu>
- <guisubmenu>Income & Expense</guisubmenu>
- <guimenuitem>Cash Flow</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.</para>
-
- <screenshot id="txns-puttoget2-Cash">
- <mediaobject>
- <imageobject>
- <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_CashFlow.png" format="PNG"
- srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
- </imageobject>
-
- <textobject>
- <phrase>Cash Flow report for the month of March</phrase>
- </textobject>
-
- <caption><para>This image shows the Cash Flow report after <xref
- linkend="chapter_txns" />.</para></caption>
- </mediaobject>
- </screenshot>
-
- <para>To get this customized report, right click in the report and
- choose <guilabel>Report Options</guilabel>. Then set the time
- period, and specify which accounts you want in the report.</para>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Now let’s have a look at corresponding transaction report for
- the Checking account.</para>
-
- <para>Select the transaction report from <menuchoice><guimenu>Reports</guimenu>
- <guimenuitem>Transaction Report</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.</para>
-
- <screenshot id="txns-puttoget2-TransactionRptChecking">
- <mediaobject>
- <imageobject>
- <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_TransactionRptChecking.png"
- format="PNG" srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
- </imageobject>
-
- <textobject>
- <phrase>Transaction Report for the Checking account during
- March</phrase>
- </textobject>
-
- <caption><para>This image shows the Transaction Report for the
- Checking account during March. </para></caption>
- </mediaobject>
- </screenshot>
- </listitem>
-
- <listitem>
- <para>Now let’s change the transaction report to only show the
- various Expenses accounts.</para>
-
- <screenshot id="txns-puttoget2-TransactionRptExpenses">
- <mediaobject>
- <imageobject>
- <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_TransactionRptExpenses.png"
- format="PNG" srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
- </imageobject>
-
- <textobject>
- <phrase>Transaction Report for the Expenses accounts during
- March</phrase>
- </textobject>
-
- <caption><para>This image shows the Transaction Report for the
- various Expense accounts during March. </para></caption>
- </mediaobject>
- </screenshot>
- </listitem>
- </orderedlist>
- </sect3>
- </sect2>
-</sect1>
-</chapter>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/guide/C/ch_txns.xml b/guide/C/ch_txns.xml
index 711eabe..6e063cb 100644
--- a/guide/C/ch_txns.xml
+++ b/guide/C/ch_txns.xml
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@
Translators:
(translators put your name and email here)
-->
-<chapter id="chapter_txns">
+<sect1 id="chapter_txns">
<title>Transactions</title>
<para>This chapter will give you the basic information you need to
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@
framework and structure of a chart of accounts, transactions are the data
which fills each account.</para>
- <sect1 id="txns-concepts1">
+ <sect2 id="txns-concepts1">
<title>Basic Concepts</title>
<para>A <emphasis>transaction</emphasis> in a double entry accounting
@@ -50,49 +50,64 @@
<para>The account register is explained in the upcoming section,
<xref linkend="txns-register-oview"/>.</para>
- </sect1>
+ </sect2>
- <sect1 id="txns-register-oview">
+ <sect2 id="txns-register-oview">
<title>The Account Register</title>
-
- <para>The <emphasis>account register</emphasis> is the <application>&app;</application> window, which allows you to view or edit preexisting transactions, or add new transactions for a particular account. To open an account register from the Account Tree, double-click the account name, right click the account name and select Open Account from the menu, or use the Open button on the toolbar. <application>&app;</application> will display the account register window.</para>
- <sect2 id="txns-registers-features2">
- <title>Features of the Account Register</title>
-
- <para>The <emphasis>Titlebar</emphasis> of the account register displays the account name. Below the <emphasis>Titlebar</emphasis>, the <emphasis>Menubar</emphasis> displays the menu items available within the account register, and the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> contains handy buttons that help you work with the account register.</para>
-
- <para>At the bottom left of the register window, <application>&app;</application> displays helpful messages as you move about the register. To the right, you can see the current account balance and the total of cleared splits.</para>
- </sect2>
-<sect2 id="txns-regstyle1">
- <title>Choosing a Register Style</title>
-
- <para><application>&app;</application> offers several options for viewing your registers. The
+ <para>The <emphasis>account register</emphasis> is the window that allows you to view
+ or edit preexisting transactions, or add new transactions for a particular account. To open
+ an account register from the Account Tree, double-click the account name, right click the
+ account name and select Open Account from the menu, or use the Open button on the toolbar.
+ <application>&app;</application> will display the account register window.</para>
+
+ <sect3 id="txns-registers-features2">
+ <title>Features of the Account Register</title>
+
+ <para>The <emphasis>Titlebar</emphasis> of the account register displays the account
+ name. Below the <emphasis>Titlebar</emphasis>, the <emphasis>Menubar</emphasis> displays
+ the menu items available within the account register, and the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis>
+ contains handy buttons that help you work with the account register.</para>
+
+ <para>At the bottom left of the register window, <application>&app;</application> displays
+ helpful messages as you move about the register. To the right, you can see the current account
+ balance and the total of cleared splits.</para>
+ </sect3>
+ <sect3 id="txns-regstyle1">
+ <title>Choosing a Register Style</title>
+ <para><application>&app;</application> offers several options for viewing your registers. The
default style is <guilabel>Basic Ledger</guilabel> mode, which displays
only the summary of splits affecting the current account. This is the
style that most closely resembles other popular personal financial
- packages. You can choose a different register style from the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu></menuchoice> menu. There are two other view modes:</para>
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem><para><menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Auto-Split Ledger</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
- style expands the current transaction automatically. As you highlight a
- new transaction in the register, the transaction automatically expands to
- show all splits.</para></listitem>
- <listitem><para><menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Transaction
- Journal</guimenuitem></menuchoice> style shows all splits for all transactions in the register, which is more like an accounting journal.</para></listitem>
- </itemizedlist>
-
- <para>All styles permit you to view your data in either single-line or
+ packages. You can choose a different register style from the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu></menuchoice> menu.
+ There are two other view modes:</para>
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Auto-Split Ledger</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+ style expands the current transaction automatically. As you highlight a
+ new transaction in the register, the transaction automatically expands to
+ show all splits.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Transaction
+ Journal</guimenuitem></menuchoice> style shows all splits for all transactions in
+ the register, which is more like an accounting journal.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>All styles permit you to view your data in either single-line or
double-line format. Select <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu>
- <guimenuitem>Double Line</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, and you will see your transaction
- line expand to two register lines. Double-line mode will also display the transaction-level Notes field.</para>
+ <guimenuitem>Double Line</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, and you will see your transaction
+ line expand to two register lines. Double-line mode will also display the transaction-level Notes field.</para>
- <para>Below are screenshots that demonstrate how the Basic Ledger and Transaction Journal views differ.
- </para>
- <para>For this example, let’s assume that you have purchased 3 pair of Jeans for $1,000, and have recorded the purchase as a split transaction with each pair entered on a separate split.</para>
- <para>The below screenshots illustrate the different view modes.</para>
+ <para>Below are screenshots that demonstrate how the Basic Ledger and Transaction Journal views differ.</para>
+ <para>For this example, let’s assume that you have purchased 3 pair of Jeans for
+ $1,000, and have recorded the purchase as a split transaction with each pair entered
+ on a separate split.</para>
+ <para>The below screenshots illustrate the different view modes.</para>
- <para>First let’s view the Jeans transaction from your checking account:</para>
+ <para>First let’s view the Jeans transaction from your checking account:</para>
- <screenshot id="txns-registersplit4">
+ <screenshot id="txns-registersplit4">
<mediaobject>
<imageobject>
<imagedata fileref="figures/txns_registersplit4.png" format="PNG"
@@ -107,12 +122,12 @@
This image shows one split transaction with 3 Jeans purchases
</para></caption>
</mediaobject>
- </screenshot>
+ </screenshot>
- <para>Now, let's open the <emphasis>Expenses:Clothes</emphasis> account, and look at it in Basic view.</para>
+ <para>Now, let’s open the <emphasis>Expenses:Clothes</emphasis> account, and look at it in Basic view.</para>
-<screenshot id="txns-registersplit5">
- <mediaobject>
+ <screenshot id="txns-registersplit5">
+ <mediaobject>
<imageobject>
<imagedata fileref="figures/txns_registersplit5.png" format="PNG"
srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
@@ -125,30 +140,30 @@
<caption><para>This image shows <emphasis>Expenses:Clothes</emphasis> account
in Basic Ledger mode.</para></caption>
</mediaobject>
- </screenshot>
-<para>Three entries appear here, but there was only the single split entry in the checking account. Further examination shows that each row has a different amount, $200, $300, and $500. This demonstrates that each row in this view reflects a single split from the original transaction.</para>
+ </screenshot>
+ <para>Three entries appear here, but there was only the single split entry in the
+ checking account. Further examination shows that each row has a different amount,
+ $200, $300, and $500. This demonstrates that each row in this view reflects a single
+ split from the original transaction.</para>
- <para>Changing to Transaction Journal mode will display only the original split transaction.</para>
+ <para>Changing to Transaction Journal mode will display only the original split transaction.</para>
- <screenshot id="txns-registersplit6">
+ <screenshot id="txns-registersplit6">
<mediaobject>
<imageobject>
<imagedata fileref="figures/txns_registersplit6.png" format="PNG"
srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
</imageobject>
-
<textobject>
<phrase>A jump to the <emphasis>Expenses:Clothes</emphasis> account</phrase>
</textobject>
-
<caption><para>This image shows <emphasis>Expenses:Clothes</emphasis> account in
Transaction Journal mode.</para></caption>
</mediaobject>
- </screenshot>
+ </screenshot>
-</sect2>
-
-<sect2 id="txns-shortcuts1">
+ </sect3>
+ <sect3 id="txns-shortcuts1">
<title>Using Entry Shortcuts</title>
<para><application>&app;</application> provides several time-saving shortcuts for entering your
@@ -251,8 +266,8 @@
resulting value to the amount field when you press the
<keycap>Tab</keycap> key.</para>
- <para>All of the menu items have access keys defined, and these are marked
- by underlined characters in the menu names. Press <keycap>Alt</keycap> +
+ <para>All of the menu items have access keys defined, and these are marked
+ by underlined characters in the menu names. Press <keycap>Alt</keycap> +
[underlined character] to bring up the menu, then select an item by typing
its underlined character. For example, typing <keycombo>
<keycap>Alt</keycap>
@@ -307,13 +322,8 @@
<para>In the <guilabel>Reconcile</guilabel> window you can use these
keyboard shortcuts:</para>
- <itemizedlist>
- <listitem>
- <para><keycap>Tab</keycap> moves to the next box and
- <keycombo><keycap>Shift</keycap><keycap>Tab</keycap></keycombo>
- moves to the previous
- box</para>
- </listitem>
+ <itemizedlist> <listitem> <para><keycap>Tab</keycap> moves to the next box and
+ <keycombo><keycap>Shift</keycap><keycap>Tab</keycap></keycombo> moves to the previous box</para> </listitem>
<listitem>
<para>Space bar toggles the status between reconciled and not
@@ -325,9 +335,9 @@
entries within the current box</para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
-</sect2>
-</sect1>
- <sect1 id="txns-registers-txntypes">
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
+ <sect2 id="txns-registers-txntypes">
<title>Simple vs. Split Transactions</title>
<para>Every transaction in <application>&app;</application> has at least two splits, but a transaction can have more than two splits. A transaction with only two splits is called a <emphasis>simple transaction</emphasis>, since it only involves the current account and a single remote account. A transaction with three or more accounts is called a <emphasis>split transaction</emphasis>.</para>
@@ -427,7 +437,7 @@
exactly the same, but the transaction line now reflects the credit to
the <emphasis>Income:Salary</emphasis> account.</para>
- <sect2 id="txns-registers-twoaccount2">
+ <sect3 id="txns-registers-twoaccount2">
<title>Simple Transaction Example</title>
<para>Starting with the chart of accounts we created in the
@@ -488,9 +498,9 @@
groceries.</para></caption>
</mediaobject>
</screenshot>
- </sect2>
+ </sect3>
- <sect2 id="txns-registers-multiaccount2">
+ <sect3 id="txns-registers-multiaccount2">
<title>Split Transaction Example</title>
<para>The need for 3 or more splits in a transaction occurs when you need
@@ -539,10 +549,10 @@
</textobject>
</mediaobject>
</figure>
- </sect2>
- </sect1>
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
- <sect1 id="txns-reconcile1">
+ <sect2 id="txns-reconcile1">
<title>Reconciliation</title>
<para>Once transactions have been entered into <application>&app;</application>, it is important to verify
@@ -594,7 +604,7 @@
<emphasis role="strong">reconciled</emphasis> balances will be thrown off.</para>
</warning>
- <sect2 id="txns-reconcile-window2">
+ <sect3 id="txns-reconcile-window2">
<title>Reconcile windows</title>
<para>The reconciliation windows are used to reconcile a <application>&app;</application> account
@@ -812,10 +822,10 @@
reconciliation.</para></caption>
</mediaobject>
</screenshot>
- </sect2>
- </sect1>
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
- <sect1 id="txns-sxn1">
+ <sect2 id="txns-sxn1">
<title>Scheduled Transactions</title>
<para>Scheduled transactions are made to help entering repetitive money
@@ -832,7 +842,7 @@
<link linkend="txns-sxn-ledger2">from the ledger</link> or from the
<link linkend="txns-sxn-editor2">Scheduled Transactions Editor</link>.</para>
- <sect2 id="txns-sxn-ledger2">
+ <sect3 id="txns-sxn-ledger2">
<title>Creating from the Ledger</title>
<para>Enter the first occurrence of your to-schedule transaction in the
@@ -924,9 +934,9 @@
<application>&app;</application> now has memorized this scheduled transaction and on the 28th of
next month, it will pop up a window asking if it should create it (see
far below for a screenshot of this window).</para>
- </sect2>
+ </sect3>
- <sect2 id="txns-sxn-editor2">
+ <sect3 id="txns-sxn-editor2">
<title>Creating from the Editor</title>
<para>Another way of entering a scheduled transaction is from the
@@ -1225,10 +1235,10 @@
by selecting <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Open</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and
choosing the previously saved <filename>gcashdata_3</filename> <application>&app;</application> file.</para>
</note>
- </sect2>
- </sect1>
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
- <sect1 id="txns-puttoget1">
+ <sect2 id="txns-puttoget1">
<title>Putting It All Together</title>
<para>In the previous sections of this chapter the concepts and mechanics
@@ -1237,7 +1247,7 @@
chapter, by setting some opening balances, adding transactions and a
scheduled transaction.</para>
- <sect2 id="txns-puttoget-openfile">
+ <sect3 id="txns-puttoget-openfile">
<title>Open <application>&app;</application> file</title>
<para>Start with opening the previous datafile we stored,
@@ -1260,9 +1270,9 @@
section.</para></caption>
</mediaobject>
</screenshot>
- </sect2>
+ </sect3>
- <sect2 id="txns-puttoget-open2">
+ <sect3 id="txns-puttoget-open2">
<title>Opening Balances</title>
<para>As shown earlier in <xref linkend="txns-registers-twoaccount2"/>
@@ -1330,9 +1340,9 @@
balances.</para></caption>
</mediaobject>
</screenshot>
- </sect2>
+ </sect3>
- <sect2 id="txns-puttoget-add2">
+ <sect3 id="txns-puttoget-add2">
<title>Additional Transaction Examples</title>
<para>Now add some more transactions to simulate a month’s expenses.
@@ -1452,16 +1462,16 @@
linkend="chapter_txns" />.</para></caption>
</mediaobject>
</screenshot>
- </sect2>
+ </sect3>
- <sect2 id="txns-puttoget-save">
+ <sect3 id="txns-puttoget-save">
<title>Save file</title>
<para>Before we go to the report section, let’s save the <application>&app;</application> data
file (<filename>gcashdata_4</filename>).</para>
- </sect2>
+ </sect3>
- <sect2 id="txns-puttoget-reports">
+ <sect3 id="txns-puttoget-reports">
<title>Reports</title>
<para>But only having data available on the computer screen will not
@@ -1554,6 +1564,7 @@
</screenshot>
</listitem>
</orderedlist>
- </sect2>
- </sect1>
-</chapter>
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/guide/C/gnucash-guide.xml b/guide/C/gnucash-guide.xml
index eacb2b4..a3180a2 100644
--- a/guide/C/gnucash-guide.xml
+++ b/guide/C/gnucash-guide.xml
@@ -11,6 +11,8 @@
<!-- List of files: -->
<!ENTITY chapter1 SYSTEM "ch_oview.xml">
<!ENTITY chapter2 SYSTEM "ch_basics.xml">
+<!ENTITY chapter2a SYSTEM "ch_accts.xml">
+<!ENTITY chapter2b SYSTEM "ch_txnss.xml">
<!ENTITY chapter3 SYSTEM "ch_importing.xml">
<!ENTITY chapter4 SYSTEM "ch_configuring.xml">
<!ENTITY chapter5 SYSTEM "ch_cbook.xml">
@@ -493,6 +495,8 @@
<title>Getting Started</title>
&chapter1;
&chapter2;
+&chapter2a;
+&chapter2b;
&chapter3;
&chapter4;
</part>
commit 297f3f4556b75ff20edc01a6f04f7a1f4ea4e9d8
Author: David Thomas <sunfish62 at yahoo.com>
Date: Wed Sep 12 20:44:08 2018 -0400
Bug 796855 Bringing Chapter 3 of Help into Chapter 2 of Guide.
Note: this commit required additional content be created to accommodate links, resulting in the addition of ch_configuring.xml and ch_importing.xml to the documentation source.
diff --git a/guide/C/ch_basics.xml b/guide/C/ch_basics.xml
index 586e0f3..d4e0ffb 100644
--- a/guide/C/ch_basics.xml
+++ b/guide/C/ch_basics.xml
@@ -298,14 +298,145 @@
</sect2> <!-- basics-transactions2 -->
</sect1> <!-- basics-entry1 -->
- <sect1 id="basics-interface1">
- <title>Interface</title>
+ <sect1 id="basics-running-gnucash">
+ <title>Running <application>&app;</application></title>
+ <para><application>&app;</application> can be run from your desktop main menu by selecting the associated menu entry.</para>
+ <para>Alternatively it can be run from a command line prompt with the command <command>gnucash</command>.</para>
+ <para>During start up, <application>&app;</application> will display the
+ Splash Screen, where some information about the program (version number, build, etc.)
+ and the loading process are displayed.</para>
+
+ <sect2 id="basics-welcome-to-gnucash">
+ <title><guilabel>Welcome to &app;</guilabel> dialog</title>
<para>The very first time you open <application>&app;</application>, you will see the
- <guilabel>Welcome to &app;!</guilabel> screen. From there, <application>&app;</application>
- provides other tools to help you easily find what you are looking for.
- Let’s take a look at some of the common screens and screen boxes you will
- see.</para>
+ <guilabel>Welcome to &app;!</guilabel> screen. This dialog includes three choices:</para>
+ <!-- Recommend screen shot here of Welcome to GnuCash! dialog -->
+
+ <itemizedlist id="welcome-screen-options">
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Create a new set of accounts</guilabel> - Runs the
+ <guilabel>New Account Hierarchy Setup</guilabel> assistant (see <xref linkend="basics-acct-hierarchy"/>). Select
+ this option if you want to be assisted in creating a set of accounts.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Import my QIF files</guilabel> - Runs the
+ <guilabel>Import QIF Files</guilabel> assistant (see <xref linkend="importing-qif"/>). Select this option
+ if you already have Quicken files (<filename>.qif</filename> files) and wish
+ to import them into <application>&app;</application>.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Open the new user tutorial</guilabel> -
+ Opens the <application>&app;</application> Tutorial and Concepts Guide. Select this
+ option if you are completely new to <application>&app;</application> and
+ accounting concepts.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>It is possible to access each of these items after you have left this screen,
+ but the <guilabel>Welcome to &app;!</guilabel> screen will not reappear.
+ To create a new set of accounts, see <xref linkend="basics-acct-hierarchy" />. To import
+ QIF files, see <xref linkend="importing-qif" />.</para>
+ </note>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="basics-acct-hierarchy">
+ <title>New Account Hierarchy Setup</title>
+
+ <para>The <emphasis>New Account Hierarchy Setup</emphasis> assistant helps you
+ to create a set of <application>&app;</application> accounts. It will
+ appear if you choose <guibutton>Create a new set of accounts</guibutton>
+ in the <guilabel>Welcome to &app;!</guilabel> menu, or when you select
+ <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>New</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.</para>
+ <para>This assistant will create a new blank <application>&app;</application> file and
+ guide you through the creation of a <emphasis>Chart of Accounts</emphasis>. There are several
+ steps in the assistant, which are outlined below.</para>
+
+ <orderedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The first screen briefly describes what this assistant does. </para>
+ </listitem>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>New Book Options</guilabel> allows you to set different attributes
+ for your file that affect the file as a whole. This screen has four tabs:
+ Accounts, Budgeting, Business, and Counters. These items are explained elsewhere in
+ the Guide, and can be changed at a later point.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Choose Currency</guilabel> sets the default currency for new accounts.
+ This is based on the computer locale settings, and can be modified later in the
+ <guilabel>Accounts</guilabel> tab under <guilabel>Preferences</guilabel>
+ (see <xref linkend="configuring-preferences-accounts"/>).</para>
+ </listitem>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Choose accounts to create</guilabel> allows you to create
+ an initial set of accounts. These can be edited as needed afterward.
+ The screen is divided into three parts.</para>
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The left upper portion has a list of
+ <guilabel>Categories</guilabel> for commonly used hierarchies of
+ accounts. Select from this list the types of accounts you wish to
+ use. You can select as many of the categories of accounts as you
+ wish.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The left lower section has a <guilabel>Category
+ Description</guilabel> that displays a detailed description of the
+ category currently highlighted.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The right side has a list of the <guilabel>Accounts</guilabel>
+ that will be created from a selected category. Note that the accounts
+ listed here are <emphasis>only</emphasis> the selected category; your
+ final data file will include <emphasis>all</emphasis> of the accounts
+ for all of the selected Categories.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Setup selected accounts</guilabel> lists all the accounts you
+ selected on <guilabel>Choose accounts to create</guilabel>, and allows you to
+ enter opening balances and to designate <emphasis>Placeholder</emphasis> accounts.</para>
+ <note>
+ <para>Equity accounts do not have opening balances, so the
+ opening balance value for this kind of account
+ is locked and set to zero.</para>
+ </note>
+ <note id="placeholder-acct">
+ <para><emphasis>Placeholder</emphasis> accounts are used to create a hierarchy of accounts and
+ normally do not have transactions or opening balances.</para>
+ </note>
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The left side of the screen has a list of <guilabel>Account
+ Names</guilabel>. Select an account by "clicking" once in the
+ <guilabel>Account Names</guilabel> column with the account highlighted. This will open
+ the account name for changes.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The right side of the screen has a check-box to make an
+ account a <guilabel>Placeholder</guilabel> and a box to add the
+ <guilabel>Opening Balance</guilabel> for the selected account. Again
+ a single click in the <guilabel>Opening Balance</guilabel> or
+ <guilabel>Placeholder</guilabel> column will
+ open the field for changes.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Finish account setup</guilabel> is the last screen and
+ gives you a final option to cancel the process.</para>
+ <warning>
+ <para>If you choose to cancel, any selections you have made up to
+ this point will be lost.</para>
+ </warning>
+ </listitem>
+ </orderedlist>
+ </sect2>
<sect2 id="basics-tip2">
<title>Tip of the Day</title>
@@ -550,73 +681,6 @@
</sect2>
</sect1>
- <sect1 id="basics-help1">
- <title>Getting Help</title>
-
- <para><application>&app;</application> offers help in many ways. We have already covered the <link linkend="basics-tip2">
- <guilabel>Tip of the Day</guilabel></link> screen that gives you helpful hints
- upon start-up of your <application>&app;</application> session. <application>&app;</application> also offers an extensive
- help manual.</para>
-
- <sect2 id="basics-manual2">
- <title>Help Manual</title>
-
- <para>Once you have opened <application>&app;</application>, you will see the <guilabel>Account
- Tree</guilabel> window <guilabel>Help</guilabel> menu heading, which
- opens the Help manual. The Help manual is organized by topic, and
- you can expand each topic into its subtopics.</para>
-
- <para>Topics are listed on the left side. To select a topic or subtopic,
- click on it, and you should see the text for that topic appear on the
- right. Use the <guibutton>Back</guibutton> and
- <guibutton>Forward</guibutton> buttons to navigate through your topic
- choices, and print any text using the <guibutton>Print</guibutton>
- button.</para>
- </sect2>
-
- <sect2 id="basics-web2">
- <title>Web Access</title>
-
- <para>The <guilabel>&app; Help</guilabel> window also acts as a simple
- web browser, so you can pull up a web site for additional information.
- You can open any web site under this window by clicking the
- <guibutton>Open</guibutton> <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> button and then typing in the URL.
- Use the <guibutton>Back</guibutton>, <guibutton>Forward</guibutton>,
- <guibutton>Reload</guibutton>, <guibutton>Stop</guibutton>, and
- <guibutton>Print</guibutton> buttons as you would in a standard
- browser.</para>
-
- <para>The <ulink
- url="http://www.gnucash.org"><citetitle>&app;</citetitle></ulink> web
- site contains helpful information about the program and about any
- updates to it. It also contains links to the <application>&app;</application> mailing lists for
- developers and users, and you can search the <ulink
- url="https://lists.gnucash.org/cgi-bin/namazu.cgi"><citetitle>archives
- of <application>&app;</application> mailing lists</citetitle></ulink> for discussions on a
- particular topic. If you don’t find the answers you are looking for, you
- can post your question to the <ulink
- url="https://lists.gnucash.org/mailman/listinfo/gnucash-user"><citetitle>&app;
- user list</citetitle></ulink>, and someone on the list will attempt to
- answer you.</para>
-
- <para>The most updated <guilabel>&app; FAQ</guilabel> is also located
- on the <ulink url="http://wiki.gnucash.org/wiki/FAQ"><citetitle>&app;
- FAQ website</citetitle></ulink>, and contains answers to the popular
- questions.</para>
- </sect2>
-
- <sect2 id="basics-topic2">
- <title>Topic Search</title>
-
- <para>The online manual also provides a search function. To search for a
- particular topic, click the <guilabel>Search</guilabel> tab at the
- bottom of the help window and type in your topic in the field provided.
- Click the <guibutton>Search</guibutton> button to complete your search.
- A list of choices should appear in the box below, clicking a choice will
- bring up its text on the right.</para>
- </sect2>
- </sect1>
-
<sect1 id="basics-files1">
<title>Storing your financial data</title>
<sect2 id="basics-files1-overview">
@@ -1451,8 +1515,2236 @@
</mediaobject>
</screenshot>
</listitem>
-
</orderedlist>
+</sect1>
+<sect1 id="chapter_accts">
+ <title>Accounts</title>
+
+ <para>This section discusses some useful concepts for organizing your
+ accounts. Since <application>&app;</application> does not impose any specific account tree layout,
+ you are free to design your account structure in any manner you wish.
+ However, there are a few basic accounting concepts which you will probably
+ want to follow when designing your accounts to maximize their
+ utility.</para>
+
+ <sect2 id="accts-concepts1">
+ <title>Basic Accounting Concepts</title>
+
+ <para>As we saw in the previous chapter, accounting is based on 5 basic
+ account types: <guilabel>Assets</guilabel>,
+ <guilabel>Liabilities</guilabel>, <guilabel>Equity</guilabel>,
+ <guilabel>Income</guilabel> and <guilabel>Expenses</guilabel>. We will now
+ expand on our understanding of these account types, and show how they are
+ represented in <application>&app;</application>. But first, let’s divide them into 2 groups, the
+ balance sheet accounts and the income and expense accounts.
+ As the name says the balance sheet accounts can be summarized in the
+ balance of what you own and owe <emphasis>at a point in the time</emphasis>,
+ while the income and expense accounts can be summarized in the Profit & Loss report,
+ which shows the <emphasis>change of values in a period of time</emphasis> like the economic year </para>
+
+ <para>Let’s have a quick look at the Accounting Equation (<emphasis>Assets
+ - Liabilities = Equity + (Income - Expenses)</emphasis>) again as a
+ reminder, before we go deeper into each account type.</para>
+
+ <screenshot id="accts-AccountRelationships">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject role="html">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/basics_AccountRelationships.png"
+ format="PNG" srccredit="Geert Janssens" ></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <imageobject role="fo">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/basics_AccountRelationships.svg"
+ format="SVG" srccredit="Geert Janssens"
+ contentwidth="4in"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>The basic accounts relationships</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+
+ <caption>
+ <para>A graphical view of the relationship between the 5 basic
+ accounts. Net worth (equity) increases through income and decreases
+ through expenses. The arrows represent the movement of value.</para>
+ </caption>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+
+ <sect3 id="accts-bsa2">
+ <title>Balance Sheet Accounts</title>
+
+ <para>The three so-called <emphasis>Balance Sheet Accounts</emphasis>
+ are <guilabel>Assets</guilabel>, <guilabel>Liabilities</guilabel>, and
+ <guilabel>Equity</guilabel>. Balance Sheet Accounts are used to track
+ the things you own or owe.</para>
+
+ <para><guilabel>Assets</guilabel> is the group of things that you own.
+ Your assets could include a car, cash, a house, stocks, or anything else
+ that has convertible value. Convertible value means that theoretically
+ you could sell the item for cash.</para>
+
+ <para><guilabel>Liabilities</guilabel> is the group of things on which
+ you owe money. Your liabilities could include a car loan, a student
+ loan, a mortgage, your investment margin account, or anything else which
+ you must pay back at some time.</para>
+
+ <para><guilabel>Equity</guilabel> is the same as "net worth." It
+ represents what is left over after you subtract your liabilities from
+ your assets. It can be thought of as the portion of your assets that you
+ own outright, without any debt.</para>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="accts-ie2">
+ <title>Income and Expense Accounts</title>
+
+ <para>The two <guilabel>Income and Expense Accounts</guilabel> are used
+ to increase or decrease the value of your accounts. Thus, while the
+ balance sheet accounts simply <emphasis>track</emphasis> the value of
+ the things you own or owe, income and expense accounts allow you to
+ <emphasis>change</emphasis> the value of these accounts.</para>
+
+ <para><guilabel>Income</guilabel> is the payment you receive for your
+ time, services you provide, or the use of your money. When you receive a
+ paycheck, for example, that check is a payment for labor you provided to
+ an employer. Other examples of income include commissions, tips,
+ dividend income from stocks, and interest income from bank accounts.
+ Income will always increase the value of your Assets and thus your
+ Equity.</para>
+
+ <para><guilabel>Expense</guilabel> refers to money you spend to purchase
+ goods or services provided by someone else
+ <emphasis>for early consumption</emphasis>. Examples of expenses are a
+ meal at a restaurant, rent, groceries, gas for your car, or tickets to
+ see a play. Expenses will always decrease your Equity. If you pay for
+ the expense immediately, you will decrease your Assets, whereas if you
+ pay for the expense on credit you increase your Liabilities.</para>
+<!--
+ Translators:
+ Your language might have a generic term for 'income and expense'.
+ Then you should introduce it here in a separate paragraph
+ and replace 'income and expense' by it in the latter sections of this book.
+-->
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="accts-types1">
+ <title><application>&app;</application> Accounts</title>
+
+ <para>This section will show how the <application>&app;</application> definition of an account fits
+ into the view of the 5 basic accounting types.</para>
+
+ <para>But first, let’s begin with a definition of an
+ <guilabel>account</guilabel> in <application>&app;</application>. A <application>&app;</application>
+ <guilabel>account</guilabel> is an entity which contains other
+ sub-accounts, or that contains <guilabel>transactions</guilabel>. Since an
+ account can contain other accounts, you often see <guilabel>account
+ trees</guilabel> in <application>&app;</application>, in which logically associated accounts are grouped
+ together within a common parent account.</para>
+
+ <para>A <application>&app;</application> account must have a unique name (that you assign) and one
+ of the predefined <application>&app;</application> <quote>account types</quote>. There are a total of 12 account
+ types in <application>&app;</application>. These 12 account types are based on the 5 basic
+ accounting types; the reason there are more <application>&app;</application> account types than
+ basic accounting types is that this allows <application>&app;</application> to perform specialized
+ tracking and handling of certain accounts. There are 6 asset accounts
+ (<emphasis>Cash</emphasis>, <emphasis>Bank</emphasis>,
+ <emphasis>Stock</emphasis>, <emphasis>Mutual Fund</emphasis>,
+ <emphasis>Accounts Receivable</emphasis>, and <emphasis>Other Assets</emphasis>),
+ 3 liability accounts (<emphasis>Credit Card</emphasis>,
+ <emphasis>Accounts Payable</emphasis>, and <emphasis>Liability</emphasis>),
+ 1 equity account (<emphasis>Equity</emphasis>), 1 income account
+ (<emphasis>Income</emphasis>), and 1 expense account
+ (<emphasis>Expenses</emphasis>).</para>
+
+ <para>These <application>&app;</application> account types are presented in more detail
+ below.</para>
+
+ <sect3 id="accts-gc-bsa2">
+ <title>Balance Sheet Accounts</title>
+
+ <para>The first balance sheet account we will examine is
+ <emphasis>Assets</emphasis>, which, as you remember from the previous
+ section, refers to things you own.</para>
+
+ <para>To help you organize your asset accounts and to simplify
+ transaction entry, <application>&app;</application> supports several types of asset
+ accounts:</para>
- </sect1>
-</chapter>
+ <orderedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Cash</guilabel> Use this account to track the money
+ you have on hand, in your wallet, in your piggy bank, under your
+ mattress, or wherever you choose to keep it handy. This is the most
+ <emphasis>liquid</emphasis>, or easily traded, type of asset.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Bank</guilabel> This account is used to track your
+ cash balance that you keep in institutions such as banks, credit
+ unions, savings and loan, or brokerage firms - wherever someone else
+ safeguards your money. This is the second most
+ <emphasis>liquid</emphasis> type of account, because you can easily
+ convert it to cash on hand.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Stock</guilabel> Track your individual stocks and
+ bonds using this type of account. The stock account’s register
+ provides extra columns for entering number of shares and price of
+ your investment. With these types of assets, you may not be able to
+ easily convert them to cash unless you can find a buyer, and you are
+ not guaranteed to get the same amount of cash you paid for
+ them.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Mutual Fund</guilabel> This is similar to the stock
+ account, except that it is used to track funds. Its account register
+ provides the same extra columns for entering share and price
+ information. Funds represent ownership shares of a variety of
+ investments, and like stocks they do not offer any guaranteed cash
+ value.</para>
+
+ <para><application>&app;</application> treats account types Stock and
+ Mutual Fund the same.
+ </para>
+
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Accounts Receivable</guilabel> (A/Receivable) This
+ is typically a business use only account in which you place
+ outstanding debts owed to you. It is considered an asset because you
+ should be able to count on these funds arriving.</para>
+
+ <para>Transactions involving an Accounts Receivable account should not be added,
+ changed or deleted in any way other than by using
+ </para>
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem><para>post/unpost bill/invoice/voucher or</para>
+ </listitem>
+ <listitem><para>process payment</para></listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Asset</guilabel> No matter how diverse they
+ are, <application>&app;</application> handles many other situations
+ easily. The account type <quote>Asset</quote>, covers all assets not
+ listed above.</para>
+
+ <para><application>&app;</application> treats account types Cash,
+ Bank and Asset the same.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Accounts are repositories of information used to track or record
+ the kinds of actions that occur related to the purpose for which the
+ account is established.</para>
+
+ <para>For businesses, activities being tracked and reported are
+ frequently subdivided more finely than what has been considered thus
+ far. For a more developed treatment of the possibilities, please read
+ the descriptions presented in
+ <xref linkend="chapter_other_assets"/> of this Guide.</para>
+
+ <para>For personal finances a person can follow the business groupings
+ or not, as they seem useful to the activities the person is tracking
+ and to the kind of reporting that person needs to have to manage their
+ financial assets. For additional information, consult
+ <xref linkend="chapter_other_assets"/> of this Guide.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </orderedlist>
+
+ <para>The second balance sheet account is
+ <emphasis>Liabilities</emphasis>, which as you recall, refers to what
+ you owe, money you have borrowed and are obligated to pay back some day.
+ These represent the rights of your lenders to obtain repayment from you.
+ Tracking the liability balances lets you know how much debt you have at
+ a given point in time.</para>
+
+ <para><application>&app;</application> offers three liability account types:</para>
+
+ <orderedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Credit Card</guilabel> Use this to track your credit
+ card receipts and reconcile your credit card statements. Credit
+ cards represent a short-term loan that you are obligated to repay to
+ the credit card company. This type of account can also be used for
+ other short-term loans such as a line of credit from your
+ bank.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Accounts Payable</guilabel> (A/Payable) This is
+ typically a business use only account in which you place bills you
+ have yet to pay.
+ </para>
+
+ <para>Transactions involving an Accounts Payable account should not be added,
+ changed or deleted in any way other than by using
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem><para>post/unpost bill/invoice/voucher or</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>process payment</para></listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Liability</guilabel> Use this type of account for
+ all other loans, generally larger long-term loans such as a mortgage
+ or vehicle loan. This account can help you keep track of how much
+ you owe and how much you have already repaid.</para>
+
+ <para><application>&app;</application> treats account types Credit
+ Card and Liability the same.
+ </para>
+
+ </listitem>
+ </orderedlist>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>Liabilities in accounting act in an opposite manner from assets:
+ <emphasis>credits</emphasis> (right-column value entries) increase
+ liability account balances and <emphasis>debits</emphasis>
+ (left-column value entries) decrease them. (See note later in this
+ chapter)</para>
+ </tip>
+
+ <para>The final balance sheet account is <emphasis>Equity</emphasis>,
+ which is synonymous with <quote>net worth</quote>. It represents what is left over
+ after you subtract your liabilities from your assets, so it is the
+ portion of your assets that you own outright, without any debt. In
+ <application>&app;</application>, use this type of account as the source of your opening bank
+ balances, because these balances represent your beginning net
+ worth.</para>
+
+ <para>There is usually only a single <application>&app;</application> equity account, called naturally
+ enough, <guilabel>Equity</guilabel>.
+ For companies, cooperatives etc. you can create a subaccount for each partner.</para>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>In equity accounts, credits increase account balances and debits
+ decrease them. (See note later in this chapter)</para>
+ </tip>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>The accounting equation that links balance-sheet accounts is
+ Assets = Liabilities + Equity or rearranged Assets - Liabilities =
+ Equity. So, in common terms, the <emphasis>things you own</emphasis>
+ minus the <emphasis>things you owe</emphasis> equals your
+ <emphasis>net worth</emphasis>.</para>
+ </note>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="accts-gc-ie2">
+ <title>Income and Expense Accounts</title>
+
+ <para><emphasis>Income</emphasis> is the payment you receive for your
+ time, services you provide, or the use of your money. In <application>&app;</application>, use an
+ <guilabel>Income</guilabel> type account to track these.</para>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>Credits increase income account balances and debits decrease
+ them. As described in <xref linkend="basics-accounting1"></xref>,
+ credits represent money transferred
+ <emphasis>from</emphasis> an account. So in these special income
+ accounts, when you transfer money <emphasis>from</emphasis> (credit)
+ the income account to another account, the balance of the income
+ account <emphasis>increases</emphasis>. For example, when you deposit
+ a paycheck and record the transaction as a transfer from an income
+ account to a bank account, the balances of both accounts
+ increase.</para>
+ </tip>
+
+ <para><emphasis>Expenses</emphasis> refer to money you spend to purchase
+ goods or services provided by someone else. In <application>&app;</application>, use an
+ <guilabel>Expense</guilabel> type account to track your expenses.</para>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>Debits increase expense account balances and credits decrease
+ them. (See note later in this chapter.)</para>
+ </tip>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>When you subtract total expenses from total income for a time
+ period, you get net income. This net income is then added to the
+ balance sheet as retained earnings, which is a type of
+ <guilabel>Equity</guilabel> account.</para>
+ </note>
+
+ <para>Below are the standard <guilabel>Income</guilabel> and
+ <guilabel>Expense</guilabel> accounts after selecting <guilabel>Common
+ Accounts</guilabel> in the assistant for creating a new Account Hierarchy
+ (<menuchoice><guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>New Account
+ Hierarchy...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>).</para>
+
+ <screenshot id="accts-DefaultIncomeAccounts">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject>
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/accts_DefaultIncomeAccounts.png"
+ format="PNG" srccredit="Cristian Marchi"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>Default income accounts</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+
+ <caption>
+ <para>This image shows the standard <emphasis>Income</emphasis>
+ accounts</para>
+ </caption>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+ <screenshot id="accts-DefaultExpenseAccounts">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject>
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/accts_DefaultExpenseAccounts.png"
+ format="PNG" srccredit="Cristian Marchi" ></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>Some default expense accounts</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+
+ <caption>
+ <para>This image shows some standard <emphasis>Expenses</emphasis>
+ accounts</para>
+ </caption>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="accts-other-types">
+ <title>Other Account Types</title>
+
+ <para>There are some special other account types.</para>
+
+ <para><emphasis>Trading</emphasis> Multiple currency transactions have
+ splits in <quote>Trading</quote> accounts to make the transaction
+ balance in each currency as well as in total value. See
+ <xref linkend="chapter_currency" /> for more information.
+ </para>
+
+ <para><emphasis>Money Market</emphasis> and <emphasis>Credit Line
+ </emphasis>are used only in the OFX importer, apparently for
+ completeness with the specification.
+ </para>
+ </sect3>
+
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="accts-examples1">
+ <title>Putting It All Together</title>
+
+ <para>Let’s go through the process of building a common personal finance
+ <emphasis>chart of accounts</emphasis> using the information we have
+ learned from this chapter. A chart of accounts is simply a new <application>&app;</application>
+ file in which you group your accounts to track your finances. In building
+ this chart of accounts, the first task is to divide the items you want to
+ track into the basic account types of accounting. This is fairly simple,
+ let’s go through an example.</para>
+
+ <sect3 id="accts-examples-situation2">
+ <title>Simple Example</title>
+
+ <para>Let us assume you have a checking and a savings account at a bank,
+ and are employed and thus receive a paycheck. You have a credit card
+ (Visa), and you pay monthly utilities in the form of rent, phone, and
+ electricity. Naturally, you also need to buy groceries. For now, we will
+ not worry about how much money you have in the bank, how much you owe on
+ the credit card, etc. We want to simply build the framework for this
+ chart of accounts.</para>
+
+ <para>Your <guilabel>assets</guilabel> would be the bank savings and
+ checking account. Your <guilabel>liabilities</guilabel> are the credit
+ card. Your <guilabel>Equity</guilabel> would be the starting values of
+ your bank accounts and credit card (we do not have those amounts yet,
+ but we know they exist). You have <guilabel>income</guilabel> in the
+ form of a salary, and <guilabel>expenses</guilabel> in the form of
+ groceries, rent, electricity, phone, and taxes (Federal, Social
+ Security, Medicare) on your salary.</para>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="accts-examples-toplevel2">
+ <title>The Basic Top Level Accounts</title>
+
+ <para>Now, you must decide how you want to group these accounts. Most
+ likely, you want your <emphasis>Assets</emphasis> grouped together, your <emphasis>Liabilities</emphasis> grouped
+ together, your <emphasis>Equity</emphasis> grouped together, your <emphasis>Income</emphasis> grouped together,
+ and your <emphasis>Expenses</emphasis> grouped together. This is the most common way of
+ building a <application>&app;</application> chart of accounts, and it is highly recommended that
+ you always begin this way.</para>
+
+ <para>Start with a clean <application>&app;</application> file by selecting
+ <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>New File</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menu. The
+ <guilabel>New Account Hierarchy Setup</guilabel> assistant will start. Press <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to close
+ the assistant as we don’t want to use one of the predefined accounts structure; instead we will build a basic
+ starting account structure from scratch. In the empty <application>&app;</application> window select
+ <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>New Accounts Page</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menu:
+ the <guilabel>Accounts</guilabel> tab will open. Finally select
+ <menuchoice><guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>New Account...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.</para>
+
+ <para>Now you are ready to build this basic starting account structure</para>
+
+ <orderedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Account name <guilabel>Assets</guilabel> (account type
+ <guilabel>Asset</guilabel>, parent account <guilabel>New top level
+ account</guilabel>)</para>
+
+ <screenshot id="accts-CreateAssetsAccounts">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject>
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/accts_CreateAssetsAccount.png"
+ format="PNG" srccredit="Cristian Marchi"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>Creating an Assets account</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+
+ <caption>
+ <para>This image shows the dialog to create an assets
+ account</para>
+ </caption>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Account name <guilabel>Liabilities</guilabel> (account type
+ <guilabel>Liability</guilabel>, parent account <guilabel>New top
+ level account</guilabel>)</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Account name <guilabel>Equity</guilabel> (account type
+ <guilabel>Equity</guilabel>, parent account <guilabel>New top level
+ account</guilabel>)</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Account name <guilabel>Income</guilabel> (account type
+ <guilabel>Income</guilabel>, parent account <guilabel>New top level
+ account</guilabel>)</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Account name <guilabel>Expenses</guilabel> (account type
+ <guilabel>Expenses</guilabel>, parent account <guilabel>New top
+ level account</guilabel>)</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </orderedlist>
+
+ <para>When you have created the top-level accounts, the main Account page
+ in <application>&app;</application> should look like below.</para>
+
+ <screenshot id="accts-toplevel">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject>
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/accts_toplevel.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Cristian Marchi"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>The Basic Top-level Accounts</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+
+ <caption>
+ <para>This image shows the basic top-level accounts.</para>
+ </caption>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="accts-examples-organization2">
+ <title>Making Sub-Accounts</title>
+
+ <para>You can now add to this basic top-level tree structure by inserting
+ some real transaction-holding sub-accounts. Notice that the tax accounts
+ are placed within a sub-account named <emphasis>Taxes</emphasis>. You can make sub-accounts
+ within sub-accounts. This is typically done with a group of related
+ accounts (such as tax accounts in this example).</para>
+ <tip>
+ <para>Instead of selecting <menuchoice><guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guimenuitem>New Account...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+ from the menu, you can alternatively create a new sub-account of an account by right clicking
+ on the main account’s name and selecting the <guilabel>New Account...</guilabel> entry.
+ This will open a dialog similar to the one depicted in
+ <xref linkend="accts-examples-toplevel2" /> where the new sub-account will be already set as a
+ child of the main account.</para>
+ </tip>
+ <orderedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Account name <guilabel>Cash</guilabel> (account type
+ <guilabel>Cash</guilabel>, parent account
+ <emphasis>Assets</emphasis>)
+ </para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Account name <guilabel>Checking</guilabel> (account type
+ <guilabel>Bank</guilabel>, parent account
+ <emphasis>Assets</emphasis>)</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Account name <guilabel>Savings</guilabel> (account type
+ <guilabel>Bank</guilabel>, parent account
+ <emphasis>Assets</emphasis>)</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Account name <guilabel>Visa</guilabel> (account type
+ <guilabel>Credit Card</guilabel>, parent account
+ <emphasis>Liabilities</emphasis>)</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Account name <guilabel>Salary</guilabel> (account type
+ <guilabel>Income</guilabel>, parent account
+ <emphasis>Income</emphasis>)</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Account name <guilabel>Phone</guilabel> (account type
+ <guilabel>Expense</guilabel>, parent account
+ <emphasis>Expenses</emphasis>)</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Account name <guilabel>Electricity</guilabel> (account type
+ <guilabel>Expense</guilabel>, parent account
+ <emphasis>Expenses</emphasis>)</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Account name <guilabel>Rent</guilabel> (account type
+ <guilabel>Expense</guilabel>, parent account
+ <emphasis>Expenses</emphasis>)</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Account name <guilabel>Groceries</guilabel> (account type
+ <guilabel>Expense</guilabel>, parent account
+ <emphasis>Expenses</emphasis>)</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Account name <guilabel>Taxes</guilabel> (account type
+ <guilabel>Expense</guilabel>, parent account
+ <emphasis>Expenses</emphasis>)</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Account name <guilabel>Federal</guilabel> (account type
+ <guilabel>Expense</guilabel>, parent account
+ <emphasis>Expenses:Taxes</emphasis>)</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Account name <guilabel>Social Security</guilabel> (account
+ type <guilabel>Expense</guilabel>, parent account
+ <emphasis>Expenses:Taxes</emphasis>)</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Account name <guilabel>Medicare</guilabel> (account type
+ <guilabel>Expense</guilabel>, parent account
+ <emphasis>Expenses:Taxes</emphasis>)</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Account name <guilabel>Opening Balance</guilabel> (account
+ type <guilabel>Equity</guilabel>, parent account
+ <emphasis>Equity</emphasis>)</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </orderedlist>
+
+ <para>After you have created these additional sub-accounts, the end
+ result should look like below</para>
+
+ <screenshot id="accts-tree">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject>
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/accts_tree.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Cristian Marchi"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>The Basic Chart of Accounts</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+
+ <caption>
+ <para>This image shows a simple chart of accounts.</para>
+ </caption>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+
+ <para>Save this chart of accounts with the name
+ <filename>gcashdata_3</filename>, as well as <filename>gcashdata_3emptyAccts</filename>,
+ as we will continue to use them in the later chapters.</para>
+
+ <para>You have now created a chart of accounts to track a simple
+ household budget. With this basic framework in place, we can now begin
+ to populate the accounts with transactions. The next chapter will cover
+ this subject in greater detail.</para>
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
+</sect1>
+<sect1 id="chapter_txns">
+ <title>Transactions</title>
+
+ <para>This chapter will give you the basic information you need to
+ understand and use transactions in <application>&app;</application>. Whereas accounts are the
+ framework and structure of a chart of accounts, transactions are the data
+ which fills each account.</para>
+
+ <sect2 id="txns-concepts1">
+ <title>Basic Concepts</title>
+
+ <para>A <emphasis>transaction</emphasis> in a double entry accounting
+ system such as <application>&app;</application> is an exchange between at least 2 accounts. Thus, a
+ single transaction must always consist of at least two parts, a <emphasis>from</emphasis> and
+ a <emphasis>to</emphasis> account. The <emphasis>from</emphasis> account is transferring value to the <emphasis>to</emphasis> account.
+ Accountants call these parts of a transaction <emphasis>Ledger
+ Entries</emphasis>. In <application>&app;</application>, they are called
+ <emphasis>Splits</emphasis>.</para>
+
+ <para>A split identifies the account to which it refers, the
+ amount of money specifically moved to or from that account, and
+ can contain a few other specific pieces of information if needed.
+ <application>&app;</application> supports multiple splits in a
+ single transaction, and the splits can move money into or out of
+ the involved accounts arbitrarily.</para>
+
+ <para>For example, you receive a paycheck and deposit it into your savings
+ account at the bank. The <emphasis>transaction</emphasis> that occurs is
+ that your bank savings account (an asset) received money from your income
+ account. Two accounts are affected, and in this case there is a net
+ increase in your equity.</para>
+
+ <para>Working with transactions in <application>&app;</application> is performed using what is
+ known as the <emphasis>account register</emphasis>. Every account you
+ create has an account register. It will appear familiar to you as it looks
+ very similar to the log used to track checkbooks.</para>
+
+ <para>The account register is explained in the upcoming section,
+ <xref linkend="txns-register-oview"/>.</para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="txns-register-oview">
+ <title>The Account Register</title>
+ <para>The <emphasis>account register</emphasis> is the window that allows you to view
+ or edit preexisting transactions, or add new transactions for a particular account. To open
+ an account register from the Account Tree, double-click the account name, right click the
+ account name and select Open Account from the menu, or use the Open button on the toolbar.
+ <application>&app;</application> will display the account register window.</para>
+
+ <sect3 id="txns-registers-features2">
+ <title>Features of the Account Register</title>
+
+ <para>The <emphasis>Titlebar</emphasis> of the account register displays the account
+ name. Below the <emphasis>Titlebar</emphasis>, the <emphasis>Menubar</emphasis> displays
+ the menu items available within the account register, and the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis>
+ contains handy buttons that help you work with the account register.</para>
+
+ <para>At the bottom left of the register window, <application>&app;</application> displays
+ helpful messages as you move about the register. To the right, you can see the current account
+ balance and the total of cleared splits.</para>
+ </sect3>
+ <sect3 id="txns-regstyle1">
+ <title>Choosing a Register Style</title>
+ <para><application>&app;</application> offers several options for viewing your registers. The
+ default style is <guilabel>Basic Ledger</guilabel> mode, which displays
+ only the summary of splits affecting the current account. This is the
+ style that most closely resembles other popular personal financial
+ packages. You can choose a different register style from the <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu></menuchoice> menu.
+ There are two other view modes:</para>
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Auto-Split Ledger</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+ style expands the current transaction automatically. As you highlight a
+ new transaction in the register, the transaction automatically expands to
+ show all splits.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Transaction
+ Journal</guimenuitem></menuchoice> style shows all splits for all transactions in
+ the register, which is more like an accounting journal.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>All styles permit you to view your data in either single-line or
+ double-line format. Select <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu>
+ <guimenuitem>Double Line</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, and you will see your transaction
+ line expand to two register lines. Double-line mode will also display the transaction-level Notes field.</para>
+
+ <para>Below are screenshots that demonstrate how the Basic Ledger and Transaction Journal views differ.</para>
+ <para>For this example, let’s assume that you have purchased 3 pair of Jeans for
+ $1,000, and have recorded the purchase as a split transaction with each pair entered
+ on a separate split.</para>
+ <para>The below screenshots illustrate the different view modes.</para>
+
+ <para>First let’s view the Jeans transaction from your checking account:</para>
+
+ <screenshot id="txns-registersplit4">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject>
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_registersplit4.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>3 Jeans purchases</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+
+ <caption><para>
+ This image shows one split transaction with 3 Jeans purchases
+ </para></caption>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+
+ <para>Now, let’s open the <emphasis>Expenses:Clothes</emphasis> account, and look at it in Basic view.</para>
+
+ <screenshot id="txns-registersplit5">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject>
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_registersplit5.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>A jump to the <emphasis>Expenses:Clothes</emphasis> account</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+
+ <caption><para>This image shows <emphasis>Expenses:Clothes</emphasis> account
+ in Basic Ledger mode.</para></caption>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+ <para>Three entries appear here, but there was only the single split entry in the
+ checking account. Further examination shows that each row has a different amount,
+ $200, $300, and $500. This demonstrates that each row in this view reflects a single
+ split from the original transaction.</para>
+
+ <para>Changing to Transaction Journal mode will display only the original split transaction.</para>
+
+ <screenshot id="txns-registersplit6">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject>
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_registersplit6.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
+ </imageobject>
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>A jump to the <emphasis>Expenses:Clothes</emphasis> account</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+ <caption><para>This image shows <emphasis>Expenses:Clothes</emphasis> account in
+ Transaction Journal mode.</para></caption>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+
+ </sect3>
+ <sect3 id="txns-shortcuts1">
+ <title>Using Entry Shortcuts</title>
+
+ <para><application>&app;</application> provides several time-saving shortcuts for entering your
+ data. When you type the first few characters of a description that you
+ have used before, the QuickFill feature automatically fills in the rest of
+ the transaction as you last entered it. When you type in the first
+ characters of an account name in either the <guilabel>Transfer</guilabel>
+ field of the transaction line or the <guilabel>Account</guilabel> field of
+ the split line, QuickFill will automatically complete the name from your
+ account list. It also helps you with entering sub-accounts in these
+ fields: simply type the first characters of the parent account name
+ followed by a <keycap>:</keycap> (colon) and the first characters of the sub-account name. For
+ example, to enter <emphasis>Assets:Checking</emphasis>, you might type
+ <userinput>A:C</userinput> and let <application>&app;</application> fill in the rest.</para>
+ <warning><para>Because <keycap>:</keycap> is the account separator symbol,
+ you can not use it in your account names.</para></warning>
+ <tip><para>If you really need the colon in your account names, you can select another symbol by
+ <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guisubmenu>Preferences</guisubmenu><guisubmenu>Accounts</guisubmenu>
+ <guilabel>Character</guilabel></menuchoice>.</para></tip>
+ <para>Register keyboard shortcuts also save you time, and <application>&app;</application> provides
+ several of them. In the date field, you can type:</para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><keycap>+</keycap> or <keycap>=</keycap> to increment the date
+ and <keycap>-</keycap> or <keycap>_</keycap> to decrement the
+ date</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><keycap>]</keycap> or <keycap>}</keycap> to increment the month
+ and <keycap>[</keycap> or <keycap>{</keycap> to decrement the
+ month</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><keycap>M</keycap> or <keycap>m</keycap> to enter the first date
+ of the month</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><keycap>H</keycap> or <keycap>h</keycap> to enter the last date
+ of the month</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><keycap>Y</keycap> or <keycap>y</keycap> to enter the first date
+ of the year</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><keycap>R</keycap> or <keycap>r</keycap> to enter the last date
+ of the year</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><keycap>T</keycap> or <keycap>t</keycap> to enter today’s
+ date</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <tip><para>These date shortcuts not only work in the account register but everywhere
+ you can enter a date.</para></tip>
+
+ <tip><para>Specifically for dates there's another way you can save time: you can enter
+ partial dates. For example if you only enter one number, <application>&app;</application>
+ will interpret it as the day in the current month of the current year. If you only enter
+ a day and month, <application>&app;</application> will automatically append the year. The
+ default this to take such a date in a sliding window starting 11 months before the current
+ month. This means that if you enter 1/5 (January 5th) as date while the current date is
+ in December 2015, the date will be completed as 1/5/16. This default can be changed via
+ <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guisubmenu>Preferences</guisubmenu><guisubmenu>Date/Time</guisubmenu>
+ <guilabel>Date Completion</guilabel></menuchoice>. You can change it to either always
+ evaluate a date in the current calendar year or change the start of the sliding window.</para></tip>
+
+ <para>In the <guilabel>Num</guilabel> field of the transaction line, you
+ can type <keycap>+</keycap> to increment the transaction number from the
+ last one you typed in. Typing <keycap>-</keycap> will decrement the
+ number. This will also work in the <guilabel>Action</guilabel> field of
+ the split line, if you choose to enter split numbers there. The
+ <guilabel>Action</guilabel> field also supports QuickFill - if you type
+ the first characters of a common action (such as
+ <guilabel>Deposit</guilabel>), <application>&app;</application> will fill in the rest.</para>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>Transfer</guilabel> field supports QuickFill
+ of account names. You can start typing an account name and
+ <application>&app;</application> will fill in the remaining part of the name. Typing the
+ separator character at any time will complete the current level of
+ the account name, leaving the cursor positioned to start the next
+ level of account name. For example, typing <keycap>A:C</keycap> the
+ standard set of account names will complete to the
+ <emphasis>Assets:Checking</emphasis> account. You can also type the
+ <keycap>Menu</keycap> or <keycombo><keycap>Ctrl</keycap><keycap>Down</keycap></keycombo> keys in this
+ field to pop up a list of all account names.</para>
+
+ <para>In any of the amount fields, you can use a built-in calculator.
+ Simply type in the first value, followed by <keycap>+</keycap>,
+ <keycap>-</keycap>, <keycap>*</keycap>, or <keycap>/</keycap>, then type
+ in the second value. <application>&app;</application> will perform the calculation and return the
+ resulting value to the amount field when you press the
+ <keycap>Tab</keycap> key.</para>
+
+ <para>All of the menu items have access keys defined, and these are marked
+ by underlined characters in the menu names. Press <keycap>Alt</keycap> +
+ [underlined character] to bring up the menu, then select an item by typing
+ its underlined character. For example, typing <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Alt</keycap>
+
+ <keycap>A</keycap>
+ </keycombo> brings up the Actions menu, then typing
+ <keycap>P</keycap> will split the transaction. A few of the menu items
+ also have shortcut keys that immediately invoke the command (typically
+ using the <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> key). These shortcuts are listed next
+ to the item.</para>
+
+ <para>To move around the register, use these keys to save time:</para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><keycap>Tab</keycap> to move to the next field, <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Shift</keycap>
+
+ <keycap>Tab</keycap>
+ </keycombo> to move to the previous field</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><keycap>Home</keycap> to move to the beginning of the field,
+ <keycap>End</keycap> to move to the end of the field</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><keycap function="enter">Enter</keycap> or <keycap>↓</keycap> to move to the next
+ transaction, <keycap>↑</keycap> to move to the previous
+ transaction</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><keycap>Page Up</keycap> to move up one screen, <keycap>Page
+ Down</keycap> to move down one screen</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><keycombo>
+ <keycap>Shift</keycap>
+
+ <keycap>Page Up</keycap>
+ </keycombo> to go to the first transaction, <keycombo>
+ <keycap>Shift</keycap>
+
+ <keycap>Page Down</keycap>
+ </keycombo> to go to the last transaction</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>In the <guilabel>Reconcile</guilabel> window you can use these
+ keyboard shortcuts:</para>
+
+ <itemizedlist> <listitem> <para><keycap>Tab</keycap> moves to the next box and
+ <keycombo><keycap>Shift</keycap><keycap>Tab</keycap></keycombo> moves to the previous box</para> </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Space bar toggles the status between reconciled and not
+ reconciled</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><keycap>↑</keycap> and <keycap>↓</keycap> navigate through the
+ entries within the current box</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
+ <sect2 id="txns-registers-txntypes">
+ <title>Simple vs. Split Transactions</title>
+
+ <para>Every transaction in <application>&app;</application> has at least two splits, but a transaction can have more than two splits. A transaction with only two splits is called a <emphasis>simple transaction</emphasis>, since it only involves the current account and a single remote account. A transaction with three or more accounts is called a <emphasis>split transaction</emphasis>.</para>
+ <para>When the register is in Basic view, you will see a summary of the splits affecting the current account. For a simple transaction, the <guilabel>Transfer</guilabel> column will display the other account from which money is <emphasis>transferred</emphasis>. For a split transaction, the <guilabel>Transfer</guilabel> column will display <guilabel>-- Split Transaction --</guilabel>. You can see the individual splits of each
+ transaction by clicking the <guibutton>Split</guibutton> button in the
+ <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> while selecting the appropriate transaction.</para>
+
+ <para>For split transactions, the first line of the transaction is the
+ <emphasis>transaction line</emphasis>. It contains a
+ <guilabel>Date</guilabel>, optional <guilabel>Num</guilabel> (such as a
+ check number), transaction <guilabel>Description</guilabel>, total
+ amount affecting the current account (<guilabel>Tot Deposit</guilabel>
+ here), and updated account <guilabel>Balance</guilabel> after the
+ current transaction. Note that in the expanded view, the
+ <guilabel>Transfer</guilabel> column heading disappears, and there is no
+ account name listed in that field. This line shows you only a summary of
+ the transaction’s effect on the current account. For more detailed
+ information, you need to look at the individual splits that make up the
+ transaction.</para>
+ <note>
+ <para>Note: An account register displays a transaction when that
+ transaction has a split assigned to the account. If a given transaction
+ has more than one split assigned to the account, then in Basic and
+ Auto-Split views, that transaction will appear in the register one
+ time for each split assigned to that account. In Transaction Journal
+ view, such a transaction will only appear once in the register.</para>
+ </note>
+
+<para>The partial lines below the transaction line are the
+ <emphasis>split lines</emphasis>, and they are separated by gray lines.
+ As you highlight one of the split lines, the column headings change to
+ show the split-related fields:</para>
+
+<screenshot id="txns-registersplit2">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject>
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_registersplit2.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>How split headings change</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+
+ <caption><para>This image shows how split headings
+ change.</para></caption>
+ </mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>Each split contains an optional <guilabel>Action</guilabel>, or
+ type of split, which you can either type in or choose from a pull-down
+ list. The split also contains an optional <guilabel>Memo</guilabel>
+ which describes the split. Each split affects an
+ <guilabel>Account</guilabel>, which can be selected from a pull-down
+ list of your accounts. The <guilabel>R</guilabel> field indicates
+ whether the split has been reconciled. The last two columns show the
+ amount of the split and whether money is coming into or going out of the
+ account.</para>
+
+<para>As we discussed in <xref linkend="basics-accounting1" />, total
+ debits (left-column entries) must equal total credits (right-column
+ entries) for each transaction. In the example shown above, the total
+ debits equal the total credits, so this transaction is balanced. If you
+ notice, the transaction line contains the same debit amount as the
+ <guilabel>Checking</guilabel> split line. Why is this shown twice?
+ Because the transaction line is merely a <emphasis>summary</emphasis> of
+ the transaction’s effect on the current account. The same transaction in
+ a different account will have a different transaction line, one that
+ shows the effect on that particular account. You can see this by
+ highlighting another split line and clicking the
+ <guibutton>Jump</guibutton> button on the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis>.</para>
+
+<para>In this example, if you jump to the
+ <emphasis>Income:Salary</emphasis> account, <application>&app;</application> brings up the same
+ transaction in the <emphasis>Income:Salary</emphasis> - Register:</para>
+
+<screenshot id="txns-registersplit3">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject>
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_registersplit3.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>A jump to the <emphasis>Income:Salary</emphasis> account</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+
+ <caption><para>This image shows a jump to the
+ <emphasis>Income:Salary</emphasis> account.</para></caption>
+ </mediaobject>
+</screenshot>
+
+<para>Note that the transaction line total now summarizes the effect on
+ the <emphasis>Income:Salary</emphasis> account instead of the
+ <emphasis>Checking Account</emphasis>, because you are looking at the
+ <emphasis>Income:Salary</emphasis> account register. The splits are
+ exactly the same, but the transaction line now reflects the credit to
+ the <emphasis>Income:Salary</emphasis> account.</para>
+
+ <sect3 id="txns-registers-twoaccount2">
+ <title>Simple Transaction Example</title>
+
+ <para>Starting with the chart of accounts we created in the
+ previous chapter <filename>gcashdata_3</filename>, double click on the
+ <guilabel>Checking</guilabel> asset account. Let’s add a simple
+ transaction to the checking account. When you first create your accounts
+ in <application>&app;</application>, it is common to start them off with an initial
+ balance.</para>
+
+ <para>In the first transaction row, enter a date (eg: March, 1, 2006), a
+ description (eg: <quote>Opening Balance</quote>), click on the <guilabel>Transfer</guilabel> pop-up menu
+ and select <emphasis>Equity:Opening Balances</emphasis>, add a deposit
+ value of $1000, and press the <keycap function="enter">Enter</keycap> key. The account register should now
+ appear similar to this figure:</para>
+
+ <screenshot id="txns-register-2account">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject>
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_register_2account.png"
+ format="PNG" srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>The Checking Account - Register</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+
+ <caption><para>This image shows <emphasis>Assets:Checking</emphasis> -
+ Register after inserting a starting value
+ transaction.</para></caption>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+
+ <para>Setting the starting balances of an account is an example of a
+ simple two account transaction. In this case, affecting the
+ <emphasis>Assets:Checking</emphasis> and the <emphasis>Equity:Opening Balances</emphasis>
+ accounts.</para>
+
+ <para>As another example of a simple 2 account transaction, add another
+ transaction to describe the purchase of $45.21 worth of groceries. From
+ within the <emphasis>Assets:Checking</emphasis> account, you would set
+ <guilabel>Transfer</guilabel> to
+ <emphasis>Expenses:Groceries</emphasis>. The account register should now
+ appear:</para>
+
+ <screenshot id="txns-register-2account2">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject>
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_register_2account2.png"
+ format="PNG" srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>The Checking Account - Register</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+
+ <caption><para>This image shows <emphasis>Assets:Checking</emphasis> -
+ Register after adding a transaction for
+ groceries.</para></caption>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="txns-registers-multiaccount2">
+ <title>Split Transaction Example</title>
+
+ <para>The need for 3 or more splits in a transaction occurs when you need
+ to split either the <quote>from</quote> or the <quote>to</quote> account in a transaction into
+ multiple accounts. The classic example of this is when you receive a
+ paycheck. Your take home pay from a paycheck will typically be less than
+ your net pay, with the difference being due to taxes, retirement account
+ payments, and/or other items. Thus, the single transaction of you
+ receiving a paycheck involves other accounts besides simply
+ <emphasis>Assets:Checking</emphasis> and
+ <emphasis>Income:Salary</emphasis>.</para>
+ <para>To add the paycheck split transaction from the<emphasis role="italic"> Assets:Checking</emphasis> account register window, click on a new transaction line and click <guilabel>Split</guilabel>. Note that if you have set your register view to Auto-Split or Transaction Journal, the splits will be opened for you. Enter the description of this transaction on the first line(e.g. “Employers R Usâ€). In the split lines below this, enter the various splits that make up this transaction, one by one. To enter the splits, first choose the account, then enter the amount by which to change the account. Keep in mind that when in an asset account register, amounts entered in the left column increase the account balance, while amounts entered in the right column decrease the balance (for more about this, see <xref linkend="basics-transactions2"/>). Tab or click the next split line and repeat the process. Note that if you are using the keyboard to navigate the transaction, use<keycap> Tab</keycap> to move from field to field, as using <keycap>Enter</keycap> will commit the transaction and create splits to an Imbalance account.</para>
+ <note>
+ <para>When creating a transaction in <application>&app;</application>, splits can be entered in any order.
+ However, when the transaction is closed (either when leaving the transaction, or when
+ pressing the <keycap function="enter">Enter</keycap> key), all debit splits will jump ahead of all credit splits.</para>
+ </note>
+
+ <para>In this example, choose the deposit account
+ (<emphasis>Assets:Checking</emphasis>) and then enter the amount that
+ is being deposited into it (e.g. $670). Follow this by entering the
+ amounts for the various taxes:
+ <emphasis>Expenses:Taxes:Federal</emphasis> account, $180;
+ <emphasis>Expenses:Taxes:Medicare</emphasis> account, $90; and
+ <emphasis>Expenses:Taxes:Social Security</emphasis> account, $60. Finally,
+ enter the gross total of your paycheck ($1,000 in this example) as a
+ withdrawal transfer from <emphasis>Income:Salary</emphasis>.</para>
+
+ <para>The final split should look like <xref
+ linkend="txns-register-multiaccount"/>. Remember to press <keycap function="enter">Enter</keycap> after finishing the entry. But you
+ should also know that when you press <keycap function="enter">Enter</keycap>, the split view will be
+ <quote>folded</quote> back into a simplified transaction view. The
+ splits are still there; you just have to click
+ <guilabel>Split</guilabel> to view them. See <xref
+ linkend="txns-registers-features2"/> for details.</para>
+
+ <figure id="txns-register-multiaccount">
+ <title>Entering a split transaction</title>
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject>
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_register_multiaccount.png"
+ format="PNG" srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
+ </imageobject>
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>Account Register - Split Transaction</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </figure>
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="txns-reconcile1">
+ <title>Reconciliation</title>
+
+ <para>Once transactions have been entered into <application>&app;</application>, it is important to verify
+ that they agree with the records of your financial institution. This
+ verification process is known as <emphasis role="strong">reconciliation</emphasis>, and it is key to determine
+ whether your records are accurate. Most commonly, you will check transactions
+ against bank statements, although you can use this process to verify any
+ transaction.</para>
+
+ <para><application>&app;</application> keeps track of the reconciliation status of each
+ transaction. The reconciliation status of a transaction is shown by the
+ reconciliation <guilabel>R</guilabel> field in a register:
+ <emphasis>y</emphasis> indicates that a transaction has been
+ reconciled, <emphasis>n</emphasis> indicates that it has not, and <emphasis>c</emphasis> indicates that it has
+ been cleared, but not reconciled. A split marked cleared signifies that you got some kind of confirmation
+ that the institution accepted the order (e.g. you have the restaurant's receipt for your credit card purchase).
+ You can toggle the reconciliation status
+ between <emphasis>n</emphasis> and <emphasis>c</emphasis> by clicking in the <guilabel>R</guilabel> field; you can set
+ it to <emphasis>y</emphasis> by using <xref linkend="txns-reconcile-window2" />.</para>
+
+ <para>At the bottom of the account window, there are (among others) two running
+ balances (the <guilabel>cleared</guilabel> and <guilabel>reconciled</guilabel> balance), and the
+ <guilabel>total</guilabel> balance. The former balances should correspond to how much money
+ the bank thinks you have in your account, while the latter includes outstanding transactions.</para>
+
+ <para>For example, when you write a check for something, you should
+ enter the transaction into <application>&app;</application>. The reconciliation <guilabel>R</guilabel> field of the
+ transaction will initially contain <guilabel>n</guilabel> (new). Your new entry will
+ contribute to the <guilabel>total</guilabel> balance, but not to the <guilabel>cleared</guilabel> and
+ <guilabel>reconciled</guilabel> balance. Later, if you got some confirmation that the check has been cashed,
+ you might click on the transaction’s <guilabel>R</guilabel> field to change it to <emphasis>c</emphasis>
+ (cleared). When you do this, the <guilabel>cleared</guilabel> balance will
+ change to include this amount. When the bank statement arrives, you can
+ then compare it to what you’ve recorded in <application>&app;</application> by opening the reconciliation
+ window. There, you will be able to change the <guilabel>R</guilabel> field to <emphasis>y</emphasis> (reconciled).</para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>You cannot reconcile directly in a register window by clicking in the <emphasis>R</emphasis> field. You must use the
+ reconciliation window. Once a transaction has been marked <emphasis>reconciled</emphasis>,
+ it can no longer be easily changed without breaking the
+ <link linkend="rec-start-blnc"><guilabel>Starting Balance</guilabel></link> of the next reconciliation.</para>
+ </note>
+
+ <warning>
+ <para>It is important to understand that reconciliation is done for a given
+ date, and when you reconcile an account based on a statement from a given date,
+ you are reconciling <emphasis role="strong">all transactions prior to that date</emphasis>. Therefore, if you
+ add or modify transactions that predate your last reconciliation, your
+ <emphasis role="strong">reconciled</emphasis> balances will be thrown off.</para>
+ </warning>
+
+ <sect3 id="txns-reconcile-window2">
+ <title>Reconcile windows</title>
+
+ <para>The reconciliation windows are used to reconcile a <application>&app;</application> account
+ with a statement that a bank or other institution has sent you.
+ Reconciliation is useful not only to double-check your records against
+ those of your bank, but also to get a better idea of outstanding
+ transactions, e.g. uncashed checks.</para>
+
+ <para>To use the reconciliation windows, select an account from the
+ account tree and click on <menuchoice><guimenu>Actions</guimenu>
+ <guimenuitem>Reconcile</guimenuitem></menuchoice>. A window like the one below will appear in which you can
+ enter the reconcile information.</para>
+
+ <screenshot id="txns-reconcile-window-1">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject role="html">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_reconcile_window1.png"
+ format="PNG" srccredit="Cristian Marchi"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+ <imageobject role="fo">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_reconcile_window1.png"
+ format="PNG" srccredit="Cristian Marchi"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>Reconcile Window</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+
+ <caption><para>The initial reconcile window.</para></caption>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+
+ <para>In the initial reconcile window, some <guilabel>Reconcile Information</guilabel> need to be entered.</para>
+ <variablelist>
+ <varlistentry><term><guilabel>Statement Date</guilabel></term>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The date of the statement you will be reconciling against.</para>
+ <tip>
+ <para>Click on the down arrow in the right of this field to open a calendar</para>
+ </tip>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry id="rec-start-blnc"><term><guilabel>Starting Balance</guilabel></term>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>This is a non-editable item which displays the balance from the previous
+ reconciliation. It should match the starting balance in your statement.</para>
+
+ <warning><para>Sometimes, the opening balance in <application>&app;</application> does not match
+ that found on your statement. This can happen the first time you reconcile your account or
+ when a previously-reconciled transaction is de-reconciled or deleted.</para></warning>
+
+ <note><para>The first time you reconcile your account, the <guilabel>starting balance</guilabel>
+ will be <guilabel>0.00</guilabel>, thus probably not the <emphasis>opening balance</emphasis>
+ of your account. When you reconcile the account, the <emphasis>opening balance</emphasis> for the
+ account will be included in the reconciliation, and the result should balance.</para></note>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>In the case when a previously-reconciled transaction is accidentally de-reconciled, you
+ can simply re-reconcile the transaction along with the transactions on the current statement, and
+ the result should balance.</para>
+
+ <para>The case of accidentally deleting a previously-reconciled transaction presents
+ more of a challenge; if you cannot determine what was
+ deleted and restore it to the register, you will have to create a dummy
+ transaction to get the reconciliation to finish.</para>
+ </tip>
+ <caution><para>While the latter case does not matter for your private accounting,
+ you should have a really good explanation for your auditors, if you are the
+ accountant of a club or a company.</para></caution>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry><term><guilabel>Ending Balance</guilabel></term>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>This field should be filled with the ending balance as it appears in the statement.</para>
+ <note>
+ <para><application>&app;</application> automatically fills this field with the
+ <guilabel>Present</guilabel> balance as shown in the lower part of the
+ account’s register.</para>
+ </note>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry><term><guilabel>Include Sub-accounts</guilabel></term>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Check this option if you want to include in the reconciliation the transactions
+ that belongs to the sub-accounts of the currently selected account. Note that all sub-accounts must be in the same commodity as the parent for the option to be enabled.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry><term><guibutton>Enter Interest Payment</guibutton></term>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Clicking this button opens a new window that allow you to enter an interest transaction to the account to be
+ reconciled.</para>
+ <tip>
+ <para>The <guilabel>Interest Payment</guilabel> window might be opened automatically when you start a reconciliation
+ for an account of the type <emphasis>Bank</emphasis>, <emphasis>Credit</emphasis>,
+ <emphasis>Mutual</emphasis>, <emphasis>Asset</emphasis>, <emphasis>Receivable</emphasis>,
+ <emphasis>Payable</emphasis>, and <emphasis>Liability</emphasis>. If you want to disable
+ this behavior for any of the previous accounts, go to the <guilabel>Register</guilabel> tab of the
+ <guilabel>&app; Preferences</guilabel> and uncheck the <guilabel>Automatic interest transfer</guilabel>
+ option. Alternatively, to disable this behavior only for the selected account, press the
+ <guibutton>No Auto Interest Payments for this Account</guibutton> button in the
+ <guilabel>Interest Payment</guilabel> window.</para>
+ </tip>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ </variablelist>
+
+ <para>Then, click on the <guibutton>Ok</guibutton> button, and you will see
+ the transactions listing reconcile window:</para>
+
+ <screenshot id="txns-reconcile-window-2">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject role="html">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_reconcile_window2.png"
+ format="PNG" srccredit="Cristian Marchi" width="510"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+ <imageobject role="fo">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_reconcile_window2.png"
+ format="PNG" srccredit="Cristian Marchi"></imagedata>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>Reconcile Window</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+
+ <caption><para>The transactions listing in the reconcile
+ window.</para></caption>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+
+ <para>The two panes called <guilabel>Funds In</guilabel> and
+ <guilabel>Funds Out</guilabel>, lists all the unreconciled transactions that belongs to the account
+ that is going to be reconciled.
+ The <guilabel>R</guilabel> columns show whether the transactions have been reconciled.</para>
+
+ <para>Now, examine each item on the bank statement, and look for the
+ matching item in the <guilabel>Reconcile</guilabel> window.</para>
+
+ <para>If you cannot find a transaction, then perhaps you forgot to enter it, or did not know that the transaction
+ had happened. You can use the <guibutton>New</guibutton> button on the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis>, or the
+ <menuchoice><guimenu>Transaction</guimenu><guimenuitem>New</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+ menu item in the menu, to open a register window and enter the missing
+ transaction. The new item will appear in the <guilabel>Reconcile</guilabel> window when you
+ press the <guibutton>Enter</guibutton> button in the register after entering the transaction.</para>
+
+ <para>When you find the item in the <guilabel>Reconcile</guilabel> window, compare the amount
+ in the item to the amount on the statement. If they disagree, you may
+ have made an error when you entered the transaction in <application>&app;</application>. You can
+ use the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> button on the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis>, or the
+ <menuchoice><guimenu>Transaction</guimenu><guimenuitem>Edit</guimenuitem></menuchoice>
+ item, to open a register window and correct the transaction.</para>
+
+ <para>If the amounts agree, click on the item in the <guilabel>Reconcile</guilabel> window.
+ A check mark wil appear in the <guilabel>R</guilabel> column aside the selected transaction.
+ <application>&app;</application> will automatically update the amounts in the lower right summary pane.</para>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>You can use the <keycap>up</keycap>/<keycap>down</keycap> arrow keys to scroll to the item, the
+ <keycap>space</keycap> key to mark the item as reconciled and the <keycap>Tab</keycap>
+ key to switch panes.</para>
+ </tip>
+
+ <para>You then repeat this for each item that appears on the bank
+ statement, verifying that the amounts match with the amounts in <application>&app;</application>,
+ and marking off transactions in <application>&app;</application> as they are reconciled.</para>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>You can check or uncheck the reconcile status of all transactions in
+ either pane by clicking on a transaction in the required pane then clicking
+ <keycap>Ctrl-A</keycap> followed by <keycap>space</keycap>. This will toggle
+ the reconcile status of all transactions in the pane to either checked or
+ unchecked state. This procedure can be repeated to achieve the desired status
+ for the transactions in the pane.</para>
+ </tip>
+
+ <para>At the bottom of the <guilabel>Reconcile</guilabel> window there is a <guilabel>Difference</guilabel> field,
+ which should show <guilabel>0.00</guilabel> when you are done reconciling. If it shows some
+ other value, then either you have missed transactions, or some amounts
+ may be incorrect in <application>&app;</application>. (Or, less likely, the bank may have made an
+ error.)</para>
+
+ <note><para>Under some circumstances, it may be difficult or impossible to determine why an account will not reconcile. If you are unable to correct the discrepancy between your books and a statement, <application>&app;</application> includes a <guibutton>Balance</guibutton> button on the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> that will automatically create a balancing entry for you in the amount that cannot be reconciled.</para>
+ <para>To use this, carry out the full reconciliation (marking all transactions that you can identify) and then click this button. <application>&app;</application> will create a balancing entry for the remaining discrepancy that uses the <emphasis>Special Accounts:Orphan-XXX</emphasis> account (where "XXX" represents your currency). The Reconcile window will close; re-opening it will allow you to check the newly-created balancing entry and finish the process.</para></note>
+
+ <para>When you have marked off all the items on the bank statement and the difference is 0.00, press the <guibutton>Finish</guibutton> button on the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> or
+ select <menuchoice><guimenu>Reconcile</guimenu><guimenuitem>Finish</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menu.
+ The <guilabel>Reconcile</guilabel> window will close.
+ In the register window, the <guilabel>R</guilabel> field of the reconciled transactions will
+ change to <emphasis>y</emphasis>.</para>
+
+ <para>In this case, we have not received all the information yet, so we
+ simply press the <guibutton>Postpone</guibutton> button, so we can continue at
+ a later stage. Observe that the <guilabel>R</guilabel> column indicates we cleared (<emphasis>c</emphasis>)
+ two transactions. They have not been reconciled yet, but we have
+ verified these two transactions so they have been marked as cleared. If
+ you look at the <emphasis>Statusbar</emphasis> at the bottom of the account register, you
+ will see a summary of what has been reconciled and what has been cleared
+ (<guilabel>Cleared:USD 954.79 Reconciled:USD 0.00</guilabel>)</para>
+
+ <screenshot id="txns-reconcile-window-3">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject>
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_reconcile_window3.png"
+ format="PNG" srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>Checking account</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+
+ <caption><para>The Checking account after postponing the
+ reconciliation.</para></caption>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="txns-sxn1">
+ <title>Scheduled Transactions</title>
+
+ <para>Scheduled transactions are made to help entering repetitive money
+ operations, like subscriptions, insurances or taxes. By using scheduled
+ transactions, you only have to enter the concerned transaction once, set a
+ few parameters like start date, frequency and a little description, and
+ then <application>&app;</application> will tell you whenever a scheduled transaction is ready to be
+ created, and create it for you.</para>
+
+ <para>In this howto, we’ll take a monthly Internet subscription of 20 USD
+ as example, which is taken on the 28th of each month.</para>
+
+ <para>In <application>&app;</application>, there are two ways of creating scheduled transactions,
+ <link linkend="txns-sxn-ledger2">from the ledger</link> or from the
+ <link linkend="txns-sxn-editor2">Scheduled Transactions Editor</link>.</para>
+
+ <sect3 id="txns-sxn-ledger2">
+ <title>Creating from the Ledger</title>
+
+ <para>Enter the first occurrence of your to-schedule transaction in the
+ ledger. In the <guilabel>Transfer</guilabel> field for this transaction, type
+ <emphasis>Expenses:Internet</emphasis> as shown in the next screenshot.</para>
+
+ <screenshot id="txns-sxn-ledger-1">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject>
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_sxn_ledger1.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>Step one creating scheduled transaction from the
+ ledger</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+
+ <caption><para>Step one creating scheduled transaction from the
+ ledger</para></caption>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>Since we did not create the <emphasis>Expenses:Internet</emphasis> account, <application>&app;</application>
+ will prompt us to create it.</para>
+ </note>
+
+ <para>Then you right click on your transaction and select
+ <guilabel>Schedule...</guilabel></para>
+
+ <screenshot id="txns-sxn-ledger-2">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject>
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_sxn_ledger2.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>Step two creating scheduled transaction from the
+ ledger</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+
+ <caption><para>Step two creating scheduled transaction from the
+ ledger</para></caption>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+
+ <para>A window like this will appear:</para>
+
+ <screenshot id="txns-sxn-ledger-3">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject>
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_sxn_ledger3.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>Step three creating scheduled transaction from the
+ ledger</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+
+ <caption><para>Step three creating scheduled transaction from the
+ ledger</para></caption>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+
+ <para>Let’s fill the values, we know that the subscription is taken on
+ the 28th each month, and the next one is for next month (since we
+ entered the one for this month manually) :</para>
+
+ <screenshot id="txns-sxn-ledger-4">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject>
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_sxn_ledger4.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>Filling in data to a scheduled transaction</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+
+ <caption><para>Filling in data to a scheduled
+ transaction</para></caption>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+
+ <para>Click the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button, and the transaction will be scheduled.
+ <application>&app;</application> now has memorized this scheduled transaction and on the 28th of
+ next month, it will pop up a window asking if it should create it (see
+ far below for a screenshot of this window).</para>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="txns-sxn-editor2">
+ <title>Creating from the Editor</title>
+
+ <para>Another way of entering a scheduled transaction is from the
+ <guilabel>Scheduled Transaction Editor</guilabel>, it may be faster if we have several
+ scheduled transactions to create at once.</para>
+
+ <para>From the main accounts windows, select
+ <menuchoice><guimenu>Actions</guimenu><guisubmenu>Scheduled Transactions</guisubmenu>
+ <guimenuitem>Scheduled Transaction Editor</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the <emphasis>Menubar</emphasis>.
+ A new <guilabel>Scheduled Transactions</guilabel> tab will be opened in the
+ current <application>&app;</application> window as shown above:</para>
+
+ <screenshot id="txns-sxn-editor-2">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject role="html">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_sxn_editor-2.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Cristian Marchi" width="510"/>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <imageobject role="fo">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_sxn_editor-2.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Cristian Marchi"/>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>Empty <guilabel>Scheduled Transactions</guilabel> tab</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+
+ <caption><para>Empty <guilabel>Scheduled Transactions</guilabel> tab</para></caption>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+
+ <para>This tab contains a list, now empty, of all the scheduled
+ transactions. Let’s create a new one by clicking on the <guibutton>New</guibutton>
+ button in the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis>. A window like the one below will pop up:</para>
+
+ <screenshot id="txns-sxn-editor-3-overview">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject role="html">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_sxn_editor-3-overview.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Cristian Marchi" width="510"/>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <imageobject role="fo">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_sxn_editor-3-overview.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Cristian Marchi" />
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>
+ <guimenuitem>Edit Scheduled Transaction</guimenuitem> window,
+ <guilabel>Overview</guilabel> tab</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+
+ <caption><para><guimenuitem>Edit Scheduled Transaction</guimenuitem>
+ window, <guilabel>Overview</guilabel> tab</para></caption>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+
+ <para>First, let’s enter a name for this new scheduled
+ transaction in the top of the window.</para>
+ <note>
+ <para>This name will only identify the transaction
+ in the <guilabel>Edit Scheduled Transaction</guilabel> window,
+ it will never appear in the ledger.</para>
+ </note>
+
+ <para>In the <guilabel>Options</guilabel> pane of the <guilabel>Overview</guilabel>
+ tab you have four options:</para>
+
+ <variablelist>
+ <varlistentry><term><guilabel>Enable</guilabel></term>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Sets the status of the scheduled transaction.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry><term><guilabel>Create automatically</guilabel></term>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>If enabled, will insert this transaction in the
+ ledger without asking you before (see below). If needed, you can be advised
+ when the transaction is entered by checking the <guilabel>Notify me when created</guilabel>
+ option.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry><term><guilabel>Create in advance</guilabel></term>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Sets how many days in advance the transaction will be created.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry><term><guilabel>Remind in advance</guilabel></term>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Sets how many days in advance a reminder is presented. This
+ can be used, for example, when you have to pay something by check, and a reminder
+ one week before allows you to send your check before the deadline.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ </variablelist>
+
+ <para>The <guilabel>Occurences</guilabel> pane allows you to tell <application>&app;</application> that
+ this scheduled transaction won’t last for ever. For example if you are repaying a loan,
+ you can enter the loan end date or the number of occurences left.</para>
+
+ <para>Select now the <guilabel>Frequency</guilabel> tab in the <guilabel>Edit Scheduled Transaction</guilabel> window.
+ Here you can set the time-related options of the transaction.</para>
+
+ <screenshot id="txns-sxn-editor-3-frequency">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject role="html">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_sxn_editor-3-frequency.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Cristian Marchi" width="510"/>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <imageobject role="fo">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_sxn_editor-3-frequency.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Cristian Marchi" />
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>
+ <guimenuitem>Edit Scheduled Transaction</guimenuitem> window,
+ <guilabel>Frequency</guilabel> tab</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+
+ <caption><para><guimenuitem>Edit Scheduled Transaction</guimenuitem>
+ window, <guilabel>Frequency</guilabel> tab</para></caption>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+
+ <variablelist>
+ <varlistentry><term><guilabel>Frequency</guilabel></term>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Sets the basic frequency of the transaction, with options for <guilabel>once</guilabel>,
+ <guilabel>daily</guilabel>, <guilabel>weekly</guilabel>, <guilabel>semi-monthly</guilabel> and
+ <guilabel>monthly</guilabel>.
+ In this example, this is set to <guilabel>monthly</guilabel>.</para>
+ <note>
+ <para>It is possible to set a transaction to occur at intervals <emphasis>other</emphasis> than
+ those listed in the <guilabel>Frequency</guilabel> list, by changing the setting in the
+ <guilabel>Every</guilabel> control (see below).</para>
+ </note>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry><term><guilabel>Start Date</guilabel></term>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Sets when the transaction will begin. In the example, this would
+ be set to the start of the next month.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry><term><guilabel>Every</guilabel></term>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>This option allows you to schedule transactions by multiplies of the value in
+ <guilabel>Frequency</guilabel>. For example, to create a transaction that runs every 3 weeks, set
+ <guilabel>Frequency</guilabel> to <guilabel>Weeks</guilabel> and <guilabel>Every</guilabel> to
+ <guilabel>3</guilabel>.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry><term><guilabel>On the</guilabel> and <guilabel>Except on weekends</guilabel></term>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Sets the day of the month that the transaction is scheduled, and controls what
+ <application>&app;</application> will do when the day occurs on a weekend day.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ </variablelist>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>We know that the subscription is taken on the 28th each month, so the <guilabel>Start date</guilabel>
+ will be November 1, 2003 (assuming November is the next month), the <guilabel>Frequency</guilabel> will be
+ <guilabel>Monthly</guilabel>, it will be taken every month on the 28th. Since in our example the internet
+ subscription is automatically taken from the account, we have no need to create it in advance, nor
+ give an end date.</para>
+ </note>
+
+ <para>When the elements on this tab are filled in, <application>&app;</application> will highlights the
+ calendar below to indicate when future transactions will be run.</para>
+
+ <para>Finally select the <guilabel>Template Transaction</guilabel> tab and enter your transaction
+ in the lower part as you would do in the ledger, with the only difference of having no date.</para>
+
+ <para>Now, you should have a window like this:</para>
+
+ <screenshot id="txns-sxn-editor-3-template">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject role="html">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_sxn_editor-3-template.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Cristian Marchi" width="510"/>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <imageobject role="fo">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_sxn_editor-3-template.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Cristian Marchi" />
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase><guimenuitem>Edit Scheduled Transaction</guimenuitem>
+ window, <guilabel>Template Transaction</guilabel> tab</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+
+ <caption><para><guimenuitem>Edit Scheduled Transaction</guimenuitem>
+ window, <guilabel>Template Transaction</guilabel> tab</para></caption>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+
+ <para>Remember to click on the <guibutton>Enter</guibutton> icon, to validate and enter the
+ transaction.</para>
+
+ <para>Now click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>, it takes you to the <guilabel>Scheduled Transactions</guilabel> tab,
+ now showing one item in the <guilabel>Transactions</guilabel> list:</para>
+
+ <screenshot id="txns-sxn-editor-4">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject role="html">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_sxn_editor-4.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Cristian Marchi" width="510"/>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <imageobject role="fo">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_sxn_editor-4.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Cristian Marchi" />
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>Entered scheduled transaction</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+
+ <caption><para>Entered scheduled transaction</para></caption>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>If you click in the calendar part on the first day of one month, a
+ small window, following your mouse, will show you what is planned for
+ this day. To make the small window disappear again, just click in it
+ one more time.</para>
+ </tip>
+
+ <para>You can now close the <guilabel>Scheduled Transaction</guilabel> tab, and
+ <guilabel>save</guilabel> your work.</para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>What comes below is just an illustration, and is not meant to be
+ entered into the <application>&app;</application> database at this stage. As per this example,
+ the below dialogs will appear when the scheduled transaction is
+ supposed to run.</para>
+ </note>
+
+ <para>From now on, when <application>&app;</application> is launched and a scheduled
+ transaction is scheduled or need to be entered,
+ you may see a <guilabel>Since Last Run...</guilabel> window summarizing the scheduled transactions
+ operations (<guilabel>Reminder</guilabel>, <guilabel>To-Create</guilabel> etc... a better
+ description of each option can be found in the <application>&app;</application> manual):</para>
+
+ <screenshot id="txns-sxn-editor-slr">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject role="html">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_sxn_editor_slr.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Cristian Marchi" width="510"/>
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <imageobject role="fo">
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_sxn_editor_slr.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Cristian Marchi" />
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>Scheduled transaction popup reminder</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+
+ <caption><para>Scheduled transaction popup reminder</para></caption>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+
+ <para>You can click on the <guilabel>Status</guilabel> column to change
+ the scheduled transaction status if needed. Then just click on <guibutton>Ok</guibutton> to
+ close the <guilabel>Since Last Run...</guilabel> window and to apply the pending operations.
+ Select <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to skip entering in the ledger the pending operations.</para>
+
+ <para>If the <guilabel>Status</guilabel> field was set to <guilabel>To-Create</guilabel>,
+ then if you take a look in your bank account register, you’ll see the transaction has been created:</para>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>If you enable the <guilabel>Review created transactions</guilabel> option in the lower right of the
+ <guilabel>Since Last Run...</guilabel> window, <application>&app;</application> will open, after pressing
+ <guibutton>Ok</guibutton>, the register tab of each account where the scheduled
+ transactions were entered automatically.</para>
+ </tip>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>If you entered the transaction for 28 of April at this stage,
+ then please <emphasis>revert back</emphasis> to the last saved <application>&app;</application> file
+ by selecting <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Open</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and
+ choosing the previously saved <filename>gcashdata_3</filename> <application>&app;</application> file.</para>
+ </note>
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="txns-puttoget1">
+ <title>Putting It All Together</title>
+
+ <para>In the previous sections of this chapter the concepts and mechanics
+ of working with transactions in <application>&app;</application> have been discussed. This section
+ will expand upon the chart of accounts initially built in the previous
+ chapter, by setting some opening balances, adding transactions and a
+ scheduled transaction.</para>
+
+ <sect3 id="txns-puttoget-openfile">
+ <title>Open <application>&app;</application> file</title>
+
+ <para>Start with opening the previous datafile we stored,
+ <filename>gcashdata_3emptyAccts</filename>, and store it as
+ <filename>gcashdata_4</filename> directly. The main window should look
+ something like this:</para>
+
+ <screenshot id="txns-puttoget1-Charts">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject>
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_puttoget_Charts.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>Starting point for Putting It All Together</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+
+ <caption><para>This image shows the starting point for this
+ section.</para></caption>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="txns-puttoget-open2">
+ <title>Opening Balances</title>
+
+ <para>As shown earlier in <xref linkend="txns-registers-twoaccount2"/>
+ with the <emphasis>Assets:Checking</emphasis>
+ account, the starting balances in an account are typically assigned to a
+ special account called <emphasis>Equity:Opening Balance</emphasis>. To
+ start filling in this chart of account, begin by setting the starting
+ balances for the accounts. Assume that there is $1000 in the savings
+ account and $500 charged on the credit card.</para>
+
+ <orderedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Open the <emphasis>Assets:Savings</emphasis> account register.
+ Select <guimenu>View</guimenu> from the menu and check to make sure
+ you are in Basic Ledger style. You will view your transactions in
+ the other modes later, but for now let’s enter a basic transaction
+ using the basic default style.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>From the <emphasis>Assets:Savings</emphasis> account register
+ window, enter a basic 2 account transaction to set your starting
+ balance to $1000, transferred from <emphasis>Equity:Opening Balance</emphasis>.
+ Remember, basic transactions transfer money from
+ a source account to a destination account. Record the transaction
+ (press the <keycap function="enter">Enter</keycap> key, or click on
+ the <guibutton>Enter</guibutton> icon).</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>From the <emphasis>Assets:Checking</emphasis> account register
+ window, enter a basic 2 account transaction to set your starting
+ balance to $1000, transferred from <emphasis>Equity:Opening Balance</emphasis>.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>From the <emphasis>Liabilities:Visa</emphasis> account
+ register window, enter a basic 2 account transaction to set your
+ starting balance to $500, transferred from <emphasis>Equity:Opening Balance</emphasis>.
+ This is done by entering the $500 as a <guilabel>charge</guilabel>
+ in the <emphasis>Visa</emphasis> account (or <guilabel>decrease</guilabel> in the <emphasis>Opening Balance</emphasis> account),
+ since it is money you borrowed. Record the transaction (press the
+ <keycap function="enter">Enter</keycap> key, or click on
+ the <guibutton>Enter</guibutton> icon).</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </orderedlist>
+
+ <para>You should now have 3 accounts with opening balances set.
+ <emphasis>Assets:Checking</emphasis>,
+ <emphasis>Assets:Savings</emphasis>, and
+ <emphasis>Liabilities:Visa</emphasis>.</para>
+
+ <screenshot id="txns-puttoget1-Charts1">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject>
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_puttoget_Charts1.png"
+ format="PNG" srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>Chart accounts after setting opening balance</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+
+ <caption><para>This image shows the opening
+ balances.</para></caption>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="txns-puttoget-add2">
+ <title>Additional Transaction Examples</title>
+
+ <para>Now add some more transactions to simulate a month’s expenses.
+ During the month, $78 is spent on electricity, $45 on phone, and $350 on
+ rent. All paid by check. We also spent $45.21 on groceries, received $670
+ as salary, and paid our Internet bill this month. Finally, let’s move
+ $100 from the savings account to the checking account.</para>
+
+ <orderedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Open the <emphasis>Expenses:Electricity</emphasis> account
+ register and enter a simple 2 account transaction to pay the $78
+ electrical bill at the end of the current month (eg: March 28,
+ 2006). Enter a description (eg: Light Company) and the check number
+ (eg: 102). The <guilabel>Transfer</guilabel> account should be
+ <emphasis>Assets:Checking</emphasis>.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Open the <emphasis>Assets:Checking</emphasis> account register
+ and enter a simple 2 account transaction to pay the $45 phone bill
+ at the end of the current month (eg: March 28, 2006). Enter a
+ description (eg: Phone Company Name) and the check number (eg: 103).
+ The <guilabel>Transfer</guilabel> account should be
+ <emphasis>Expenses:Phone</emphasis>. Notice that you can enter
+ expense transactions from either the credit side (the expense
+ accounts) or the debit side (the asset account).</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Open the <emphasis>Expenses:Rent</emphasis> account register
+ and enter a simple 2 account transaction to pay the $350 in rent at
+ the end of the current month (eg: March 28, 2006). Enter a
+ description (eg: April Rent) and the check number (eg: 104). The
+ <guilabel>Transfer</guilabel> account should be
+ <emphasis>Assets:Checking</emphasis>.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Duplicate this transaction using the
+ <guibutton>Duplicate</guibutton> button in the <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis>. Start by
+ clicking on the current rent transaction, and click on the
+ <guilabel>Duplicate</guilabel> icon. Enter the transaction date a
+ month out in the future (eg: April 28, 2006), and notice the blue
+ line separator that <application>&app;</application> uses to separate future transactions
+ from current ones. In this way, you can enter transactions before
+ they occur.</para>
+
+ <para>You could also set up a scheduled transaction to pay your
+ rent, since the value of the rent is likely to be constant for the
+ foreseeable future. <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Start by clicking on the current (April 28) rent
+ transaction, and click on the <guilabel>Schedule</guilabel>
+ icon</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Change to <guilabel>Monthly</guilabel>, change
+ description if needed and press <guibutton>OK</guibutton></para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist></para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>To transfer money from your savings account to your checking
+ account, open the <emphasis>Assets:Savings</emphasis> account
+ register, add a new transaction setting
+ the <guilabel>Transfer</guilabel> to <emphasis>Assets:Checking</emphasis> in the amount
+ of $100 (date 6 March, 2006).</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>As another example of a simple 2 account transaction, add
+ another transaction to describe the purchase of $45.21 worth of
+ groceries on 5 of March. From within the <emphasis>Assets:Checking</emphasis> account, you
+ would set <guilabel>Transfer</guilabel> to
+ <emphasis>Expenses:Groceries</emphasis>. The account register should
+ now appear:</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>To add a paycheck transaction from the
+ <emphasis>Assets:Checking</emphasis> account register window, click
+ on a new transaction line, and click on <guilabel>Split</guilabel>.
+ First enter the description of this transaction on the first line
+ (eg: <quote>Employers R Us</quote>), as well as the date (14 March). In the
+ <quote>split</quote> line below this, enter the deposit into
+ <emphasis>Assets:Checking</emphasis> (eg:$670). Follow this with the various tax deposits
+ (<emphasis>Assets:Checking</emphasis> (eg: $670),
+ <emphasis>Expenses:Taxes:Federal</emphasis> account (eg: $180),
+ <emphasis>Expenses:Taxes:Medicare</emphasis> account (eg: $90), and
+ <emphasis>Expenses:Taxes:Social Security</emphasis> account (eg: $60)) and
+ lastly the gross total of your paycheck (eg: $1000) as a withdrawal
+ transfer from <emphasis>Income:Salary</emphasis>.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>You also need to pay for your Internet subscription of 20 USD on
+ the 28th.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </orderedlist>
+
+ <screenshot id="txns-puttoget2-Charts1">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject>
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_puttoget_Charts2.png"
+ format="PNG" srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>Chart accounts after setting all the various
+ transactions</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+
+ <caption><para>This image shows the ending balances after <xref
+ linkend="chapter_txns" />.</para></caption>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="txns-puttoget-save">
+ <title>Save file</title>
+
+ <para>Before we go to the report section, let’s save the <application>&app;</application> data
+ file (<filename>gcashdata_4</filename>).</para>
+ </sect3>
+
+ <sect3 id="txns-puttoget-reports">
+ <title>Reports</title>
+
+ <para>But only having data available on the computer screen will not
+ make your accountant happy, therefore <application>&app;</application> comes with a large number
+ of highly customizable reports.</para>
+
+<!-- Add this note when the reports chapter is ready
+ <note>
+ <para>More details on the reports can be found in <xref linkend="chapter_reports" /></para>
+ </note>
+-->
+
+ <para>Let’s have a look at a <guilabel>Cash Flow</guilabel>, and a
+ <guilabel>Transaction</guilabel> Report.</para>
+
+ <orderedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>First let’s have a look at the <guilabel>Cash Flow</guilabel>
+ report for the month of March.</para>
+
+ <para>Select the cash flow report from <menuchoice><guimenu>Reports</guimenu>
+ <guisubmenu>Income & Expense</guisubmenu>
+ <guimenuitem>Cash Flow</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.</para>
+
+ <screenshot id="txns-puttoget2-Cash">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject>
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_CashFlow.png" format="PNG"
+ srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>Cash Flow report for the month of March</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+
+ <caption><para>This image shows the Cash Flow report after <xref
+ linkend="chapter_txns" />.</para></caption>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+
+ <para>To get this customized report, right click in the report and
+ choose <guilabel>Report Options</guilabel>. Then set the time
+ period, and specify which accounts you want in the report.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Now let’s have a look at corresponding transaction report for
+ the Checking account.</para>
+
+ <para>Select the transaction report from <menuchoice><guimenu>Reports</guimenu>
+ <guimenuitem>Transaction Report</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.</para>
+
+ <screenshot id="txns-puttoget2-TransactionRptChecking">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject>
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_TransactionRptChecking.png"
+ format="PNG" srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>Transaction Report for the Checking account during
+ March</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+
+ <caption><para>This image shows the Transaction Report for the
+ Checking account during March. </para></caption>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Now let’s change the transaction report to only show the
+ various Expenses accounts.</para>
+
+ <screenshot id="txns-puttoget2-TransactionRptExpenses">
+ <mediaobject>
+ <imageobject>
+ <imagedata fileref="figures/txns_TransactionRptExpenses.png"
+ format="PNG" srccredit="Bengt Thuree" />
+ </imageobject>
+
+ <textobject>
+ <phrase>Transaction Report for the Expenses accounts during
+ March</phrase>
+ </textobject>
+
+ <caption><para>This image shows the Transaction Report for the
+ various Expense accounts during March. </para></caption>
+ </mediaobject>
+ </screenshot>
+ </listitem>
+ </orderedlist>
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
+</sect1>
+</chapter>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/guide/C/ch_configuring.xml b/guide/C/ch_configuring.xml
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..def6f27
--- /dev/null
+++ b/guide/C/ch_configuring.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+<!--
+ (Do not remove this comment block.)
+ Version: 2.0.0
+ Last modified: December 7th 2009
+ modified: July 9th 2006
+ Maintainers:
+ Author:
+
+ Translators:
+ (translators put your name and email here)
+-->
+<chapter id="chapter_configuring">
+ <title>Configuring <application>&app;</application></title>
+
+ <para>This chapter will detail preference settings for <application>&app;</application>.</para>
+
+ <sect1 id="configuring-overview">
+ <title>Overview</title>
+
+ <para>Configuring is fun.</para>
+
+ </sect1>
+ <sect1 id="configuring-screens">
+ <title>Main Configuration Screens</title>
+
+ <para><application>&app;</application> stores settings in two main locations. </para>
+ <sect2 id="configuring-preferences-accounting-period">
+ <title>Preferences: Accounting Period Tab</title>
+ <para> Stuff about the Accounting Period tab</para>
+ </sect2>
+ <sect2 id="configuring-preferences-accounts">
+ <title>Preferences: Accounts Tab</title>
+ <para> Stuff about the Accounts tab. Need this stub for the link in The Basics. More later.</para>
+ </sect2>
+ <sect2 id="configuring-preferences-online-banking">
+ <title>Preferences: Online Banking</title>
+ <para> Stuff about the Accounts tab. Need this stub for the link in The Basics. More later.</para>
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
+
+
+</chapter>
diff --git a/guide/C/ch_importing.xml b/guide/C/ch_importing.xml
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1d8f016
--- /dev/null
+++ b/guide/C/ch_importing.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,393 @@
+<!--
+ (Do not remove this comment block.)
+ Version: 2.0.0
+ Last modified: December 7th 2009
+ modified: July 9th 2006
+ Maintainers:
+ Author:
+
+ Translators:
+ (translators put your name and email here)
+-->
+<chapter id="chapter_importing">
+ <title>Importing Data into <application>&app;</application></title>
+
+ <para>This chapter will detail procedures for importing data into <application>&app;</application>.</para>
+
+ <sect1 id="importing-overview">
+ <title>Overview</title>
+
+ <para>Importing stuff is fun.</para>
+
+ <sect2 id="importing-qif">
+ <title>Importing Quicken QIF Files</title>
+
+ <para>Many users seek to import their financial data from Quicken.</para>
+ <para>This Assistant helps you import Quicken <acronym>QIF</acronym> files. It will appear if
+ you choose <guibutton>Import my QIF files</guibutton> in the
+ <guilabel>Welcome to &app;!</guilabel> menu, as well as from <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu>
+ <guisubmenu>Import ...</guisubmenu> <guimenuitem>Import QIF...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.</para>
+
+ <para>The import process involves several steps, which are presented in a
+ series of screens that are described below.</para>
+
+ <orderedlist>
+ <listitem>
+
+ <para><guilabel>Import QIF files</guilabel> screen briefly describes the assistant.
+ The three buttons at the very bottom of the screen are used throughout the process
+ to navigate.</para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guibutton>Cancel</guibutton>: exit the process and cancel importing
+ <acronym>QIF</acronym> files.</para>
+ <warning>
+ <para>If you choose to cancel at any point in the assistant, any selections you have made up to
+ this point will be lost.</para>
+ </warning>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guibutton>Back</guibutton>: return to the previous screen.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guibutton>Next</guibutton> move to the next screen.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ </listitem>
+ <listitem>
+
+ <para><guilabel>Select a QIF file to load</guilabel> allows you to choose the
+ source <acronym>QIF</acronym> file. The <guibutton>Select...</guibutton> button on this
+ screen is used to access a list of files in your system. The
+ <guibutton>Select...</guibutton> button brings up the <guilabel>Select
+ QIF File</guilabel> dialog.</para>
+
+ <para>Navigate to where you have stored your <acronym>QIF</acronym> files and select the
+ first one then click <guibutton>Import</guibutton>. The next screen will
+ display it in the <guilabel>Select a QIF File to Load</guilabel>
+ field.</para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>If the file you are loading does not have an <acronym>QIF</acronym> date listed
+ in it you will see the <guilabel>Set a date format for this QIF file</guilabel>
+ screen. Select the proper format from the pull down list and continue.</para>
+ </note>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>If the file you are loading does not have an account name listed
+ in it you will see the <guilabel>Set the default QIF account
+ name</guilabel> screen. Otherwise you will skip this screen and go on
+ to the screen in the next section that shows loaded <acronym>QIF</acronym> files.</para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The <guilabel>Account name:</guilabel> field is used to set
+ an account name for this <acronym>QIF</acronym> file.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </note>
+
+ </listitem>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The next screen shows you the <guilabel>QIF files you have
+ loaded</guilabel>. You can use this screen to return to the previous
+ screen and load more <acronym>QIF</acronym> files. It will also let you unload any files
+ you have loaded by mistake.</para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The top panel shows the list of <guilabel>QIF Files</guilabel>
+ you have loaded.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The <guibutton>Load another file</guibutton> button takes you
+ back to the previous screen to load another <acronym>QIF</acronym> file.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The <guibutton>Unload selected file</guibutton> button allows you to
+ select a file from the top panel and remove it from the list.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>When you have selected all the <acronym>QIF</acronym> files to be imported, click the
+ <guibutton>Forward</guibutton> button.</para>
+
+ </listitem>
+ <listitem>
+
+ <para>Depending on the type of data contained in the
+ <acronym>QIF</acronym> files to be imported, you may see only one or all of the following screens:</para>
+
+ <variablelist termlength="8">
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><guilabel>Accounts and stock holdings</guilabel></term>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>This screen gives a description of the <guilabel>Accounts and stock
+ holdings</guilabel> matching process on the following <guilabel>Match QIF
+ accounts with &app; accounts</guilabel> screen.</para>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>This and other informational screens in the
+ <guilabel>Import QIF files</guilabel> assistant
+ can be turned off in the <guilabel>Online Banking</guilabel> tab (see <xref linkend="configuring-preferences-online-banking"/>)
+ under <guilabel>&app; Preferences</guilabel>.</para>
+ </tip>
+
+ <para>The next screen lets you <guilabel>Match QIF accounts with &app;
+ accounts</guilabel>. You will see a list of <guilabel>QIF account
+ names</guilabel> on the left and suggested <guilabel>&app; account
+ names</guilabel> on the right. The <guilabel>New?</guilabel> column
+ indicates if the <application>&app;</application> account name will be created by the <acronym>QIF</acronym>
+ Import.</para>
+
+ <para>To change the <application>&app;</application> account to a different one select the <acronym>QIF</acronym>
+ account. A screen will pop up to select another account or create a new
+ one.</para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Select an account from the list to choose a already existing
+ account.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The <guibutton>New Account</guibutton> button allows you to
+ add a new account name as a sub-account (child of selected) of the
+ selected account.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button is used to confirm your
+ selection.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button is used to exit the
+ dialog without using any changes you have made.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><guilabel>Income and Expense categories</guilabel></term>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>This screen gives a description of the <guilabel>Income and
+ Expense categories</guilabel> matching process on the following <guilabel>Match
+ QIF categories with &app; accounts</guilabel> screen.</para>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>This and other informational screens in the
+ <guilabel>Import QIF files</guilabel> assistant
+ can be turned off in the <guilabel>Online Banking</guilabel> tab (see <xref linkend="configuring-preferences-online-banking"/>)
+ under <guilabel>&app; Preferences</guilabel>.</para>
+ </tip>
+
+ <para>The next screen lets you <guilabel>Match QIF categories with
+ &app; accounts</guilabel>. You will see a list of <guilabel>QIF
+ category names</guilabel> on the left and suggested <guilabel>&app;
+ account names</guilabel> on the right. The <guilabel>New?</guilabel>
+ column indicates if the <application>&app;</application> account name will be created by the QIF
+ Import.</para>
+
+ <para>To change the <application>&app;</application> account to a different one select the QIF
+ category. A dialog will pop up to select another account or create a new
+ one.</para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Select an account from the list to choose a already existing
+ account.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The <guibutton>New Account</guibutton> button allows you to
+ add a new account name as a sub-account (child of selected) of the
+ selected account.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button is used to confirm your
+ selection.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button is used to exit the
+ dialog without using any changes you have made.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><guilabel>Payees and memos</guilabel></term>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>This screen gives a description of the <guilabel>Payees and
+ memos</guilabel> matching process on the following <guilabel>Match payees/memos to
+ &app; accounts</guilabel> screen.</para>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>This and other informational screens in the
+ <guilabel>Import QIF files</guilabel> assistant
+ can be turned off in the <guilabel>Online Banking</guilabel> tab (see <xref linkend="configuring-preferences-online-banking"/>)
+ under <guilabel>&app; Preferences</guilabel>.</para>
+ </tip>
+
+ <para>The next screen lets you <guilabel>Match payees/memos to &app;
+ accounts</guilabel>. You will see a list of <guilabel>QIF payee/memo
+ names</guilabel> on the left and suggested <guilabel>&app; account
+ names</guilabel> on the right. The default <application>&app;</application> account used is
+ called <guilabel>Unspecified</guilabel>. The <guilabel>New?</guilabel> column indicates if
+ the <application>&app;</application> account name will be created by the QIF Import.</para>
+
+ <para>To change the <application>&app;</application> account to a different one select the QIF
+ payee/memo. A dialog will pop up to select another account or create a
+ new one.</para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>Select an account from the list to choose a already existing
+ account.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The <guibutton>New Account</guibutton> button allows you to
+ add a new account name as a sub-account of the selected
+ account.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button is used to confirm your
+ selection.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button is used to exit the
+ dialog without using any changes you have made.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ </variablelist>
+
+ </listitem>
+ <listitem>
+
+ <para>The next screen allows you to <guilabel>Enter the QIF file
+ currency</guilabel>. The drop down list defaults to the currency
+ configured in the <guilabel>Accounts</guilabel> tab (see <xref linkend="configuring-preferences-accounts"/>) under
+ <guilabel>&app; Preferences</guilabel>. If you wish the new accounts
+ to use a different currency, select one from the list.</para>
+
+ <para>When you have selected the currency, click the
+ <guibutton>Forward</guibutton> button.</para>
+
+ </listitem>
+ <listitem>
+
+ <para>Depending on the type of data contained in the
+ <acronym>QIF</acronym> files to be imported, you may or may not see one or more of the following screens:</para>
+
+ <variablelist termlength="8">
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><guilabel>Tradable Commodities</guilabel></term>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>This screen gives a description of the <guilabel>Tradable
+ Commodities</guilabel> process on the screen.</para>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>This and other informational screens in the
+ <guilabel>Import QIF files</guilabel> assistant
+ can be turned off in the <guilabel>Online Banking</guilabel> tab (see <xref linkend="configuring-preferences-online-banking"/>)
+ under <guilabel>&app; Preferences</guilabel>.</para>
+ </tip>
+
+ <para>A series of screens, one for each of the stock, mutual fund, or
+ commodity, displays the exchange, full name, and symbol for each of the commodities
+ listed in the <acronym>QIF</acronym> file you are importing so that you can
+ check them before proceeding.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+
+ <varlistentry>
+ <term><guilabel>Match duplicate transactions</guilabel></term>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>This screen gives a description of the <guilabel>Match
+ duplicate transactions</guilabel> process on the following <guilabel>Select
+ possible duplicates</guilabel> screen.</para>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>This and other informational screens in the
+ <guilabel>Import QIF files</guilabel> assistant
+ can be turned off in the <guilabel>Online Banking</guilabel> tab (see <xref linkend="configuring-preferences-online-banking"/>)
+ under <guilabel>&app; Preferences</guilabel>.</para>
+ </tip>
+
+ <para>The next screen lets you <guilabel>Select possible duplicate
+ transactions</guilabel>. Imported transactions are shown on the left
+ panel and possible matches to each selected transaction are shown on the
+ right.</para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The left panel shows the list of Imported transactions to
+ select from for matching duplicates</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para>The right panel shows the list of <emphasis>possible</emphasis> duplicates for the
+ selected imported transaction. Select the one that most closely
+ matches</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ </listitem>
+ </varlistentry>
+ </variablelist>
+
+ </listitem>
+ <listitem>
+
+ <para>The last screen, <guibutton>Update your &app;
+ accounts</guibutton>, gives you a list of three choices to finish the
+ assistant.</para>
+
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guibutton>Cancel:</guibutton> exit the process and cancel importing
+ <acronym>QIF</acronym> files.</para>
+ <warning>
+ <para>If you click this button, any selections you have made up to
+ this point will be lost.</para>
+ </warning>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guibutton>Back:</guibutton> brings up the previous screen so
+ that you can change a previous selection until the first screen.</para>
+ </listitem>
+
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guibutton>Forward:</guibutton> imports the data and creates the
+ accounts you have specified.</para>
+ </listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+
+ </listitem>
+ </orderedlist>
+
+ <para>You should now have successfully imported your accounts.</para>
+
+ <tip>
+ <para>Imported transactions might need to be <emphasis role="strong">reconciled</emphasis>.
+ This process is described in the <application>&app;</application> Tutorial and Concepts guide.</para>
+ </tip>
+
+ </sect2>
+ </sect1>
+</chapter>
diff --git a/guide/C/ch_oview.xml b/guide/C/ch_oview.xml
index 484a81b..d1b7041 100644
--- a/guide/C/ch_oview.xml
+++ b/guide/C/ch_oview.xml
@@ -442,16 +442,35 @@
<sect1 id="more_help">
<title>Getting More Help</title>
+
+ <para><application>&app;</application> offers help in many ways, including the <link linkend="basics-tip2">
+ <guilabel>Tip of the Day</guilabel></link>, context help, a website, a wiki, the mailing lists, and IRC chat.</para>
+
<sect2 id="online_help">
- <title>Online Help</title>
- <para>The online help is the counterpart to this guide. It
- provides the detailed instructions for using
+ <title>Context Help</title>
+ <para>The context help provides detailed instructions for using
<application>&app;'s</application> menus, windows, and
controls. To open online help, select <menuchoice><guimenu>Help</guimenu>
<guimenuitem>Contents</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.</para>
-
- </sect2>
- <sect2 id="wiki">
+ <para>The <guilabel>&app; Help</guilabel> window also acts as a simple
+ web browser, so you can pull up a web site for additional information.
+ You can open any web site under this window by clicking the
+ <guibutton>Open</guibutton> <emphasis>Toolbar</emphasis> button and then typing in the URL.
+ Use the <guibutton>Back</guibutton>, <guibutton>Forward</guibutton>,
+ <guibutton>Reload</guibutton>, <guibutton>Stop</guibutton>, and
+ <guibutton>Print</guibutton> buttons as you would in a standard
+ browser.</para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="website">
+ <title><application>&app;</application> Website</title>
+ <para>The <ulink
+ url="http://www.gnucash.org"><citetitle>&app;</citetitle></ulink> web
+ site contains helpful information about the program and about any
+ updates to it. It also contains links to other online resources.</para>
+ </sect2>
+
+ <sect2 id="wiki">
<title><application>&app;</application> Wiki</title>
<para>An immense amount of less-formal documenation, both of
<application>&app;</application> itself and its maintenance and
@@ -487,6 +506,17 @@
to additional useful resources such as the <application>&app;</application> wiki
and bug tracking system.</para>
</sect2>
+ <sect2 id="topic-search">
+ <title>Topic Search</title>
+
+ <para>The online manual also provides a search function. To search for a
+ particular topic, click the <guilabel>Search</guilabel> tab at the
+ bottom of the help window and type in your topic in the field provided.
+ Click the <guibutton>Search</guibutton> button to complete your search.
+ A list of choices should appear in the box below, clicking a choice will
+ bring up its text on the right.</para>
+ </sect2>
+
</sect1>
<sect1 id="oview-install1">
diff --git a/guide/C/gnucash-guide.xml b/guide/C/gnucash-guide.xml
index 1eb3d46..eacb2b4 100644
--- a/guide/C/gnucash-guide.xml
+++ b/guide/C/gnucash-guide.xml
@@ -11,8 +11,8 @@
<!-- List of files: -->
<!ENTITY chapter1 SYSTEM "ch_oview.xml">
<!ENTITY chapter2 SYSTEM "ch_basics.xml">
-<!ENTITY chapter3 SYSTEM "ch_accts.xml">
-<!ENTITY chapter4 SYSTEM "ch_txns.xml">
+<!ENTITY chapter3 SYSTEM "ch_importing.xml">
+<!ENTITY chapter4 SYSTEM "ch_configuring.xml">
<!ENTITY chapter5 SYSTEM "ch_cbook.xml">
<!ENTITY chapter6 SYSTEM "ch_expenses.xml">
<!ENTITY chapter7 SYSTEM "ch_cc.xml">
diff --git a/help/C/Help_ch_GettingStarted.xml b/help/C/Help_ch_GettingStarted.xml
index a23a70c..d54d409 100644
--- a/help/C/Help_ch_GettingStarted.xml
+++ b/help/C/Help_ch_GettingStarted.xml
@@ -18,9 +18,10 @@
<chapter id="getting-started">
<title>Getting Started</title>
-
<sect1 id="first-time">
- <title>Running <application>&app;</application></title>
+ <title>Welcome to <application>&app;</application>! Screen</title>
+
+<!-- Delete content. Section moved to Guide
<para><application>&app;</application> can be run from your desktop main menu by selecting the associated menu entry.</para>
<para>Alternatively it can be run from a shell (command line) with the command <command>gnucash</command>.</para>
@@ -63,7 +64,7 @@
<xref linkend="tutorial" /> to see how to start them from the
<application>&app;</application> menu.</para>
</note>
-
+end Delete -->
<para>This screen is intended for you to use to get up and running
quickly. The <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button is used to exit the
screen. It will then prompt you with <guilabel>Display Welcome Dialog
@@ -79,16 +80,18 @@
in <xref linkend="GUIMenus"></xref>.</para>
</note>
+<!-- Delete content. Section moved to Guide
</sect2>
-
+End delete -->
</sect1>
<sect1 id="acct-hierarchy">
<title>New Account Hierarchy Setup</title>
-
<para>This assistant helps you to create a set of <application>&app;</application> accounts. It will
appear if you choose <guibutton>Create a new set of accounts</guibutton>
- in the <guilabel>Welcome to &app;!</guilabel> menu.</para>
+ in the <guilabel>Welcome to &app;!</guilabel> menu, or if you select
+ <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>New</guimenuitem></menuchoice> .</para>
+<!-- Delete content. Section moved to Guide
<para>This will create a new blank <application>&app;</application> file and then automatically start
the <guilabel>New Account Hierarchy Setup</guilabel> assistant.</para>
@@ -256,6 +259,7 @@
<para>You should now have a hierarchy of accounts in your main <application>&app;</application>
account window.</para>
</sect1>
+end delete -->
<sect1 id="import-qif">
<title>Import QIF Files</title>
commit c81713206bcc9546f628701b89357ea0d7bba669
Author: John Ralls <jralls at ceridwen.us>
Date: Fri Aug 10 11:36:30 2018 -0700
Bug 796800 - None of the "GnuCash Tutorial and Concepts Guide"...
graphics (.png files) display.
Fix missing figures, broken internal links.
diff --git a/chm.make b/chm.make
index 76fc0e9..d16d513 100644
--- a/chm.make
+++ b/chm.make
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
# Create CHM help files for Win32
# Copyright 2017 John Ralls <jralls at ceridwen.us>
# Procedure lifted from make_chm() in gnucash-on-windows.git:install-impl.sh,
-# originally written by Andreas Köhler.
+# originally written by Andreas Köhler.
chmfile=$(docname).chm
mapfile=$(docname).hhmap
@@ -20,6 +20,9 @@ install-chm-local: $(chmfile) $(mapfile)
.xml.chm:
${XSLTPROC} ${htmlhelp_xsl} ${srcdir}/$(docname).xml
+ if test ! -d ${builddir}/figures ; then \
+ ln -s ${srcdir}/figures ${builddir} ; \
+ fi
count=0
echo >> htmlhelp.hhp
echo "[ALIAS]" >> htmlhelp.hhp
@@ -28,10 +31,10 @@ install-chm-local: $(chmfile) $(mapfile)
echo "[Map]" > htmlhelp.hhmap
echo "Searching for anchors ..."
for id in `cat ${srcdir}/*.xml | sed '/sect.*id=/!d;s,.*id=["'\'']\([^"'\'']*\)["'\''].*,\1,'` ; do \
- files=`grep -l "[\"']${id}[\"']" *.html` || continue; \
- echo "IDH_$((++count))=${files}#${id}" >> htmlhelp.hhp; \
- echo "#define IDH_${count} ${count}" >> mymaps; \
- echo "${id}=${count}" >> htmlhelp.hhmap; \
+ files=`grep -l "[\"']$${id}[\"']" *.html` || continue; \
+ echo "IDH_$$((++count))=$${files}#$${id}" >> htmlhelp.hhp; \
+ echo "#define IDH_$${count} $${count}" >> mymaps; \
+ echo "$${id}=$${count}" >> htmlhelp.hhmap; \
done
echo >> htmlhelp.hhp
echo "[MAP]" >> htmlhelp.hhp
commit ecd868ba4feb8f9b77ec02ba0f89d3b98f420e70
Author: Geert Janssens <geert at kobaltwit.be>
Date: Thu Sep 6 16:50:21 2018 +0200
Fix xmllint error
diff --git a/guide/C/ch_basics.xml b/guide/C/ch_basics.xml
index d14a86b..586e0f3 100644
--- a/guide/C/ch_basics.xml
+++ b/guide/C/ch_basics.xml
@@ -649,7 +649,7 @@
<title>Storage Comparison and Recommendations</title>
<para>Each storage format has benefits and shortcomings that users should
consider for their needs and abilities. See the
- <link linkend='basics-storage-comparison-table' endterm="basics-storage-comparison-table.title"/> below
+ <link linkend='basics-storage-comparison-table' endterm="basics-storage-comparison-tbltitle"/> below
for further details.</para>
<para>The <acronym>XML</acronym> format is the most stable and established,
@@ -672,7 +672,7 @@
<sect2 id="basics-storage-comparison-tblsect">
<title>Storage Comparison Table</title>
<table frame="topbot" id="basics-storage-comparison-table">
- <title>Storage Comparison</title>
+ <title id="basics-storage-comparison-tbltitle">Storage Comparison</title>
<tgroup align="left" cols="5">
<colspec colname="c1item" ></colspec>
commit 507bdc1ae0061fccef33be3ec49860c2eeac8d76
Author: David Thomas <sunfish62 at yahoo.com>
Date: Mon Sep 3 22:24:19 2018 -0400
Changes to meet Fellen editorial suggestions
diff --git a/guide/C/ch_basics.xml b/guide/C/ch_basics.xml
index a93b06f..d14a86b 100644
--- a/guide/C/ch_basics.xml
+++ b/guide/C/ch_basics.xml
@@ -638,17 +638,18 @@
require access to a MySQL or PostgreSQL database server and the installation of
additional database drivers on your machine.</para>
- <note>
+ <tip>
<para>Users can change the format at any time by using <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu>
<guimenuitem>Save As...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>. This will create a copy of
the data file in the selected format.</para>
- </note>
+ </tip>
</sect2>
<sect2 id="basics-files-storage-comparison">
<title>Storage Comparison and Recommendations</title>
<para>Each storage format has benefits and shortcomings that users should
- consider for their needs and abilities. See the Storage Comparison Table below
+ consider for their needs and abilities. See the
+ <link linkend='basics-storage-comparison-table' endterm="basics-storage-comparison-table.title"/> below
for further details.</para>
<para>The <acronym>XML</acronym> format is the most stable and established,
@@ -658,7 +659,7 @@
<acronym>SQL</acronym> storage without the overhead of installing or managing
a full <acronym>DBMS</acronym>. MySQL and PostgreSQL require the installation
of MySQL and PostgreSQL <acronym>DBMS</acronym>, respectively, and are best
- implemented only by experienced database administrators.</para>
+ maintained only by experienced database administrators.</para>
<note>
<para>Use of a <acronym>SQL</acronym> back end for storage implies to many
@@ -668,9 +669,9 @@
although it is a long term goal of the development team. </para>
</note>
</sect2>
- <sect2 id="basics-files-storagetable">
+ <sect2 id="basics-storage-comparison-tblsect">
<title>Storage Comparison Table</title>
- <table frame="topbot" id="storage-comparison">
+ <table frame="topbot" id="basics-storage-comparison-table">
<title>Storage Comparison</title>
<tgroup align="left" cols="5">
commit f5acedca1d763d5d193ebdf1fe985168047caaad
Author: David Thomas <sunfish62 at yahoo.com>
Date: Fri Aug 31 16:33:38 2018 -0400
Making "No"
diff --git a/guide/C/ch_basics.xml b/guide/C/ch_basics.xml
index d75dabf..a93b06f 100644
--- a/guide/C/ch_basics.xml
+++ b/guide/C/ch_basics.xml
@@ -739,10 +739,10 @@
<row>
<entry namest="c1item" >Multi-user</entry>
- <entry align="center" namest="c2xml" > N </entry>
- <entry align="center" namest="c3sqlite" > N </entry>
- <entry align="center" namest="c4mysql" > N </entry>
- <entry align="center" namest="c5pgsql" > N </entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c2xml" > No </entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c3sqlite" > No </entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c4mysql" > No </entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c5pgsql" > No </entry>
</row>
</tbody>
</tgroup>
commit 6929e9f1c46158447009ccd35d2b4d1a344fe593
Author: David Thomas <sunfish62 at yahoo.com>
Date: Fri Aug 31 14:51:46 2018 -0400
Final edit per GJanssens suggestion.
diff --git a/guide/C/ch_basics.xml b/guide/C/ch_basics.xml
index 3bdd1e8..d75dabf 100644
--- a/guide/C/ch_basics.xml
+++ b/guide/C/ch_basics.xml
@@ -654,8 +654,11 @@
<para>The <acronym>XML</acronym> format is the most stable and established,
and for this reason, it is recommended for most users. <acronym>SQL</acronym>
storage was added for the 2.4 release and has become an increasingly popular
- choice for users, but can require experience with <acronym>DBMS</acronym>
- applications.</para>
+ choice for users. The SQLite format allows users to realize the benefits of
+ <acronym>SQL</acronym> storage without the overhead of installing or managing
+ a full <acronym>DBMS</acronym>. MySQL and PostgreSQL require the installation
+ of MySQL and PostgreSQL <acronym>DBMS</acronym>, respectively, and are best
+ implemented only by experienced database administrators.</para>
<note>
<para>Use of a <acronym>SQL</acronym> back end for storage implies to many
commit 98040e597510147cef536a1dbb230c64278dba4a
Author: David Thomas <sunfish62 at yahoo.com>
Date: Fri Aug 31 12:38:43 2018 -0400
Further edits, and actually checked for parsing accuracy ;)
diff --git a/guide/C/ch_basics.xml b/guide/C/ch_basics.xml
index c6b49ad..3bdd1e8 100644
--- a/guide/C/ch_basics.xml
+++ b/guide/C/ch_basics.xml
@@ -643,6 +643,7 @@
<guimenuitem>Save As...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>. This will create a copy of
the data file in the selected format.</para>
</note>
+ </sect2>
<sect2 id="basics-files-storage-comparison">
<title>Storage Comparison and Recommendations</title>
@@ -703,16 +704,14 @@
<row>
<entry namest="c1item" >File extension</entry>
- <entry align="center" namest="c2xml" > gnucash </entry>
- <entry align="center" namest="c3sqlite" > gnucash </entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c2xml" nameend="c3sqlite" > gnucash </entry>
<entry align="center" namest="c4mysql" nameend="c5pgsql" > N/A<footnote>
<para>MySQL and PostgreSQL place data within their own storage system.</para></footnote></entry>
</row>
<row>
<entry namest="c1item" >Additional software</entry>
- <entry align="center" namest="c2xml" > None </entry>
- <entry align="center" namest="c3sqlite" > None </entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c2xml" nameend="c3sqlite" > None </entry>
<entry align="center" namest="c4mysql" > MySQL </entry>
<entry align="center" namest="c5pgsql" > PostgreSQL </entry>
</row>
@@ -732,7 +731,7 @@
<row>
<entry namest="c1item" >File Save</entry>
<entry align="center" namest="c2xml" > On command </entry>
- <entry align="center" namest="c3sqlite" namend="c5pgsql" > On commit </entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c3sqlite" nameend="c5pgsql" > On commit </entry>
</row>
<row>
commit 1840b871a0f733b404b44291fbebe5b195eeda78
Author: David Thomas <sunfish62 at yahoo.com>
Date: Fri Aug 31 12:16:04 2018 -0400
Adding editorial changes
diff --git a/guide/C/ch_basics.xml b/guide/C/ch_basics.xml
index f92ad63..c6b49ad 100644
--- a/guide/C/ch_basics.xml
+++ b/guide/C/ch_basics.xml
@@ -625,144 +625,126 @@
<para><application>&app;</application> offers several formats for storing
your financial data. The default file storage format is <acronym>XML</acronym>,
while <acronym>SQL</acronym> storage is available in SQLite, MySQL, and PostgreSQL
- formats. Users can choose a file format from the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu>
- <guimenuitem>Save </guimenuitem></menuchoice> and <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu>
+ formats. Users can choose a file format for new files from <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu>
+ <guimenuitem>Save </guimenuitem></menuchoice> and for existing files from <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu>
<guimenuitem>Save As...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> dialogs.</para>
- <para>The <acronym>XML</acronym> storage format is a text file that is compressed
- with gzip, which is a preference that is set at <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu>
+ <para>The <acronym>XML</acronym> storage format is a text file that by default is compressed,
+ which is a preference that is set at <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu>
<guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> <guilabel>General</guilabel>
- <guilabel>Compress files</guilabel>. <acronym>SQL</acronym> storage is available
- via the <acronym>DBI</acronym> back end; use of MySQL and PostgreSQL requires
- installation of those <acronym>DBMS</acronym> packages as well as additional
- <acronym>DBI</acronym> drivers.</para>
+ <guilabel>Compress files</guilabel>. SQLite storage is also available, and stores
+ your data in a single file on your system, like the <acronym>XML</acronym> format. However,
+ internally, an SQLite file is managed as a database. The MySQL and PostgreSQL storage options
+ require access to a MySQL or PostgreSQL database server and the installation of
+ additional database drivers on your machine.</para>
<note>
<para>Users can change the format at any time by using <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu>
<guimenuitem>Save As...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>. This will create a copy of
the data file in the selected format.</para>
</note>
- <sect3 id="basics-files-storage-comparison">
- <title>Storage Comparison</title>
-
- <para>Each storage format has benefits and shortcomings that users should
- consider for their needs and abilities. See the Storage Comparison Table below
- for further details.</para>
-
- <para>The <acronym>XML</acronym> format is the most stable and established,
- and for this reason, it is recommended for most users. <acronym>SQL</acronym>
- storage was added for the 2.4 release and has become an increasingly popular
- choice for users, but can require experience with <acronym>DBMS</acronym>
- applications.</para>
+
+ <sect2 id="basics-files-storage-comparison">
+ <title>Storage Comparison and Recommendations</title>
+ <para>Each storage format has benefits and shortcomings that users should
+ consider for their needs and abilities. See the Storage Comparison Table below
+ for further details.</para>
+
+ <para>The <acronym>XML</acronym> format is the most stable and established,
+ and for this reason, it is recommended for most users. <acronym>SQL</acronym>
+ storage was added for the 2.4 release and has become an increasingly popular
+ choice for users, but can require experience with <acronym>DBMS</acronym>
+ applications.</para>
- <note>
- <para>Use of a <acronym>SQL</acronym> back end for storage implies to many
- that <application>&app;</application> has fully implemented <acronym>DBMS</acronym>
- features, including multi-user and incremental data manipulation. However,
- <application>&app;</application> does not currently implement these features,
- although it is a long term goal of the development team. </para>
- </note>
-
- <table frame="topbot" id="storage-comparison">
- <title>Storage Comparison</title>
-
- <tgroup align="left" cols="5">
- <colspec colname="c1item" ></colspec>
- <colspec colname="c2xml" ></colspec>
- <colspec colname="c3sqlite" ></colspec>
- <colspec colname="c4mysql" ></colspec>
- <colspec colname="c5postgresql" ></colspec>
-
- <thead>
- <row>
- <entry> </entry>
- <entry align="center">XML</entry>
- <entry align="center">SQLite</entry>
- <entry align="center">MySQL</entry>
- <entry align="center">PostgreSQL</entry>
- </row>
- </thead>
-
- <tbody>
- <row>
- <entry >Installation</entry>
- <entry align="center" namest="c2xml" > Default </entry>
- <entry align="center" namest="c3sqlite" > libdbi - 1 </entry>
- <entry align="center" namest="c4mysql" > libdbi </entry>
- <entry align="center" namest="c5postgresql" > libdbi </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry >File extension</entry>
+ <note>
+ <para>Use of a <acronym>SQL</acronym> back end for storage implies to many
+ that <application>&app;</application> has fully implemented <acronym>DBMS</acronym>
+ features, including multi-user and incremental data manipulation. However,
+ <application>&app;</application> does not currently implement these features,
+ although it is a long term goal of the development team. </para>
+ </note>
+ </sect2>
+ <sect2 id="basics-files-storagetable">
+ <title>Storage Comparison Table</title>
+ <table frame="topbot" id="storage-comparison">
+ <title>Storage Comparison</title>
+
+ <tgroup align="left" cols="5">
+ <colspec colname="c1item" ></colspec>
+ <colspec colname="c2xml" ></colspec>
+ <colspec colname="c3sqlite" ></colspec>
+ <colspec colname="c4mysql" ></colspec>
+ <colspec colname="c5pgsql" ></colspec>
+
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry> </entry>
+ <entry align="center">XML</entry>
+ <entry align="center">SQLite</entry>
+ <entry align="center">MySQL</entry>
+ <entry align="center">PostgreSQL</entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c1item" >Availability</entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c2xml" > Built-in </entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c3sqlite" nameend="c5pgsql" > Depends on packaging<footnote>
+ <para>SQLite relies on an additional package and driver (called libdbi
+ and libdbd-sqlite3, respectively), which are installed by
+ default on Mac OS and Windows. Linux users may need to manually
+ install these for SQLite.</para>
+ <para>MySQL and PostgreSQL may require the installation of additional software drivers
+ (libdbd-mysql and libdbd-pgsql).</para>
+ </footnote>
+ </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c1item" >File extension</entry>
<entry align="center" namest="c2xml" > gnucash </entry>
<entry align="center" namest="c3sqlite" > gnucash </entry>
- <entry align="center" namest="c4mysql" > N/A - 2 </entry>
- <entry align="center" namest="c5postgresql" > N/A - 2 </entry>
- </row>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c4mysql" nameend="c5pgsql" > N/A<footnote>
+ <para>MySQL and PostgreSQL place data within their own storage system.</para></footnote></entry>
+ </row>
- <row>
- <entry >Additional software</entry>
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c1item" >Additional software</entry>
<entry align="center" namest="c2xml" > None </entry>
<entry align="center" namest="c3sqlite" > None </entry>
<entry align="center" namest="c4mysql" > MySQL </entry>
- <entry align="center" namest="c5postgresql" > PostgreSQL </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry >Additional expertise</entry>
- <entry align="center" namest="c2xml" > None </entry>
- <entry align="center" namest="c3sqlite" > None </entry>
- <entry align="center" namest="c4mysql" > DBMS </entry>
- <entry align="center" namest="c5postgresql" > DBMS </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry >Compression</entry>
- <entry align="center" namest="c2xml" > Y </entry>
- <entry align="center" namest="c3sqlite" > N </entry>
- <entry align="center" namest="c4mysql" > N </entry>
- <entry align="center" namest="c5postgresql" > N </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry >Save on command</entry>
- <entry align="center" namest="c2xml" > Y </entry>
- <entry align="center" namest="c3sqlite" > N </entry>
- <entry align="center" namest="c4mysql" > N </entry>
- <entry align="center" namest="c5postgresql" > N </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry >Save on commit</entry>
- <entry align="center" namest="c2xml" > N </entry>
- <entry align="center" namest="c3sqlite" > Y </entry>
- <entry align="center" namest="c4mysql" > Y </entry>
- <entry align="center" namest="c5postgresql" > Y </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry >Uses log files</entry>
- <entry align="center" namest="c2xml" > Y </entry>
- <entry align="center" namest="c3sqlite" > N </entry>
- <entry align="center" namest="c4mysql" > N </entry>
- <entry align="center" namest="c5postgresql" > N </entry>
- </row>
-
- <row>
- <entry >Multi-user</entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c5pgsql" > PostgreSQL </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c1item" >Additional expertise</entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c2xml" nameend="c3sqlite" > None </entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c4mysql" nameend="c5pgsql" > Database Administrator </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c1item" >Compression</entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c2xml" > gzip </entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c3sqlite" nameend="c5pgsql" > N/A </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c1item" >File Save</entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c2xml" > On command </entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c3sqlite" namend="c5pgsql" > On commit </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry namest="c1item" >Multi-user</entry>
<entry align="center" namest="c2xml" > N </entry>
<entry align="center" namest="c3sqlite" > N </entry>
<entry align="center" namest="c4mysql" > N </entry>
- <entry align="center" namest="c5postgresql" > N </entry>
- </row>
- </tbody>
- </tgroup>
- </table>
- <para>1 - SQLite relies on libdbi. However, it is available by
- default on Mac OS and Windows. Linux users may need to manually
- install libdbi drivers for SQLite.</para>
- <para>2 - MySQL and PostgreSQL place data within their own storage system.</para>
- </sect3>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c5pgsql" > N </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
</sect2>
<sect2 id="basics-create-data">
commit 9dfd19c83e8dcf9597165995b770844967b5d638
Author: David Thomas <sunfish62 at yahoo.com>
Date: Fri Aug 17 00:03:11 2018 -0700
Bug 777893 - Add information to Guide about file formats, esp. SQL
diff --git a/guide/C/ch_basics.xml b/guide/C/ch_basics.xml
index a8527ef..f92ad63 100644
--- a/guide/C/ch_basics.xml
+++ b/guide/C/ch_basics.xml
@@ -619,11 +619,151 @@
<sect1 id="basics-files1">
<title>Storing your financial data</title>
-
- <para><application>&app;</application> is able to <link linkend="basics-store-data">store</link>
- your financial data in files or <acronym>SQL</acronym> databases so that they can be
- <link linkend="basics-open-data">opened</link> and modified at a later time.
- But first you need to <link linkend="basics-create-data">create</link> a container for your data.</para>
+ <sect2 id="basics-files1-overview">
+ <title>Overview</title>
+
+ <para><application>&app;</application> offers several formats for storing
+ your financial data. The default file storage format is <acronym>XML</acronym>,
+ while <acronym>SQL</acronym> storage is available in SQLite, MySQL, and PostgreSQL
+ formats. Users can choose a file format from the <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu>
+ <guimenuitem>Save </guimenuitem></menuchoice> and <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu>
+ <guimenuitem>Save As...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> dialogs.</para>
+
+ <para>The <acronym>XML</acronym> storage format is a text file that is compressed
+ with gzip, which is a preference that is set at <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu>
+ <guimenuitem>Preferences</guimenuitem></menuchoice> <guilabel>General</guilabel>
+ <guilabel>Compress files</guilabel>. <acronym>SQL</acronym> storage is available
+ via the <acronym>DBI</acronym> back end; use of MySQL and PostgreSQL requires
+ installation of those <acronym>DBMS</acronym> packages as well as additional
+ <acronym>DBI</acronym> drivers.</para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>Users can change the format at any time by using <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu>
+ <guimenuitem>Save As...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>. This will create a copy of
+ the data file in the selected format.</para>
+ </note>
+ <sect3 id="basics-files-storage-comparison">
+ <title>Storage Comparison</title>
+
+ <para>Each storage format has benefits and shortcomings that users should
+ consider for their needs and abilities. See the Storage Comparison Table below
+ for further details.</para>
+
+ <para>The <acronym>XML</acronym> format is the most stable and established,
+ and for this reason, it is recommended for most users. <acronym>SQL</acronym>
+ storage was added for the 2.4 release and has become an increasingly popular
+ choice for users, but can require experience with <acronym>DBMS</acronym>
+ applications.</para>
+
+ <note>
+ <para>Use of a <acronym>SQL</acronym> back end for storage implies to many
+ that <application>&app;</application> has fully implemented <acronym>DBMS</acronym>
+ features, including multi-user and incremental data manipulation. However,
+ <application>&app;</application> does not currently implement these features,
+ although it is a long term goal of the development team. </para>
+ </note>
+
+ <table frame="topbot" id="storage-comparison">
+ <title>Storage Comparison</title>
+
+ <tgroup align="left" cols="5">
+ <colspec colname="c1item" ></colspec>
+ <colspec colname="c2xml" ></colspec>
+ <colspec colname="c3sqlite" ></colspec>
+ <colspec colname="c4mysql" ></colspec>
+ <colspec colname="c5postgresql" ></colspec>
+
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry> </entry>
+ <entry align="center">XML</entry>
+ <entry align="center">SQLite</entry>
+ <entry align="center">MySQL</entry>
+ <entry align="center">PostgreSQL</entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry >Installation</entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c2xml" > Default </entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c3sqlite" > libdbi - 1 </entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c4mysql" > libdbi </entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c5postgresql" > libdbi </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry >File extension</entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c2xml" > gnucash </entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c3sqlite" > gnucash </entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c4mysql" > N/A - 2 </entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c5postgresql" > N/A - 2 </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry >Additional software</entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c2xml" > None </entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c3sqlite" > None </entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c4mysql" > MySQL </entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c5postgresql" > PostgreSQL </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry >Additional expertise</entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c2xml" > None </entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c3sqlite" > None </entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c4mysql" > DBMS </entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c5postgresql" > DBMS </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry >Compression</entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c2xml" > Y </entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c3sqlite" > N </entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c4mysql" > N </entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c5postgresql" > N </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry >Save on command</entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c2xml" > Y </entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c3sqlite" > N </entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c4mysql" > N </entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c5postgresql" > N </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry >Save on commit</entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c2xml" > N </entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c3sqlite" > Y </entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c4mysql" > Y </entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c5postgresql" > Y </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry >Uses log files</entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c2xml" > Y </entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c3sqlite" > N </entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c4mysql" > N </entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c5postgresql" > N </entry>
+ </row>
+
+ <row>
+ <entry >Multi-user</entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c2xml" > N </entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c3sqlite" > N </entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c4mysql" > N </entry>
+ <entry align="center" namest="c5postgresql" > N </entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+ <para>1 - SQLite relies on libdbi. However, it is available by
+ default on Mac OS and Windows. Linux users may need to manually
+ install libdbi drivers for SQLite.</para>
+ <para>2 - MySQL and PostgreSQL place data within their own storage system.</para>
+ </sect3>
+ </sect2>
<sect2 id="basics-create-data">
<title>Creating a file</title>
commit c111e08b7ac3b2309954248f5ceba452e05b3cb5
Author: Frank H. Ellenberger <frank.h.ellenberger at gmail.com>
Date: Thu Sep 6 04:24:57 2018 +0200
Maintenance of Help:Reports
Fix typos of commit 0522742.
Add links for common report options.
diff --git a/help/C/Help_ch_Reports.xml b/help/C/Help_ch_Reports.xml
index a7c6451..cd9efbc 100644
--- a/help/C/Help_ch_Reports.xml
+++ b/help/C/Help_ch_Reports.xml
@@ -196,7 +196,7 @@
</sect2>
<sect2 id="report-common">
- <title>Common Report Options</title>
+ <title id="report-common.title">Common Report Options</title>
<para>Many reports share similar options. Some common ones include:</para>
@@ -280,9 +280,9 @@
<listitem>
<para>Price Source: Select how stock and currency prices are calculated in this report. Choose between:
<itemizedlist>
- <listitem><para>Nearest in time (default for most reports): A price retreived from the prices database on the date nearest to the date of the report or of the datum for time-series reports.</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>Nearest in time (default for most reports): A price retrieved from the prices database on the date nearest to the date of the report or of the datum for time-series reports.</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>Most recent: The latest price in the price database.</para></listitem>
- <listitem><para>Average Cost: The amount-weighted<emphasis>net</emphasis> average of <emphasis>all</emphasis> splits exchanging the commodity for another <emphasis>regardless of account</emphasis>. Gain/loss splits are included in the calculation.</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>Average Cost: The amount-weighted <emphasis>net</emphasis> average of <emphasis>all</emphasis> splits exchanging the commodity for another <emphasis>regardless of account</emphasis>. Gain/loss splits are <emphasis>included</emphasis> in the calculation.</para></listitem>
<listitem><para>Weighted Average: The <emphasis>gross</emphasis> amount-weighted average price of <emphasis>all</emphasis> splits exchanging the commodity for another <emphasis>regardless of account</emphasis>. Gain/Loss splits are <emphasis>not</emphasis> in the calculation.</para></listitem>
</itemizedlist>
More information on Average Cost and Weighted Average may be found in the Investments chapter of The Tutorial and Concepts Guide.</para>
@@ -1136,7 +1136,8 @@
<sect4 id="report-pay-aging-opts">
<title>Report Options</title>
- <note><para>See <emphasis>Common Report Options</emphasis> in the
+ <note><para>See
+ <link linkend='report-common' endterm="report-common.title"/> in the
<emphasis>Configuring Reports and Charts</emphasis> section of this
help manual for more details of the common options.
</para>
@@ -1146,24 +1147,25 @@
<listitem><para><emphasis>General tab</emphasis></para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem><para><guilabel> Report name:</guilabel>
- Enter a descriptive name for this report - see common report
- options.</para>
+ Enter a descriptive name for this report - see
+ <link linkend='report-common' endterm="report-common.title"/>.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem><para><guilabel>Stylesheet:</guilabel>
- Select a style sheet for this report - see common report
- options.</para>
+ Select a style sheet for this report - see
+ <link linkend='report-common' endterm="report-common.title"/>.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem><para><guilabel>To:</guilabel> Select a date
to report on or a named date. Transactions up to and
including the selected date will be used to calculate the
- outstanding aged balances. See common report options.</para>
+ outstanding aged balances. See
+ <link linkend='report-common' endterm="report-common.title"/>.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem><para><guilabel>Report's currency:</guilabel>
- Select the currency to display the values in - see common
- report options.</para>
+ Select the currency to display the values in - see
+ <link linkend='report-common' endterm="report-common.title"/></para>
</listitem>
<listitem><para><guilabel>Price Source:</guilabel>
@@ -1327,7 +1329,8 @@
<sect4 id="report-rec-aging-opts">
<title>Report Options</title>
- <note><para>See <emphasis>Common Report Options</emphasis> in the
+ <note><para>See
+ <link linkend='report-common' endterm="report-common.title"/> in the
<emphasis>Configuring Reports and Charts</emphasis> section of this
help manual for more details of the common options.
</para>
@@ -1337,28 +1340,29 @@
<listitem><para><emphasis>General tab</emphasis></para>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem><para><guilabel> Report name:</guilabel>
- Enter a descriptive name for this report - see common report
- options.</para>
+ Enter a descriptive name for this report - see
+ <link linkend='report-common' endterm="report-common.title"/>.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem><para><guilabel>Stylesheet:</guilabel>
- Select a style sheet for this report - see common report
- options.</para>
+ Select a style sheet for this report - see
+ <link linkend='report-common' endterm="report-common.title"/>.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem><para><guilabel>To:</guilabel> Select a date
to report on or a named date. Transactions up to and
including the selected date will be used to calculate the
- outstanding aged balances. See common report options.</para>
+ outstanding aged balances. See
+ <link linkend='report-common' endterm="report-common.title"/>.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem><para><guilabel>Report's currency:</guilabel>
- Select the currency to display the values in - see common
- report options.</para>
+ Select the currency to display the values in - see
+ <link linkend='report-common' endterm="report-common.title"/>.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem><para><guilabel>Price Source:</guilabel>
- Select the source of price information used for currency
+ Select the source of price information used for commodity
conversion if needed. One of</para>
<informaltable>
<tgroup cols="2">
@@ -1367,7 +1371,7 @@
volume-weighted net average price of all exchanges</entry>
</row>
<row><entry>Weighted Average (default)</entry><entry>
- The volume-weighted gross average price of all exchagnes</entry>
+ The volume-weighted gross average price of all exchanges</entry>
</row>
<row><entry>Most recent</entry><entry>The most recent
recorded price</entry>
commit 76f4d573dbd8aa20e8d0ad730ecb1e172d03734b
Author: mikeweilgart <mikeweilgart at gmail.com>
Date: Tue Jul 24 23:58:22 2018 -0700
Typo fixes
diff --git a/guide/C/ch_txns.xml b/guide/C/ch_txns.xml
index 635c19d..711eabe 100644
--- a/guide/C/ch_txns.xml
+++ b/guide/C/ch_txns.xml
@@ -1154,17 +1154,17 @@
</imageobject>
<textobject>
- <phrase>Entered scehduled transaction</phrase>
+ <phrase>Entered scheduled transaction</phrase>
</textobject>
- <caption><para>Entered scehduled transaction</para></caption>
+ <caption><para>Entered scheduled transaction</para></caption>
</mediaobject>
</screenshot>
<tip>
<para>If you click in the calendar part on the first day of one month, a
small window, following your mouse, will show you what is planned for
- this day. To make the small window dissapear again, just click in it
+ this day. To make the small window disappear again, just click in it
one more time.</para>
</tip>
commit 052274207e2b565fb13c6ea8b415668b878d326d
Author: John Ralls <jralls at ceridwen.us>
Date: Thu Aug 30 14:26:56 2018 -0700
Elaborate and correct the descriptions of the report price source option.
diff --git a/guide/C/ch_invest.xml b/guide/C/ch_invest.xml
index 0934f37..90b9b91 100644
--- a/guide/C/ch_invest.xml
+++ b/guide/C/ch_invest.xml
@@ -1470,14 +1470,12 @@ Income
</sect2>
<sect2 id="invest-stockprice-report">
- <title>Selecting <quote>Price Source</quote> in Stock Value Reports</title>
+ <title>The <quote>Price Source</quote> in Reports</title>
- <para>Most <application>&app;</application> Asset reports have options to set/modify a number of parameters for the report. The
- Options windows is displayed by selecting the report tab then clicking on either the <guibutton>Options</guibutton>
+ <para>Most <application>&app;</application> reports have options to set/modify a number of parameters for the report. The
+ Options dialog box is displayed by selecting the report tab then clicking on either the <guibutton>Options</guibutton>
icon in the <emphasis>Menubar</emphasis> or selecting <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Report Options</guimenuitem></menuchoice>.
- The <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab in the
- resulting window contains various parameters for the report. One of these is <quote>Price Source</quote> which of offers
- three alternatives to determine stock prices in reports:</para>
+ <guilabel>Price Source</guilabel> determines how accounts denominated in commodities different from the report currency are converted to the report currency. Depending on the report the selector may appear in either the <guilabel>General</guilabel>, the <guilabel>Commodities</guilabel>, or the <guilabel>Display</guilabel> tab of the <guilabel>Report Options</guilabel> dialog box.
<note>
<para>In the example below, the report is a customization of
the <emphasis role="strong">Average Balance</emphasis> report
@@ -1487,41 +1485,46 @@ Income
<mediaobject>
<imageobject>
<imagedata fileref="figures/invest_stockvalue_report_options.png"
- format="PNG" srccredit="Dave Herman" ></imagedata>
+ format="PNG" srccredit="John Ralls" ></imagedata>
</imageobject>
<textobject>
- <phrase>Determining Stock Price Source in Reports</phrase>
+ <phrase>Determining Stock Price/Currency Exchange Rate Source in Reports</phrase>
</textobject>
- <caption><para>Determining the value of a stock commodity in a
- report by setting the Price Source option.</para></caption>
+ <caption><para>Determining the value of a stock commodity or
+ a currency other than the report currency in a report by
+ setting the Price Source option.</para></caption>
</mediaobject>
</screenshot>
<itemizedlist>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Weighted Average</guilabel> - gives you a graph of
- the weighted price of all <emphasis>transactions</emphasis>. It will
- <emphasis>not</emphasis> take into account prices defined in the
- price editor.</para>
+ <para><guilabel>Weighted Average</guilabel>: Calculates the price by summing the absolute value of the amount and the absolute value of every split in every account denominated in the commodity, excluding those splits with a zero amount, and dividing the sum of values by the sum of amounts to obtain a price. For example, if you had a buy transaction for 200 shares of XYZ for a total of 2000 and a sell of 100 for 1300 the weighted average would be 3300/300 or 11/share.
+ </para>
+ <note><para>Gain/Loss splits have an amount of 0 and are <emphasis>not</emphasis> included in this calculation.</para></note>
</listitem>
-
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Most recent</guilabel> - displays the changing value
- of your stocks based solely on <emphasis>the most recent</emphasis>
- price available from the price editor. The price figuring in your
- stock transactions is <emphasis>not</emphasis> considered.</para>
+ <para><guilabel>Average Cost</guilabel>: Calculates the price by summing the amounts and values of every split in every account denominated in the commodity, including the zero amount splits. In the example above, with an additional split (either part of the sale transaction or in a separate transaction) booking the gain at 0 shares and a 300 gain, the average cost is 1000/100 (2000 original cost - 1300 proceeds from the sale + 300 gain)/(200 - 100) shares or 10/share.
+ </para>
+
+ <note><para>Gain/Loss splits <emphasis>are</emphasis> included in this calculation.
+ </para></note>
+ <note><para>This is the <emphasis>only</emphasis> <guilabel>Price Source</guilabel> that will balance the <guilabel>Trial Balance Report</guilabel> and in order for it to balance you <emphasis>must</emphasis> correctly book your gains and losses.
+ </para></note>
+ </listitem>
+ <listitem>
+ <para><guilabel>Most Recent</guilabel>: Uses the latest price from the price database.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para><guilabel>Nearest in time</guilabel> - the graph is
- exclusively based on the prices available from the price editor. The
- value of your stock at each step and point in time is calculated
- based on the nearest available price in the price editor.</para>
+ <para><guilabel>Nearest in time</guilabel>: Uses the price nearest in time to the report date—the datum date for time series reports like <guilabel>Assets Over Time</guilabel>—from the price database.
+ </para>
+ <note><para>The nearest date isn’t necessarily before the date in question.
+ </para></note>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
-
+ </para>
<screenshot id="invest-stockvalue-report">
<mediaobject>
<imageobject>
diff --git a/guide/C/figures/invest_stockvalue_report_options.png b/guide/C/figures/invest_stockvalue_report_options.png
index 69dfbf8..2672d69 100644
Binary files a/guide/C/figures/invest_stockvalue_report_options.png and b/guide/C/figures/invest_stockvalue_report_options.png differ
diff --git a/help/C/Help_ch_Reports.xml b/help/C/Help_ch_Reports.xml
index 01847d5..a7c6451 100644
--- a/help/C/Help_ch_Reports.xml
+++ b/help/C/Help_ch_Reports.xml
@@ -278,9 +278,14 @@
</listitem>
<listitem>
- <para>Price Source: Select how stock and currency prices are calculated in this
- report. Choose between a weighted average of prices over all transactions, prices
- at current values, or prices at the time of the report date.</para>
+ <para>Price Source: Select how stock and currency prices are calculated in this report. Choose between:
+ <itemizedlist>
+ <listitem><para>Nearest in time (default for most reports): A price retreived from the prices database on the date nearest to the date of the report or of the datum for time-series reports.</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>Most recent: The latest price in the price database.</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>Average Cost: The amount-weighted<emphasis>net</emphasis> average of <emphasis>all</emphasis> splits exchanging the commodity for another <emphasis>regardless of account</emphasis>. Gain/loss splits are included in the calculation.</para></listitem>
+ <listitem><para>Weighted Average: The <emphasis>gross</emphasis> amount-weighted average price of <emphasis>all</emphasis> splits exchanging the commodity for another <emphasis>regardless of account</emphasis>. Gain/Loss splits are <emphasis>not</emphasis> in the calculation.</para></listitem>
+ </itemizedlist>
+ More information on Average Cost and Weighted Average may be found in the Investments chapter of The Tutorial and Concepts Guide.</para>
</listitem>
<listitem>
@@ -1168,11 +1173,10 @@
<tgroup cols="2">
<tbody>
<row><entry>Average Cost</entry><entry>The
- volume-weighted average cost of purchases</entry>
+ volume-weighted net average price of all exchanges.</entry>
</row>
<row><entry>Weighted Average (default)</entry><entry>
- The weighted average of all currency transactions
- in the past</entry>
+ The volume-weighted gross average price of all exchanges up to the date of the report</entry>
</row>
<row><entry>Most recent</entry><entry>The most recent
recorded price</entry>
@@ -1360,11 +1364,10 @@
<tgroup cols="2">
<tbody>
<row><entry>Average Cost</entry><entry>The
- volume-weighted average cost of purchases</entry>
+ volume-weighted net average price of all exchanges</entry>
</row>
<row><entry>Weighted Average (default)</entry><entry>
- The weighted average of all currency transactions
- in the past</entry>
+ The volume-weighted gross average price of all exchagnes</entry>
</row>
<row><entry>Most recent</entry><entry>The most recent
recorded price</entry>
commit a201379d959fb823ad948629f2dd0ba4dd46d59b
Author: Geert Janssens <geert at kobaltwit.be>
Date: Thu Aug 30 15:59:49 2018 +0200
Revert duplicate commit of "Document Filter/Closing transactions feature"
This reverts commit 9b6b811df1f1fb2cb5818bcaa824f3c7f8a852f0.
This was accidentally committed two times.
diff --git a/help/C/Help_ch_Reports.xml b/help/C/Help_ch_Reports.xml
index 7563af7..01847d5 100644
--- a/help/C/Help_ch_Reports.xml
+++ b/help/C/Help_ch_Reports.xml
@@ -562,17 +562,6 @@
</tgroup>
</informaltable>
</listitem>
- <listitem><para><guilabel>Closing transactions:</guilabel> One of</para>
- <informaltable>
- <tgroup cols="2">
- <tbody>
- <row><entry>Excluding closing transactions</entry><entry>Show only regular transactions</entry></row>
- <row><entry>Show both closing and regular transactions</entry><entry>Show both regular and closing transactions</entry></row>
- <row><entry>Show closing transactions only</entry><entry>Show closing transactions only</entry></row>
- </tbody>
- </tgroup>
- </informaltable>
- </listitem>
<listitem><para><guilabel>Reset defaults button:</guilabel> Reset all values to their defaults</para></listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</listitem>
commit 3d3b9c874564b9d279d5da189e37127ef6486dfd
Author: Geert Janssens <geert at kobaltwit.be>
Date: Thu Aug 30 15:57:31 2018 +0200
Revert duplicate commit of "Bug 791169 - Add Reconciliation definition to glossary"
This reverts commit 3f2a8c29abd5169d3af2eac3a325ff3f6c08e11e.
It was accidentally applied two times.
diff --git a/guide/C/gnc-glossary.xml b/guide/C/gnc-glossary.xml
index 405174f..3dedb0b 100644
--- a/guide/C/gnc-glossary.xml
+++ b/guide/C/gnc-glossary.xml
@@ -330,18 +330,6 @@
</glossdef>
</glossentry>
-<glossentry id="gnc-gl_reconciliation">
- <glossterm>Reconciliation</glossterm>
- <glossdef>
- <para>Reconciliation is a verification process in which the user compares their records
- with those of the financial institution to ensure that the records in each system agree
- at some particular point in time. During reconciliation, the user checks individual
- transactions in their file against the institution's statement; upon completion, the
- reported balances of the institution and the reconciled account will match at that
- point in the register.</para>
- </glossdef>
-</glossentry>
-
<glossentry id="gnc-gl_return">
<glossterm>Return</glossterm>
<glossdef>
commit 94f1bc12a3344224194cb6db1f331af6db1edc4e
Author: Geert Janssens <geert at kobaltwit.be>
Date: Thu Aug 30 14:58:30 2018 +0200
Add travis continuous integration to docs
That way all PR's we receive will automatically be checked with xmllint.
This may simplify contribution for people not comfortable with build tools.
diff --git a/.travis.yml b/.travis.yml
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..20e36fc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/.travis.yml
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+# Test
+sudo: required
+language: c++
+compiler: gcc
+env:
+ - BUILDENV=ubuntu-14.04 BUILDTYPE=autotools-make
+services:
+ - docker
+install:
+ - docker --version
+ - echo BUILDENV="$BUILDENV"
+ - docker build -f util/ci/${BUILDENV}-docker -t ${BUILDENV}-gnucashbuild util/ci
+script:
+ - echo BUILDTYPE="$BUILDTYPE"
+ - docker run -v "$(pwd)":/gnucash-docs:rw --env="BUILDTYPE=$BUILDTYPE" --rm ${BUILDENV}-gnucashbuild
diff --git a/util/ci/afterfailure b/util/ci/afterfailure
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..942f032
--- /dev/null
+++ b/util/ci/afterfailure
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+#!/bin/bash
+
+if [[ "$BUILDTYPE" == "cmake-make" ]] || [[ "$BUILDTYPE" == "cmake-ninja" ]]; then
+ echo "########################";
+ echo "##### LastTest.log #####";
+ echo "########################";
+ cat /build/Testing/Temporary/LastTest.log;
+else
+ if [[ "$BUILDTYPE" == "autotools-make" ]]; then
+ echo "##################################";
+ echo "##### See error output above #####";
+ echo "##################################";
+
+ echo "Unknown BUILDTYPE: \"$BUILDTYPE\", cannot create failure information.";
+fi
+# This script should fail so that the entire script will fail.
+exit 1;
diff --git a/util/ci/commonbuild b/util/ci/commonbuild
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f5c1570
--- /dev/null
+++ b/util/ci/commonbuild
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+#!/bin/bash -e
+
+mkdir -p "$HOME"/.local/share
+
+if [[ "$BUILDTYPE" == "autotools-make" ]]; then
+ cd gnucash-docs
+ ./autogen.sh
+ cd ..
+fi
+
+mkdir build
+cd build
+export TZ="America/Los_Angeles"
+
+if [[ "$BUILDTYPE" == "autotools-make" ]]; then
+ ../gnucash-docs/configure
+ make -j 4
+ make check || ../afterfailure
+else
+ echo "Unknown buildtype: \"$BUILDTYPE\". Not building."
+fi
+
diff --git a/util/ci/ubuntu-14.04-docker b/util/ci/ubuntu-14.04-docker
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e1a8e1e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/util/ci/ubuntu-14.04-docker
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+from ubuntu:14.04
+run apt-get update -qq
+run apt-get install -qq git bash-completion make xsltproc libxml2-utils autoconf libtool > /dev/null
+run apt-get --reinstall install -qq language-pack-en language-pack-fr
+copy ubuntu-14.04-testscript afterfailure commonbuild /
+run chmod +x /ubuntu-14.04-testscript /afterfailure /commonbuild
+entrypoint /ubuntu-14.04-testscript
diff --git a/util/ci/ubuntu-14.04-testscript b/util/ci/ubuntu-14.04-testscript
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..039784a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/util/ci/ubuntu-14.04-testscript
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+#!/bin/bash -e
+
+# -e above so that if any command has an exit code != 0, this script will
+# exit immediately.
+
+../commonbuild
commit 9b6b811df1f1fb2cb5818bcaa824f3c7f8a852f0
Author: Christopher Lam <christopher.lck at gmail.com>
Date: Sat May 12 21:56:07 2018 +0800
Document Filter/Closing transactions feature
diff --git a/help/C/Help_ch_Reports.xml b/help/C/Help_ch_Reports.xml
index 01847d5..7563af7 100644
--- a/help/C/Help_ch_Reports.xml
+++ b/help/C/Help_ch_Reports.xml
@@ -562,6 +562,17 @@
</tgroup>
</informaltable>
</listitem>
+ <listitem><para><guilabel>Closing transactions:</guilabel> One of</para>
+ <informaltable>
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <tbody>
+ <row><entry>Excluding closing transactions</entry><entry>Show only regular transactions</entry></row>
+ <row><entry>Show both closing and regular transactions</entry><entry>Show both regular and closing transactions</entry></row>
+ <row><entry>Show closing transactions only</entry><entry>Show closing transactions only</entry></row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </informaltable>
+ </listitem>
<listitem><para><guilabel>Reset defaults button:</guilabel> Reset all values to their defaults</para></listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</listitem>
commit 3f2a8c29abd5169d3af2eac3a325ff3f6c08e11e
Author: David T <sunfish62 at yahoo.com>
Date: Fri Aug 24 11:59:27 2018 -0400
Bug 791169 - Add Reconciliation definition to glossary
diff --git a/guide/C/gnc-glossary.xml b/guide/C/gnc-glossary.xml
index 3dedb0b..405174f 100644
--- a/guide/C/gnc-glossary.xml
+++ b/guide/C/gnc-glossary.xml
@@ -330,6 +330,18 @@
</glossdef>
</glossentry>
+<glossentry id="gnc-gl_reconciliation">
+ <glossterm>Reconciliation</glossterm>
+ <glossdef>
+ <para>Reconciliation is a verification process in which the user compares their records
+ with those of the financial institution to ensure that the records in each system agree
+ at some particular point in time. During reconciliation, the user checks individual
+ transactions in their file against the institution's statement; upon completion, the
+ reported balances of the institution and the reconciled account will match at that
+ point in the register.</para>
+ </glossdef>
+</glossentry>
+
<glossentry id="gnc-gl_return">
<glossterm>Return</glossterm>
<glossdef>
commit 8ffc1515cb0d5a6bc218fa6c6dd795d6bbc97d2f
Merge: 94744d9 f4a58ba
Author: Geert Janssens <geert at kobaltwit.be>
Date: Thu Aug 30 15:39:17 2018 +0200
Merge branch 'maint-progress' of https://github.com/christopherlam/gnucash-docs into maint
commit 94744d935411432992c2fccb257f4abdd3e3423f
Author: Frank H. Ellenberger <frank.h.ellenberger at gmail.com>
Date: Wed Aug 29 03:29:00 2018 +0200
Fix 2 typos
diff --git a/help/de/Help_tips-appendix.xml b/help/de/Help_tips-appendix.xml
index 9cd9d17..041a68e 100644
--- a/help/de/Help_tips-appendix.xml
+++ b/help/de/Help_tips-appendix.xml
@@ -869,8 +869,8 @@
<sect1>
<title>Yahoo-Besonderheiten</title>
<abstract>
- <para>Yahoo hat Kurse von vielen Börsen und Märkten angeboten. Alphavatage
- sollte sich küntig ähnlich verhalten, aber ohne Verzögerung. Außer
+ <para>Yahoo hat Kurse von vielen Börsen und Märkten angeboten. Alphavantage
+ sollte sich künftig ähnlich verhalten, aber ohne Verzögerung. Außer
für US-Märkte ist anzugeben, wo nachgesehen werden soll. Ein
typisches Yahoo-Symbol hat die Form <ISIN><Markt-Suffix>.
</para>
commit 93dbe52cc8c2de5a59529b396d1066d865b25839
Author: David T <sunfish62 at yahoo.com>
Date: Fri Aug 24 11:59:27 2018 -0400
Bug 791169 - Add Reconciliation definition to glossary
diff --git a/guide/C/gnc-glossary.xml b/guide/C/gnc-glossary.xml
index 043538a..3dedb0b 100644
--- a/guide/C/gnc-glossary.xml
+++ b/guide/C/gnc-glossary.xml
@@ -318,6 +318,18 @@
</glossdef>
</glossentry>
+<glossentry id="gnc-gl_reconciliation">
+ <glossterm>Reconciliation</glossterm>
+ <glossdef>
+ <para>Reconciliation is a verification process in which the user compares their records
+ with those of the financial institution to ensure that the records in each system agree
+ at some particular point in time. During reconciliation, the user checks individual
+ transactions in their file against the institution's statement; upon completion, the
+ reported balances of the institution and the reconciled account will match at that
+ point in the register.</para>
+ </glossdef>
+</glossentry>
+
<glossentry id="gnc-gl_return">
<glossterm>Return</glossterm>
<glossdef>
commit f4a58baa7229cdbb669fb57e79b80a5ac367055b
Author: Christopher Lam <christopher.lck at gmail.com>
Date: Thu May 17 16:57:13 2018 +0800
Add sample tax tables
diff --git a/guide/C/ch_bus_features.xml b/guide/C/ch_bus_features.xml
index cf8f694..c6a97c2 100644
--- a/guide/C/ch_bus_features.xml
+++ b/guide/C/ch_bus_features.xml
@@ -210,6 +210,134 @@ Basic A/R and A/P Account Hierarchy:
<para><emphasis>If unsure about tax law requirements, get professional advice. </emphasis></para>
</listitem>
</itemizedlist>
+
+ <para>The following charts illustrate sample tax tables and
+ may be used as starting points to determine the setup
+ appropriate for a particular jurisdiction.</para>
+
+ <table frame='all'>
+ <title>Sample Tax Table Entries for EC country (e.g. 21% / 6%
+ / 0% Belgium, 20% / 5% / 0% UK etc.) (2017)</title>
+ <tgroup cols='3' align='left' colsep='1' rowsep='1'>
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>Tax Table</entry>
+ <entry>Tax Table Entries [Asset/Liability]</entry>
+ <entry>Percentage or Amount</entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>Standard VAT Sales</entry>
+ <entry>VAT:Sales:Standard [L]</entry>
+ <entry>21%</entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>Reduced VAT Sales</entry>
+ <entry>VAT:Sales:Reduced [L]</entry>
+ <entry>6%</entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>Zero-Rated VAT Sales</entry>
+ <entry>VAT:Sales:Zero [L]</entry>
+ <entry>0%</entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows='1'>EC Sales</entry>
+ <entry>VAT:Sales:EC [L]</entry>
+ <entry>21%</entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>VAT:Sales:Reverse EC [L]</entry>
+ <entry>-21%</entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>Standard VAT Purchases</entry>
+ <entry>VAT:Purchases:Standard [A]</entry>
+ <entry>21%</entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>Reduced VAT Purchases</entry>
+ <entry>VAT:Purchases:Reduced [A]</entry>
+ <entry>6%</entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>Zero-Rated VAT Purchases</entry>
+ <entry>VAT:Purchases:Zero [A]</entry>
+ <entry>0%</entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+
+ <table frame='all'>
+ <title>Sample Tax Table Entries for Australia (2017)
+ </title>
+ <tgroup cols='3' align='left' colsep='1' rowsep='1'>
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>Tax Table</entry>
+ <entry>Tax Table Entries [Asset/Liability]</entry>
+ <entry>Percentage or Amount</entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry>Standard GST Sales</entry>
+ <entry>GST:Sales:Standard [L]</entry>
+ <entry>10%</entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>GST-free Sales</entry>
+ <entry>GST:Sales:Zero [L]</entry>
+ <entry>0%</entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>Standard GST Purchases</entry>
+ <entry>GST:Purchases:Standard [A]</entry>
+ <entry>10%</entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>GST-free Purchases</entry>
+ <entry>GST:Purchases:Zero [A]</entry>
+ <entry>0%</entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+
+ <table frame='all'>
+ <title>Sample Tax Table Entries for Cook County, Illinois (2017)</title>
+ <tgroup cols='3' align='left' colsep='1' rowsep='1'>
+ <thead>
+ <row>
+ <entry>Tax Table</entry>
+ <entry>Tax Table Entries [Asset/Liability]</entry>
+ <entry>Percentage or Amount</entry>
+ </row>
+ </thead>
+ <tbody>
+ <row>
+ <entry morerows='3'>Chicago Sales Taxes</entry>
+ <entry>Taxes:Sales:State [L]</entry>
+ <entry>6.25%</entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>Taxes:Sales:City [L]</entry>
+ <entry>1.25%</entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>Taxes:Sales:County [L]</entry>
+ <entry>1.75%</entry>
+ </row>
+ <row>
+ <entry>Taxes:Sales:Region [L]</entry>
+ <entry>1%</entry>
+ </row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </table>
+
</sect2>
<sect2 id="bus-setupcname">
commit ccbb2cabbfb7239d113683c7c4093222f4ca4b00
Author: Christopher Lam <christopher.lck at gmail.com>
Date: Sat May 12 21:56:07 2018 +0800
Document Filter/Closing transactions feature
diff --git a/help/C/Help_ch_Reports.xml b/help/C/Help_ch_Reports.xml
index 3ffcb48..01847d5 100644
--- a/help/C/Help_ch_Reports.xml
+++ b/help/C/Help_ch_Reports.xml
@@ -551,6 +551,17 @@
</tgroup>
</informaltable>
</listitem>
+ <listitem><para><guilabel>Closing transactions:</guilabel> One of</para>
+ <informaltable>
+ <tgroup cols="2">
+ <tbody>
+ <row><entry>Excluding closing transactions</entry><entry>Show only regular transactions</entry></row>
+ <row><entry>Show both closing and regular transactions</entry><entry>Show both regular and closing transactions</entry></row>
+ <row><entry>Show closing transactions only</entry><entry>Show closing transactions only</entry></row>
+ </tbody>
+ </tgroup>
+ </informaltable>
+ </listitem>
<listitem><para><guilabel>Reset defaults button:</guilabel> Reset all values to their defaults</para></listitem>
</itemizedlist>
</listitem>
Summary of changes:
.travis.yml | 15 +++
AUTHORS | 1 +
NEWS | 10 ++
chm.make | 13 +-
guide/C/appendixb.xml | 6 +-
guide/C/ch_basics.xml | 135 ++++++++++++++++++++-
guide/C/ch_bus_features.xml | 128 +++++++++++++++++++
guide/C/ch_invest.xml | 51 ++++----
guide/C/ch_txns.xml | 6 +-
.../C/figures/invest_stockvalue_report_options.png | Bin 57391 -> 81599 bytes
guide/C/gnc-glossary.xml | 12 ++
guide/C/gnucash-guide-C.omf | 8 +-
guide/C/gnucash-guide.xml | 20 ++-
guide/de/appendixb.xml | 6 +-
guide/de/gnucash-guide.xml | 4 +-
guide/it/gnucash-guide.xml | 8 +-
guide/ja/appendixb.xml | 6 +-
guide/ja/gnucash-guide.xml | 2 +-
guide/pt/appendixb.xml | 6 +-
guide/pt/gnucash-guide.xml | 2 +-
guide/ru/appendixb.xml | 6 +-
guide/ru/gnucash-guide.xml | 4 +-
help/C/Help_ch_Reports.xml | 72 ++++++-----
help/C/Help_tips-appendix.xml | 4 +-
help/C/gnucash-help-C.omf | 4 +-
help/C/gnucash-help.xml | 22 ++--
help/de/Help_tips-appendix.xml | 8 +-
help/de/gnucash-help.xml | 6 +-
help/it/gnucash-help.xml | 2 +-
help/pt/gnucash-help.xml | 2 +-
util/ci/afterfailure | 17 +++
util/ci/commonbuild | 22 ++++
util/ci/ubuntu-14.04-docker | 7 ++
util/ci/ubuntu-14.04-testscript | 6 +
34 files changed, 502 insertions(+), 119 deletions(-)
create mode 100644 .travis.yml
create mode 100755 util/ci/afterfailure
create mode 100644 util/ci/commonbuild
create mode 100644 util/ci/ubuntu-14.04-docker
create mode 100644 util/ci/ubuntu-14.04-testscript
More information about the gnucash-changes
mailing list